Odot Microstation Training

ODOT MicroStation V8i
Training Guide
Ohio Department of Transportation

September, 2013
Ohio Department of Transportation
MicroStation V8i Training Guide
September, 2013
The information provided in this manual is a product of ODOT and is not to be sold or otherwise
distributed for profit. If this manual is copied proper acknowledgment is to be given to Bentley Systems,
Incorporated for its content in this manual . There are no expressed or implied warranties concerning the
accuracy, completeness, reliability or usability of this information. Further, ODOT assumes no
responsibility for any incorrect results or damage resulting from the use of this information. All users
shall expressly hold ODOT harmless from any liability or loss due to any computer or software generated
problems associated with this product or manual.
MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated. Windows and Windows NT are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other brands and products names are trademarks of
their respective owners.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 – MicroStation Basics
1.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 1-3

1.2 ODOT CADD STANDARDS ............................................................................................. 1-3
1.2.1 CADD STANDARDS MANUAL ......................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 MICROSTATION STANDARD CADD FILE LOCATIONS ............................................................. 1-3
1.2.2.1 ODOT’s CADD Standards Directory ....................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.3 REVISIONS AND UPDATES .............................................................................................. 1-4
1.3 WHAT IS A MICROSTATION DESIGN FILE? ..................................................................... 1-5
1.4 STARTING MICROSTATION ........................................................................................... 1-5
1.5 MICROSTATION MANAGER DIALOG BOX ...................................................................... 1-7
1.5.1 THE MICROSTATION MANAGER DIALOG BOX ICONS ............................................................. 1-8
1.5.2 WORKSPACE COMPONENTS ......................................................................................... 1-10
1.6 OPENING DESIGN FILES .............................................................................................. 1-12
1.7 CLOSING DESIGN FILES ............................................................................................... 1-15
1.8 CREATING NEW DESIGN FILES..................................................................................... 1-16
1.9 SEED FILES.................................................................................................................. 1-17
1.10 COMPRESSING DESIGN FILES .................................................................................... 1-18
1.11 SAVING DESIGN FILES ............................................................................................... 1-20
1.11.2 SAVE SETTINGS ....................................................................................................... 1-21
1.12 EXITING MICROSTATION .......................................................................................... 1-22
ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual 1

Office of CADD and Mapping Services
Table of Contents
Chapter 2 – MicroStation Design Environment
2.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 2-3

2.2 MICROSTATION’S INTERFACE ....................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.1 MAIN MENU BAR ....................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.2 PRIMARY TOOL BOX .................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.2.1 Key-in Window ...................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.2.2 PopSet ................................................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.2.3 STANDARD TOOL BOX .................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.4 ATTRIBUTES TOOL BOX ................................................................................................. 2-8
2.2.4.1 Element Symbology............................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.4.2 Element Class ...................................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.5 VIEW WINDOW ........................................................................................................ 2-11
2.2.6 VIEW CONTROL BAR .................................................................................................. 2-12
2.2.7 VIEW GROUPS .......................................................................................................... 2-12
2.2.8 STATUS BAR ............................................................................................................ 2-13
2.2.9 ACCUDRAW WINDOW ................................................................................................ 2-14
2.2.10 TOOL SETTINGS WINDOW ......................................................................................... 2-14
2.2.11 MAIN TOOL BOX ..................................................................................................... 2-15
2.2.12 TASK NAVIGATION TOOL BOX..................................................................................... 2-17
2.2.13 WINDOW DOCKING OPTIONS ..................................................................................... 2-22
2.3 PRIORITY AND TRANSPARENCY .................................................................................. 2-23
2.3.1 PRIORITY ................................................................................................................ 2-23
2.3.2 TRANSPARENCY ......................................................................................................... 2-28
2.4 MOUSE BUTTON FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................... 2-31
2.4.1 CHANGE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS ................................................................................... 2-32
2.4.2 BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS .............................................................................................. 2-33
2.4.3 WHEEL MOUSE PREFERENCES....................................................................................... 2-34
2.5 RESET POP-UP MENU ................................................................................................. 2-35
2.6 KEYBOARD INPUT ...................................................................................................... 2-36
2.6.1 POSITIONAL KEYBOARD NAVIGATION ............................................................................. 2-37
2.6.1.1 Using Positional Keyboard Mapping with the Main Tool Box ............................................................. 2-38
2.6.1.2 Using Positional Keyboard Mapping with the Task Navigation Tool Box ........................................... 2-38
2.6.1.3 Using Positional Keyboard Mapping with the Tool Settings Window ................................................. 2-39
2.6.2 SPECIAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS FOR POSITIONAL KEYBOARD NAVIGATION ..................................... 2-40
2.6.3 CUSTOMIZING POSITION MAPPING ................................................................................ 2-40
2 ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual

Table of Contents
2.7 FUNCTION KEYS ......................................................................................................... 2-41

2.8 DESIGN FILE SETTINGS ................................................................................................ 2-41
2.8.1 WORKING UNITS ...................................................................................................... 2-42
2.8.1.1 Foot vs Survey Foot ............................................................................................................................. 2-44
2.8.2 CUSTOMIZING DISPLAY COLORS .................................................................................... 2-45
2.9 USER PREFERENCES .................................................................................................... 2-47
2.9.1 TRANSPARENT DIALOG BOXES ...................................................................................... 2-48
2.10 MICROSTATION’S ON LINE HELP ............................................................................... 2-49
Chapter 3 – Viewing Tools
3.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 3-3

3.2 ACTIVE VIEW ................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.3 OPEN A VIEW ............................................................................................................... 3-3
3.4 ARRANGING VIEWS ...................................................................................................... 3-4
3.5 VIEW GROUPS.............................................................................................................. 3-7
3.6 VIEW CONTROLS .......................................................................................................... 3-9
3.7 VIEW ATTRIBUTES ...................................................................................................... 3-11
3.8 SAVED VIEWS............................................................................................................. 3-13
3.9 VIEW PREFERENCES ................................................................................................... 3-17

Table of Contents
Chapter 4 - Models
4.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 4-3

4.2 WORKING WITH MODELS ............................................................................................. 4-3
4.2.1 TYPES OF MODELS ....................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.2 MODELS DIALOG BOX .................................................................................................. 4-5
4.3 MODEL PROPERTIES ..................................................................................................... 4-8
4.4 ODOT’S USE OF MODELS ............................................................................................ 4-10
4.4.1 ODOT’S STANDARD MODEL NAMES ............................................................................. 4-11
4.5 MODEL ANNOTATION SCALE ...................................................................................... 4-12
4.6 MODEL LINE STYLE SCALE ........................................................................................... 4-14
Chapter 5 - Levels
5.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 5-3

5.2 WHAT ARE LEVELS? ...................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3 THE ACTIVE LEVEL ........................................................................................................ 5-4
5.3.1 SETTING THE ACTIVE LEVEL ............................................................................................ 5-4
5.4 LEVEL LIBRARY ............................................................................................................. 5-5
5.4.1 NAMED LEVELS ........................................................................................................... 5-6
5.5 “BY LEVEL” SYMBOLOGY .............................................................................................. 5-7
5.5.1 USING COLOR, LINE STYLE, AND LINE WEIGHT SYMBOLOGY ................................................... 5-7
5.5.2 USING PRIORITY AND TRANSPARENCY SYMBOLOGY .............................................................. 5-8
5.6 LEVEL DISPLAY DIALOG BOX ......................................................................................... 5-9
5.6.1 TURNING LEVELS ON/OFF ........................................................................................... 5-15
5.6.1 SORTING LEVELS ....................................................................................................... 5-17
5.7 USING FILTERS ........................................................................................................... 5-18
5.8 LEVEL MANAGER ........................................................................................................ 5-20
5.8.1 TURNING LEVELS ON/OFF USING THE LEVEL MANAGER ....................................................... 5-22
5.8.2 SYMBOLOGY OVERRIDE .............................................................................................. 5-23

Table of Contents
Chapter 6 – Basic Drawing Tools
6.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 6-4

6.2 LINEAR ELEMENTS TOOL BOX ....................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.1 PLACE SMARTLINE ....................................................................................................... 6-7
6.2.2 PLACE LINE ................................................................................................................ 6-9
6.2.3 PLACE MULTILINE ..................................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.4 PLACE STREAM LINE STRING......................................................................................... 6-11
6.2.5 PLACE POINT OR STREAM CURVE................................................................................... 6-12
6.2.6 CONSTRUCT ANGLE BISECTOR ....................................................................................... 6-14
6.2.7 CONSTRUCT MINIMUM DISTANCE LINE ........................................................................... 6-14
6.2.8 CONSTRUCT LINE AT ACTIVE ANGLE ............................................................................... 6-15
6.3 POINTS TOOL BOX ...................................................................................................... 6-16
6.3.1 PLACE ACTIVE POINT .................................................................................................. 6-18
6.3.2 CONSTRUCT POINTS BETWEEN DATA POINTS.................................................................... 6-19
6.3.3 PROJECT ACTIVE POINT ONTO ELEMENT.......................................................................... 6-20
6.3.4 CONSTRUCT ACTIVE POINT AT INTERSECTION .................................................................... 6-21
6.3.5 CONSTRUCT POINTS ALONG ELEMENT ............................................................................ 6-22
6.3.6 CONSTRUCT ACTIVE POINTS AT DISTANCE ALONG ELEMENT ................................................. 6-23
6.4 POLYGONS TOOL BOX ................................................................................................ 6-24
6.4.1 PLACE BLOCK ........................................................................................................... 6-26
6.4.2 PLACE SHAPE ........................................................................................................... 6-27
6.4.3 PLACE ORTHOGONAL SHAPE ........................................................................................ 6-28
6.4.4 PLACE REGULAR POLYGON........................................................................................... 6-29
6.5 CIRCLES TOOL BOX ..................................................................................................... 6-30
6.5.1 PLACE CIRCLE ........................................................................................................... 6-32
6.5.2 PLACE ELLIPSE .......................................................................................................... 6-34
6.5.3 PLACE ARC .............................................................................................................. 6-36
6.5.4 PLACE HALF ELLIPSE ................................................................................................... 6-38
6.5.5 PLACE QUARTER ELLIPSE ............................................................................................. 6-38
6.5.6 MODIFY ARC RADIUS ................................................................................................. 6-39
6.5.7 MODIFY ARC ANGLE .................................................................................................. 6-40
6.5.8 MODIFY ARC AXIS ..................................................................................................... 6-40
6.6 DELETE ELEMENT TOOL .............................................................................................. 6-41
6.7 UNDO AND REDO FUNCTIONS .................................................................................... 6-42

Table of Contents
Chapter 7 – Drawing with Precision
7.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 7-3

7.2 USING LOCKS ............................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.1 LOCKS POP-UP MENU .................................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.2 LOCKS DIALOG BOX ..................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.3 LOCKS TOGGLES DIALOG ............................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.4 LOCK FUNCTIONS: ....................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.4.1 Snap Lock .............................................................................................................................................. 7-6
7.3 ACCUSNAP ................................................................................................................. 7-10

7.3.1 ACCUSNAP SETTINGS DIALOG BOX ................................................................................ 7-10
7.4. MICROSTATION’S COORDINATE SYSTEM ................................................................... 7-14
7.5 DATA ENTRY FORMATS .............................................................................................. 7-15
7.6 PRECISION PLACEMENT KEY-INS ................................................................................. 7-15
7.7 ACCUDRAW ............................................................................................................... 7-16
7.7.1 ACCUDRAW COMPASS ............................................................................................... 7-17
7.7.1.1 The origin point ................................................................................................................................... 7-18
7.7.1.2 The Frame (Drawing Plane Indicator) ................................................................................................. 7-18
7.7.1.3 The X/Y Axes........................................................................................................................................ 7-19
7.7.2 ACCUDRAW WINDOW ............................................................................................... 7-19
7.7.3 USING ACCUDRAW.................................................................................................... 7-20
7.7.3.1 AccuDraw’s Shortcut Key-ins .............................................................................................................. 7-22
7.7.3.2 AccuDraw’s Popup Calculator ............................................................................................................. 7-23
7.7.4 ACCUDRAW SETTINGS ................................................................................................ 7-23
7.7.4.1 AccuDraw Settings Operation Tab ...................................................................................................... 7-24
7.7.4.2 AccuDraw Settings Display Tab:.......................................................................................................... 7-25
7.7.4.3 AccuDraw Settings Coordinates Tab: .................................................................................................. 7-26

Table of Contents
Chapter 8 – Modification Tools
8.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 8-3

8.2 MANIPULATE TOOLS .................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.1 COPY ELEMENT ........................................................................................................... 8-5
8.2.2 MOVE ELEMENT ......................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.3 SCALE ELEMENT .......................................................................................................... 8-7
8.2.4 ROTATE ELEMENT........................................................................................................ 8-9
8.2.5 MIRROR ELEMENT ..................................................................................................... 8-10
8.2.5 MIRROR ELEMENT ..................................................................................................... 8-11
8.2.6 CONSTRUCT ARRAY ................................................................................................... 8-13
8.2.7 ALIGN EDGES ........................................................................................................... 8-15
8.2.8 STRETCH ELEMENT..................................................................................................... 8-16
8.2.9 MOVE/COPY PARALLEL .............................................................................................. 8-17
8.2.10 MOVE TO CONTACT ................................................................................................. 8-18
8.3 MODIFY ELEMENT TOOLS ........................................................................................... 8-19
8.3.1 MODIFY ELEMENT ..................................................................................................... 8-21
8.3.2 PARTIAL DELETE ........................................................................................................ 8-23
8.3.3 BREAK ELEMENT ....................................................................................................... 8-24
8.3.4 EXTEND LINE ............................................................................................................ 8-24
8.3.5 TRIM TO INTERSECTION ............................................................................................... 8-25
8.3.6 TRIM TO ELEMENT ..................................................................................................... 8-25
8.3.7 TRIM MULTIPLE ........................................................................................................ 8-27
8.3.8 INTELLITRIM ELEMENT ................................................................................................ 8-28
8.3.9 INSERT VERTEX ......................................................................................................... 8-29
8.3.10 DELETE VERTEX ....................................................................................................... 8-30
8.3.11 CONSTRUCT CIRCULAR FILLET ..................................................................................... 8-30
8.3.12 CONSTRUCT CHAMFER .............................................................................................. 8-31
8.4 ARC MODIFICATION TOOLS ........................................................................................ 8-32
8.4.1 MODIFY ARC RADIUS ................................................................................................. 8-33
8.4.2 MODIFY ARC ANGLE .................................................................................................. 8-33
8.4.3 MODIFY ARC AXIS ..................................................................................................... 8-33

Table of Contents
8.5 CHANGE ATTRIBUTES ................................................................................................. 8-34

8.5.1 CHANGE ELEMENT ATTRIBUTES ..................................................................................... 8-35
8.5.2 CHANGE TO ACTIVE AREA ............................................................................................ 8-37
8.5.3 CHANGE TO ACTIVE FILL TYPE ....................................................................................... 8-38
8.5.4 MODIFY LINE STYLE ATTRIBUTES ................................................................................... 8-39
8.5.5 CHANGE MULTI-LINE .................................................................................................. 8-40
8.5.6 MATCH ELEMENT ATTRIBUTES ...................................................................................... 8-41
8.5.7 SMARTMATCH ......................................................................................................... 8-42
Chapter 9 – Selecting and Grouping Elements
9.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 9-3

9.2 USING FENCES.............................................................................................................. 9-3
9.2.1 PLACE FENCE.............................................................................................................. 9-4
9.2.2 MODIFY FENCE ........................................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.3 MANIPULATE FENCE CONTENTS ...................................................................................... 9-8
9.2.3 DELETE FENCE CONTENTS .............................................................................................. 9-9
9.2.4 DROP FENCE CONTENTS ................................................................................................ 9-9
9.2.5 COPY/MOVE FENCE CONTENTS .................................................................................... 9-10
9.3 ELEMENT SELECTION TOOL......................................................................................... 9-11
9.4 SELECT BY ATTRIBUTES............................................................................................... 9-19
9.5 GROUPING ELEMENTS ................................................................................................ 9-20
9.5.1 NAMED GROUPS ....................................................................................................... 9-20
9.6 COMPLEX ELEMENTS .................................................................................................. 9-22
9.6.1 GROUPS TOOL BOX ................................................................................................... 9-22
9.6.1.1 Drop Element ...................................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.6.1.2 Create Complex Chain ......................................................................................................................... 9-26
9.6.1.3 Create Complex Shape ........................................................................................................................ 9-28
9.6.1.4 Create Region...................................................................................................................................... 9-30
9.6.1.5 Add to Graphic Group ......................................................................................................................... 9-33
9.6.1.6 Drop from Graphic Group ................................................................................................................... 9-36
9.6.1.7 Group Holes ........................................................................................................................................ 9-37

Table of Contents
Chapter 10 - Text
10.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 10-3

10.2 TEXT ATTRIBUTES ..................................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.1 FONT ................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.2 TEXT HEIGHT AND WIDTH.......................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.3 TEXT STYLE ............................................................................................................ 10-6
10.2.3.1 Text Styles Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 10-8
10.2.4 JUSTIFICATION ........................................................................................................ 10-9
10.2.5 LINE SPACING ....................................................................................................... 10-10
10.2.6 INTER-CHARACTER SPACING ..................................................................................... 10-10
10.3 TEXT PLACEMENT METHODS .................................................................................. 10-11
10.3.1 ACTIVE ANGLE ...................................................................................................... 10-12
10.4 TEXT TOOL BOX ...................................................................................................... 10-13
10.4.1 PLACE TEXT ......................................................................................................... 10-15
10.4.2 PLACE NOTE ........................................................................................................ 10-18
10.4.3 EDIT TEXT............................................................................................................ 10-20
10.4.4 SPELL CHECKER ..................................................................................................... 10-22
10.4.5 DISPLAY TEXT ATTRIBUTES ....................................................................................... 10-24
10.4.6 MATCH TEXT ATTRIBUTES ....................................................................................... 10-25
10.4.7 CHANGE TEXT ATTRIBUTES....................................................................................... 10-26
10.4.8 PLACE TEXT NODE ................................................................................................. 10-28
10.4.9 COPY AND INCREMENT TEXT..................................................................................... 10-29
10.4.10 COPY ENTER DATA FIELD ....................................................................................... 10-30
10.4.11 COPY/INCREMENT ENTER DATA FIELD ...................................................................... 10-32
10.4.12 FILL IN SINGLE ENTER DATA FIELD ............................................................................ 10-32
10.4.13 AUTO FILL IN ENTER DATA FIELDS ............................................................................ 10-33
10.5 TEXT EDITOR WINDOW .......................................................................................... 10-34
10.5.1 ENTER DATA FIELDS ............................................................................................... 10-35
10.6 FIND AND REPLACE TEXT ........................................................................................ 10-36
10.7 FIELDS .................................................................................................................... 10-37

Table of Contents
Chapter 11 - Cells
11.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 11-3

11.2 CELL LIBRARIES......................................................................................................... 11-3
11.2.1 CELL LIBRARY DIALOG BOX ........................................................................................ 11-4
11.3 TYPES OF CELLS ........................................................................................................ 11-7
11.4 CELL LIBRARY CONSIDERATIONS ............................................................................... 11-8
11.4.1 WORKING UNITS..................................................................................................... 11-8
11.4.2 CELL ORGANIZATION ................................................................................................ 11-8
11.4.3 CELL NAMING......................................................................................................... 11-8
11.4.4 2D AND 3D CELLS ................................................................................................... 11-8
11.5 HOW TO USE CELLS .................................................................................................. 11-9
11.6 CELLS TOOL BOX....................................................................................................... 11-9
11.6.1 PLACE ACTIVE CELL ................................................................................................ 11-11
11.6.2 PLACE ACTIVE CELL MATRIX ..................................................................................... 11-14
11.6.3 SELECT AND PLACE CELL .......................................................................................... 11-15
11.6.4 PLACE CELL ORIGIN ................................................................................................ 11-17
11.6.5 IDENTIFY CELL....................................................................................................... 11-17
11.6.6 PLACE ACTIVE LINE TERMINATOR .............................................................................. 11-18
11.6.7 REPLACE CELLS ..................................................................................................... 11-19
11.6.8 PLACE CELL INDEX ................................................................................................. 11-22
11.7 CREATING CELLS ..................................................................................................... 11-24
11.8 ANNOTATION CELLS ............................................................................................... 11-25
11.8.1 TYPES OF CELLS ODOT USES AS ANNOTATION CELLS ....................................................... 11-25
11.9 BREAKING UP/DROPPING CELLS ............................................................................. 11-26

Table of Contents
Chapter 12 – Hatching and Patterning
12.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 12-3

12.2 PATTERNING TOOLS ................................................................................................. 12-3
12.2.1 HATCH AREA: ......................................................................................................... 12-5
12.2.1.1 Methods of Patterning ...................................................................................................................... 12-7
12.2.2 CROSSHATCH AREA ................................................................................................ 12-10
12.2.3 PATTERN AREA ..................................................................................................... 12-11
12.2.4 LINEAR PATTERN ................................................................................................... 12-12
12.2.5 SHOW PATTERN ATTRIBUTES .................................................................................... 12-13
12.2.6 MATCH PATTERN ATTRIBUTES .................................................................................. 12-14
12.2.7 CHANGE PATTERN ................................................................................................. 12-15
12.2.8 DELETE PATTERN ................................................................................................... 12-16
12.3 CONTROLLING THE DISPLAY OF PATTERNS ............................................................. 12-17
12.4 CELLS USED FOR PATTERNING ................................................................................ 12-18

Table of Contents
Chapter 13 - Dimensioning
13.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 13-3

13.2 DIMENSION TOOLS................................................................................................... 13-4
13.2.1 Dimension Element .............................................................................................................................. 13-5
13.2.2 Dimension Linear ............................................................................................................................... 13-11
13.2.3 Dimension Angular............................................................................................................................. 13-14
13.2.4 Dimension Ordinates.......................................................................................................................... 13-19
13.2.5 Change Dimension ............................................................................................................................. 13-21
13.2.6 Match Dimension Attributes .............................................................................................................. 13-22
13.2.7 Reassociate Dimension ...................................................................................................................... 13-23
13.3 OTHER DIMENSION TOOLS ..................................................................................... 13-24

13.3.1 Linear Dimensions Tool Box ............................................................................................................... 13-24
13.3.2 Angular Dimensions Tool Box ............................................................................................................ 13-25
13.3.3 Radial Dimensions Tool Box ............................................................................................................... 13-25
13.3.4 Miscellaneous Dimensions Tool Box .................................................................................................. 13-25
13.4 DIMENSION STYLES ................................................................................................ 13-26

13.4.1 Dimension Styles Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 13-27
13.4.2 ODOT’s Dimension Styles ................................................................................................................... 13-28
13.5 EDITING DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................ 13-30

13.5.1 Edit Text ............................................................................................................................................. 13-30
13.5.2 Modify Element .................................................................................................................................. 13-30
13.5.4 Insert Vertex ....................................................................................................................................... 13-31
13.5.5 Delete Vertex ..................................................................................................................................... 13-31
13.6 CONTROLLING THE DISPLAY OF DIMENSIONS ......................................................... 13-32

Table of Contents
Chapter 14 – Custom Line Styles
14.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 14-3

14.2 TYPES OF CUSTOM LINE STYLES ................................................................................ 14-3
14.2 USING CUSTOM LINE STYLES .................................................................................... 14-4
14.2.1 LINE STYLES DIALOG BOX .......................................................................................... 14-6
14.3 MODEL-BASED LINE STYLE SCALE .............................................................................. 14-7
14.4 ODOT’S RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SCALING LINE STYLES ........................................ 14-12
BASEMAP: ...................................................................................................................... 14-12
GEOPAK PLACEMENT (EXISTING AND PROPOSED): .................................................................. 14-14
SURVEY PROCESSING (EXISTING BASEMAP): ............................................................................ 14-16
SHEET FILES: ................................................................................................................... 14-17
Chapter 15 – Information and Measuring Tools
15.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 15-3

15.2 ELEMENT INFORMATION TOOL ................................................................................ 15-3
15.2.1 QUICK INFORMATION DIALOG BOX .............................................................................. 15-6
15.3 DESIGN FILE SETTING................................................................................................ 15-7
15.4 MEASUREMENT TOOLS ............................................................................................ 15-8
15.4.1 MEASURE DISTANCE ................................................................................................ 15-9
15.4.2 MEASURE RADIUS ................................................................................................. 15-13
15.4.3 MEASURE ANGLE BETWEEN LINES ............................................................................. 15-14
15.4.4 MEASURE LENGTH ................................................................................................. 15-15
15.4.5 MEASURE AREA .................................................................................................... 15-16
15.5 MESSAGE CENTER .................................................................................................. 15-18

Table of Contents
Chapter 16 - References
16.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 16-3

16.2 WHAT IS A REFERENCE FILE?..................................................................................... 16-3
16.2.1 ODOT’S COMMON USAGE FOR REFERENCES .................................................................. 16-3
16.3 REFERENCE FILE DIALOG BOX ................................................................................... 16-4
16.3.1 INTEGRATED TOOL BOX AND PULL-DOWN COMMANDS ..................................................... 16-5
16.3.2 REFERENCES LIST BOX............................................................................................... 16-7
16.3.3 INFORMATION PANEL ............................................................................................... 16-7
16.4 ATTACHING REFERENCES ........................................................................................ 16-10
16.4.1 EDITING REFERENCE ATTACHMENT SETTINGS ................................................................ 16-19
16.5 CLIPPING AND MASKING REFERENCES .................................................................... 16-20
16.5.1 CLIP REFERENCE .................................................................................................... 16-21
16.5.2 CLIP MASK .......................................................................................................... 16-22
16.5.3 DELETE CLIP ......................................................................................................... 16-23
16.6 MANIPULATING REFERENCE FILES .......................................................................... 16-24
16.6.1 RELOAD REFERENCE ............................................................................................... 16-24
16.6.2 MOVE REFERENCE ................................................................................................. 16-25
16.6.3 COPY REFERENCE .................................................................................................. 16-26
16.6.4 SCALE REFERENCE .................................................................................................. 16-27
16.6.5 ROTATE REFERENCE ............................................................................................... 16-28
16.6.6 MIRROR REFERENCE............................................................................................... 16-29
16.6.7 DETACH REFERENCE ............................................................................................... 16-30
16.6.8 MISC REFERENCE TOOLS .......................................................................................... 16-31
16.7 LOCATING LOST REFERENCE ATTACHMENTS ........................................................... 16-32

16.8 REFERENCE PRIORITY AND TRANSPARENCY: ........................................................... 16-33
16.9 REFERENCE PREFERENCE SETTINGS......................................................................... 16-35
16.10 RASTER REFERENCES ............................................................................................ 16-36
16.10.1 ATTACH RASTER REFERENCE DIALOG BOX .................................................................. 16-37
16.10.2 MODIFYING RASTER FILE ATTACHMENTS ................................................................... 16-38
16.10.3 RASTER PREFERENCES ........................................................................................... 16-38

Table of Contents
Chapter 17 – Project Explorer
17.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 17-3

17.2 PROJECT EXPLORER DIALOG BOX.............................................................................. 17-3
17.3 MANAGING LINK SETS ............................................................................................... 17-4
Chapter 18 - Plotting
18.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 18-3

18.2 IPLOT ....................................................................................................................... 18-3
18.3 PROJECTWISE INTERPLOT ORGANIZER ...................................................................... 18-4
18.6 PDF FILES ................................................................................................................. 18-4
18.7 TIFF FILES ................................................................................................................. 18-5
18.4 PEN TABLES.............................................................................................................. 18-5
18.5 ELEMENT PRIORITY AND TRANSPARENCY ................................................................. 18-6
18.8 GRAY SHADING FOR PLOTTING................................................................................. 18-7
18.8.1 GRAY SHADE REFERENCES ..................................................................................... 18-7
Chapter 19 – ODOT Applications
19.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 19-3

19.2 AVAILABLE APPLICATIONS ........................................................................................ 19-3
19.2.1 MDL - DEFINED ...................................................................................................... 19-4
19.2.2 MICROSTATION VBA – DEFINED................................................................................. 19-4
19.2.3 VB – DEFINED ........................................................................................................ 19-4

Table of Contents:
1.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................... 3
1.2 ODOT CADD STANDARDS ................................................................................................ 3
1.2.1 CADD STANDARDS MANUAL ............................................................................................ 3
1.2.2 MICROSTATION STANDARD CADD FILE LOCATIONS ................................................................ 3
1.2.2.1 ODOT’s CADD Standards Directory ...........................................................................................................4
1.2.3 REVISIONS AND UPDATES ................................................................................................. 4
1.3 WHAT IS A MICROSTATION DESIGN FILE? ........................................................................ 6
1.4 STARTING MICROSTATION .............................................................................................. 6
1.5 MICROSTATION MANAGER DIALOG BOX ......................................................................... 8
1.5.1 THE MICROSTATION MANAGER DIALOG BOX ICONS ................................................................ 9
1.5.2 WORKSPACE COMPONENTS ............................................................................................ 11
1.6 OPENING DESIGN FILES ................................................................................................. 13
1.7 CLOSING DESIGN FILES .................................................................................................. 16
1.8 CREATING NEW DESIGN FILES........................................................................................ 17
1.9 SEED FILES..................................................................................................................... 18
1.10 COMPRESSING DESIGN FILES ....................................................................................... 19
1.11 SAVING DESIGN FILES .................................................................................................. 21
1.11.1 SAVE AS .................................................................................................................. 21
1.11.2 SAVE SETTINGS .......................................................................................................... 22
1.12 EXITING MICROSTATION ............................................................................................. 23
ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual 1-1

This page intentionally left blank.
1-2 ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual

1.1 Introduction
This chapter introduces you to MicroStation to get you familiar with creating and opening a design file using
ODOT’s CADD Standards.
1.2 ODOT CADD Standards

The Office of CADD and Mapping Services CADD Section, with input from ODOT’s Districts and the consultant and
construction community, has developed a set of CADD Standards for MicroStation. The CADD Standards have
been developed to provide consistent CADD Standards for ODOT projects.
1.2.1 CADD Standards Manual
A CADD Engineering Standards Manual has been developed for MicroStation. It is intended to provide uniform
procedures and standards for ODOT projects. The requirements presented in the manual ensure that CADD files
can be used by the entire project team (surveyors, planners, environmentalists, designers, reviewers, contractors,
etc.) throughout all phases of project development.
The ODOT CADD Engineering Standards Manual is available to download or view from the following website:
http://www.dot.state.oh.us/Divisions/Engineering/CADDMapping/CADD/Pages/CADDManual.aspx
1.2.2 MicroStation Standard CADD File Locations
For ODOT CADD Users, MicroStation and GEOPAK standard CADD files are located on each District and Central
Office CADD Server under the i:\ODOTstd directory. For an ODOT installation, “i” is a network drive mapped to
the primary CADD file server.
For consultants, MicroStation and GEOPAK standard CADD files can be downloaded from the ODOT CADD
Standards website at the following address:
http://www.dot.state.oh.us/Divisions/Engineering/CADDMapping/CADD/Pages/default.aspx

1.2.2.1 ODOT’s CADD Standards Directory
ODOT’s CADD Standards directory structure contains all current CADD Standard files and archived CADD Standard
files to read out dated versions of design files inside MicroStation. The directory structure for ODOT’s CADD
Standards is configured as shown below.
• Projects - The Projects directory contains the various project configuration files (.pcf) which are read from
this directory.
• V7std - The V7std directory contains all the CADD Standards for MicroStation and GEOPAK V7. This
directory remains since the file format for MicroStation changed from V7 to V8.
• V8istd - The V8istd directory contains all the current CADD Standards for MicroStation and GEOPAK V8i.
 If the directory XMstd is still located under the ODOTstd directory this contains all the CADD
Standards for MicroStation and GEOPAK XM which is no longer needed if you have MicroStation V8i
loaded on your computer.
1.2.3 Revisions and Updates
Updating CADD Standards and the CADD Manual is intended to be a continuous process and revisions will be
issued periodically per the Release Dates specified on the Design Reference Resource Center (DRRC) web page at
the following address:
http://www.dot.state.oh.us/drrc/Pages/default.aspx
The DRRC web page also provides the option to Subscribe to an email list for notification of updates to ODOT’s
CADD Standards. The Mailing List Subscription for CADD Standards is located under CADD Standards.
 It is highly recommended that every CADD User subscribe to the CADD Standards mailing list. This will
keep the user updated of any new files or changes/modifications made to any of the CADD Standards.
All CADD Users are encouraged to submit comments and suggestions for improvements to the ODOT’s CADD
Standards or CADD Manual at the following website:
http://www.dot.state.oh.us/Divisions/Engineering/CADDMapping/CADD/Pages/Suggestions%20and%
20Questions.aspx

1.2.4 ODOT MicroStation Support
The Office of CADD and Mapping Services, CADD Engineering Standards Section provides MicroStation and
GEOPAK Support and training for ODOT personnel. The Office is also responsible for establishing, maintaining and
distributing all ODOT CADD Standards.
To contact specific personnel for any MicroStation or GEOPAK Support you can go to the following web page:
http://www.dot.state.oh.us/Divisions/Engineering/CADDMapping/CADD/Pages/Support.aspx
If you are not sure who to contact and you have any questions, suggestions, or problems regarding MicroStation or
GEOPAK you can go to the following web page to submit your request:
http://www.dot.state.oh.us/Divisions/Engineering/CADDMapping/CADD/Pages/Suggestions%20and%
20Questions.aspx

1.3 What is a MicroStation Design File?

A Design File is an electronic file that MicroStation uses to store a computer drawing. A MicroStation document
file is called a Design (.dgn) file. A dgn file is a large container for smaller containers called Models. Each Model
can consist of drawing elements such as arcs, lines, and circles etc. Each model is a unique drawing within the dgn
file, allowing the user to have multiple drawings within a single design file.
You cannot have more than one (1) dgn file open at a time in MicroStation. If you open a dgn file when one is
already open, MicroStation automatically closes the first file.
You can, however view the models contained in other dgn files by attaching them as references to the active
model in the open dgn file.
1.4 Starting MicroStation

There are several ways to start MicroStation if you want to open or create a dgn file. The following are some
different ways to start MicroStation:
a. MicroStation can be started by selecting the Window Start menu and select All Programs > Bentley >
MicroStation V8i (SELECTseries 2) > MicroStation V8i (SELECTseries 2).

b. If a shortcut exists on your Desk top, Double-Click it with the Left Mouse Button.
 If a shortcut does not exist on your desk top, select Bentley MicroStation V8i like method “a”, Right-Click
with the mouse button and select Send To > Desktop (create shortcut) like below:
c. MicroStation can also be started by Double-Clicking on any file with a dgn extension in Windows
Explorer.

1.5 MicroStation Manager Dialog Box

When MicroStation is started, the MicroStation Manager Dialog box opens like shown below. The MicroStation
Manager allows the user to perform file-related tasks, such as creating and opening drawings.
The MicroStation Manager Dialog box has many features similar to Windows Explorer and contains MicroStation
commands, which are embedded in icons at the top.
When a file is selected on the left-hand side, a preview of the selected file appears on the right-hand side. The
preview window information indicates whether a DGN file is 2D or 3D, and indicates the MicroStation version with
which the file is compatible. The file format version displays for AutoCAD files.
In addition to providing the capabilities of the Open dialog box, MicroStation Manager also lets you select
workspace components. A workspace is a custom MicroStation “environment” or configuration.
You can check the Open as read-only check box at the bottom of the dialog so that files will open in a read-only
mode for viewing and printing. This protects you from accidentally modifying a file.

1.5.1 The MicroStation Manager dialog box Icons
Look in - Lists the drives and directories for selection.
Go To Last Folder Visited - Returns to the last folder

that you opened.
Up One Level - Moves up one directory from your

current location.
Create New Folder - Creates a new folder with an editable

name field.
View Menu - Contains the window options shown below on how to view
your files in the directory.
 List - Shows a list of the files in the directory.

 Details - Allows you to select what details you want to display for the files
listed. To display the various details, Right-Click on the column headings and
toggle on the options.
 Tiles - Displays the file by name, type and size of file.
 Icons - Displays the files by the product-specific icon.
 The user can add supplemental description information by use of

Windows and MicroStation’s File Properties. The intent of the supplemental description is to provide
additional descriptive information to aid the designer in identifying a particular file. See the CADD
Engineering Manual, Section 304.4 Supplemental Description Guidelines.

New File – allows the user to create a new design file based on a seed file.
Tools/File History – icon contains the options to Compress, Upgrade to V8 and Set default seed file. There is also a
list containing the directory of the previous Design files you accessed allowing you to open the file directly without
browsing through the directory structure for the file.
 Compress File - Removes any elements that have been deleted in previous editing sessions. This reduces
the file size.
 Upgrade to V8 - Allows the user to convert earlier versions of MicroStation V7 files to the V8i format.
 Set default seed file – allows the user to set a standard seed file to be used when creating a new design
file when you Right Click and select New > Bentley MicroStation Design File in Windows Explorer or a
Windows style file open dialog box.
Directory History – Contains a history of directories recently opened and an option for Select Configuration
Variable.
 Select Configuration Variable - Allows the user to set the current directory based on a configuration
variable.
1 - 10 ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual

1.5.2 Workspace Components
The MicroStation Manager Dialog box also lets you select Workspace components. A Workspace in MicroStation is
a collection of predefined settings and configuration variables that accommodate agency standards and
configurations for their work environment.
A custom MicroStation Workspace shown below has been configured for ODOT.
When MicroStation is started, the selected ODOT Workspace (User, Project, Interface) establish the various ODOT
CADD Standards files, such as cell libraries, fonts, line styles, etc., that are available to the user in MicroStation.
• User - Sets configuration variables for the user. This should be set to ODOTV8i.
• Project - Sets variables specific to a certain project, such as where to look for files. This should be set to
the current project. This should be set to ODOTV8i.
• Interface - Sets the active user interface. The Interface is set to default; ODOT does not customize the
interface for MicroStation.
ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual 1 - 11

ODOT’s standard User and Project configuration files for MicroStation V8i are selected from the MicroStation
Manager Dialog box as shown below. When one of the files is selected by the User drop down menu, the
associated Project configuration file is automatically selected.
There is a set of three (3) User and Project configuration files available to ODOT users as described below:
1. ODOTV8i.ucf & ODOTV8i.pcf

These are the standard configuration files for current ODOT design projects.
2. ODOTV7.ucf & ODOTV7.pcf

These configuration files are used to open design files in MicroStation/J (v7) format. This configuration is
intended to be used for viewing, plotting, and making minor edits to old design files in v7 format. Access
to GEOPAK has been disabled in this configuration.
3. ODOTV8_JUL07.ucf & ODOTV8_JUL07.pcf

These configuration files are used when viewing or editing MicroStation V8 design files developed using
the Bridge custom line styles with the ODOT CADD Standards that were in place on or before July 20,
2007.
In order to use one of the ODOT configurations, the .ucf file must be copied to the directory specified by the
variable HOMEV8i.
The variable HOMEV8i is defined in V8iODOTStandards.cfg as w:\V8iUser\. The definition of HOMEV8i can be set
as a Windows System or User variable to override the setting in V8iODOTStandards.cfg. When the MicroStation
Manager dialog is opened, the User configuration files are read from your HOMEV8i directory.
Project configuration files are read from the i:\ODOTstd\Projects folder and should not be copied to the user’s
HOMEV8i directory.
 If the files ODOTV8i.ucf (User:) and ODOTV8i.pcf (Project:) are not available, please see your CADD
Manager for assistance.

1.6 Opening Design Files

When you start MicroStation, you must either open an existing design file or create a new one. You cannot have
more than one design file open or active in MicroStation at a time. If you open a design file while in MicroStation
when one is already active, MicroStation will automatically close the first file.
 If you have more than one (1) session of MicroStation open, it could slow some drafting processes
down and it will only recognize one (1) license of MicroStation per seat.
MicroStation allows you to open drawing files in several formats. The Files of type option allows the user to
determine which drawing types are listed.

There are several ways to Open a MicroStation DGN file. The following are some different ways to Open a
MicroStation DGN file:
a. Opening a DGN File from the MicroStation Manager Dialog box
1. In the Look in: pull-down list browse to the drive and directory where the file is located,
2. Select the drawing from the list of Names,
3. Click the Open button or Double-click on the drawing name.
b. Opening Drawings from the Editing Environment
Once in a DGN file, options are provided to allow users to switch to other DGN files. It is not necessary to
return to the MicroStation Manager Dialog box to open another drawing.
To open a different DGN file, select File > Open from MicroStation’s Main Menu bar as shown below:
Or,
Select the Open icon from the Standard tool bar as shown below:

Or,
Select a previously opened Design file from the File pull-down from the Main Menu bar as shown below:
 The names of the most recently accessed design files are listed at the bottom of the pull-down File
menu and may be opened by clicking the data button on them.

In the Open dialog box many of the options available in the MicroStation Manager Dialog box appear in this dialog
as well.
1. In the Look in: pull-down list browse to the drive and directory where the file is located,
2. Select the drawing from the list at the left,
3. Click the Open button or Double-click on the drawing name.
 Many of the same options that are in the MicroStation Manager appear in this dialog as well.
 MSJ/V7 files are automatically opened “Read Only”.
1.7 Closing Design Files
When in a Design file in the editing environment and you want to return to the MicroStation Manager Dialog box,
select File > Close. This Closes the active design file and opens the MicroStation Manager Dialog box.

1.8 Creating New Design Files

You can Create new design files from the MicroStation Manager Dialog box or from the Editing Environment.
The steps for creating a new design file are outlined below.
1. From the MicroStation Manager Dialog box, select New File,
Or, from the Editing Environment:
Select File > New from the Main Menu bar as shown below:
The New dialog box opens,

The default filter is “MicroStation DGN Files *.dgn”.
2. Optional, To change the filter, choose the corresponding item in the List Files of Type drop-down list.
3. Optional, To select a different Seed file, click the Browse button,

The Select Seed File dialog box opens.
Select the Seed file ODOTSeed2d.dgn or ODOTSeed3d.dgn
(See the Section 1.9 ODOT Seed Files on the following page).
4. Select the destination directory in the Save in directories list box to place the new DGN file in.
5. In the File name field, key in a name for the new design file.
Verify that the settings in the New dialog box are correct.
6. Click the Save button.

The new design file just created will appear in the MicroStation Manager Dialog box if you created it there
or it will open automatically if you created it in the Editing Environment.

1.9 Seed Files

Each MicroStation Design File uses a seed file to create all new design files. A seed file is a template in which
standard parameters are set and used to create a drawing file. A new design file is actually a copy of the seed file.
Seed files do not necessarily contain elements, but, like other design files, they do contain settings, like working
units and view configurations. Using a standard, customized seed file helps maintain uniformity and keeps the
user from having to adjust design file settings each time a file is created.
ODOT has created seed files for use in plan production that have standard settings stored within them. The
following ODOT standard two-dimensional (2D) and three dimensional (3D) seed files are available on the server
under the i:\ODOTstd\V8istd\seed directory and on the Internet:
2D - ODOTSeed2d.dgn
3D - ODOTSeed3d.dgn

1.10 Compressing Design Files

When elements are deleted from a MicroStation design file, the elements no longer display in the design, but a
record of the deleted elements remains in the design file. The Compress Design File command removes the
records, which reduces the file’s size. To access the Compress Design settings, select File > Compress from the
Main Menu bar.
• Compress > Design - Reduces the size of the open DGN file by purging empty and unused data resources
of the types selected in the Compress Options dialog box (File > Compress > Options) and clears the
application's undo buffer.
• Compress > Options - Opens the Compress Options dialog box, which is used to purge empty and unused
data resources from the open DGN file as well as deleted elements. The Compress Options dialog box
contains check boxes used to select the types of empty and unused data resources to delete:

 The undo buffer is cleared when a design file is compressed, so after compressing, the user will no
longer be able to undo any previous operations.
It is best to use the Compress Design File command at the end of an editing session. This can also be set to happen
automatically upon exiting the design file. To enable this setting, select Workspace > Preferences from
MicroStation’s Main Menu Bar, select the Operation Category option, and toggle on the checkbox for Compress
File on Exit.

1.11 Saving Design Files

By default, MicroStation saves drawing changes automatically. MicroStation DGN files are saved in the DGN
format.
The fact that the file is saved automatically is a very powerful feature of the software. This gives the user the
security of knowing that in the event of a computer crash or power failure, the design changes to the last
completed commands have been saved.
 The user can choose not to have MicroStation save files automatically by clearing the check mark next
to Automatically Save Design Changes in the “Operation” Category of the Preferences dialog box.
ODOT does not recommend that you disable this preference setting.
 If automatic save is disabled, the user must manually save the file by clicking the Save tool in the
Standard Toolbar or select File > Save from the Main Menu bar.
1.11.1 Save As
The user can select File > Save As from the Main Menu Bar to save a copy of the design file with a different name,
in a different directory, on a different disk, or in a different file format. If just a different name is chosen, the copy
becomes the active design file.

1.11.2 Save Settings
The option File > Save Settings from the Main Menu Bar is different from the option File > Save (Saving the Design
File). Changes to design elements are saved automatically where the File > Save Settings option preserves all
settings so that the next time the file is accessed it reflects the current settings.
Saved settings include settings controlled through settings boxes and the view configuration (the arrangement of
views on the screen and the areas of the design plane displayed in the views). This allows you to save settings at
will, as they are not automatically saved when you exit the file.
 User Preferences settings are not saved here.

 The user can choose to automatically Save Settings on Exit by checking on the setting in the
“Operation” Category of the Preferences dialog box.

1.12 Exiting MicroStation

As you work, MicroStation saves all changes you make to the open DGN file to the server or disk (assuming you
have not turned off the default “Automatically Save Design Changes” Preference setting). After you close the DGN
file, you can no longer undo changes with MicroStation's Undo feature. Therefore, be sure to undo any unwanted
changes to the DGN file before you exit MicroStation.
There are several ways to Exit a MicroStation DGN file. The following are some different ways to Exit a
MicroStation DGN file:
a. In the Editing Environment in a Design file from the Main Menu bar Select File > Exit.
b. Click the application window’s Close icon.
c. In the MicroStation Manager Dialog box, click Cancel.

Table of Contents:
2.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................... 3
2.2 MICROSTATION’S INTERFACE .......................................................................................... 3
2.2.1 MAIN MENU BAR .......................................................................................................... 4
2.2.2 PRIMARY TOOL BOX ....................................................................................................... 4
2.2.2.1 Key-in Window ..........................................................................................................................................6
2.2.2.2 PopSet .......................................................................................................................................................7
2.2.3 STANDARD TOOL BOX ..................................................................................................... 8
2.2.4 ATTRIBUTES TOOL BOX .................................................................................................... 9
2.2.4.1 Element Symbology.................................................................................................................................10
2.2.4.2 Element Class ..........................................................................................................................................11
2.2.5 VIEW WINDOW ........................................................................................................... 12
2.2.6 VIEW CONTROL BAR ..................................................................................................... 13
2.2.7 VIEW GROUPS ............................................................................................................. 13
2.2.8 STATUS BAR ............................................................................................................... 14
2.2.9 ACCUDRAW WINDOW ................................................................................................... 15
2.2.10 TOOL SETTINGS WINDOW ............................................................................................ 15
2.2.11 MAIN TOOL BOX ........................................................................................................ 16
2.2.12 TASK NAVIGATION TOOL BOX........................................................................................ 18
2.2.13 WINDOW DOCKING OPTIONS ........................................................................................ 23
2.3 PRIORITY AND TRANSPARENCY ..................................................................................... 24
2.3.1 PRIORITY ................................................................................................................... 24
2.3.2 TRANSPARENCY ............................................................................................................ 29
2.4 MOUSE BUTTON FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................ 32
2.4.1 CHANGE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS ...................................................................................... 33
2.4.2 BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS ................................................................................................. 34
2.4.3 WHEEL MOUSE PREFERENCES.......................................................................................... 35
2.5 RESET POP-UP MENU .................................................................................................... 36
2.6 KEYBOARD INPUT ......................................................................................................... 37
2.6.1 POSITIONAL KEYBOARD NAVIGATION ................................................................................ 38
2.6.1.1 Using Positional Keyboard Mapping with the Main Tool Box .................................................................39
2.6.1.2 Using Positional Keyboard Mapping with the Task Navigation Tool Box ...............................................40
2.6.1.3 Using Positional Keyboard Mapping with the Tool Settings Window .....................................................40
2.6.2 SPECIAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS FOR POSITIONAL KEYBOARD NAVIGATION ........................................ 41
2.6.3 CUSTOMIZING POSITION MAPPING ................................................................................... 41

2.7 FUNCTION KEYS ............................................................................................................ 42

2.8 DESIGN FILE SETTINGS ................................................................................................... 42
2.8.1 WORKING UNITS ......................................................................................................... 43
2.8.1.1 Foot vs Survey Foot .................................................................................................................................45
2.8.2 CUSTOMIZING DISPLAY COLORS ....................................................................................... 46
2.9 USER PREFERENCES ....................................................................................................... 48
2.9.1 TRANSPARENT DIALOG BOXES ......................................................................................... 49
2.10 MICROSTATION’S ON LINE HELP .................................................................................. 50

2.1 Introduction
MicroStation provides an interface that is highly user friendly and customizable. This chapter introduces you to
the MicroStation Design Environment in an open Design file so you can become comfortable working inside the
editing environment.
2.2 MicroStation’s Interface

MicroStation’s interface layout may be customized to open with components in the same position for every editing
session. It may also be reorganized or changed on the fly during an editing session. ODOT has not established a
customized workspace; the workspace can be reorganized by the user.

2.2.1 Main Menu Bar
The Main Menu Bar contains nine standard pull-down menus that provide access to the majority of MicroStation’s
dialog boxes, tools, and settings. Additional software products may add additional menu options. . The following
are additional menu options for ODOT:
• Applications - pull-down for GEOPAK

• ODOT - pull-down for ODOT customized programs
• Cadig - pull-down for AutoTable
The top portion of the Main Menu Bar contains information about the active file. This includes the file path and
name of the active design file, active design file format and the version of MicroStation loaded.
The Main Menu Bar may be docked or undocked based on the user’s preference.
 For information on Cadig see the ODOT CADD Standards website at the following address:
http://www.dot.state.oh.us/Divisions/Engineering/CADDMapping/CADD/Pages/AutoTable.aspx
2.2.2 Primary Tool Box
The Primary Tool Box provides easy access to frequently used tools that are production oriented such as Models,
References, Element Information, etc. Notice that for many of the icons, there is a down arrow beside it to make
the dialog box settings available without actually “floating” the dialog box.
If the Primary Tool Box is not displayed when MicroStation is first launched, the user can open it by selecting Tools
> Primary from the Main Menu Bar.

Most of the tools below provided in the Primary Tool Box below are discussed in other chapters of this manual.
Models Manage models using the Models dialog box. See Chapter 4 Models.
Manage reference attachments using the Reference dialog box. See Chapter 16
References
References.
Manage raster reference attachments using the Raster Manager dialog box.
Raster Manager
See Chapter 16 References.
Import, control, visualize and manipulate point cloud images using the Point
Point Clouds
Clouds dialog. See Bentley’s On-line Help.
Saved Views Manage saved views using the Saved Views dialog box. See Chapter 3 Views.
Level Manager Manage levels using the Level Manager dialog box. See Chapter 5 Levels.
Level Display Turn levels on and off using the Level Display dialog box. See Chapter 5 Levels.
Cells Create and manage cells in a Cell Library. See Chapter 11 Cells.
Auxiliary Manage auxiliary coordinate systems using the Auxiliary Coordinate Systems
Coordinates (ACS) dialog box. See Bentley’s On-line Help.
Element Review or modify information about an element(s), such as its type, attributes,
Information and geometry. See Chapter 15 Information and Measuring Tools.
Open the Items dialog box, which displays the non-graphical business items
Items
contained in the DGN file. See Bentley’s On-line Help.
Review markups and comments made in the design through the Markups
Markups Dialog dialog. Manage project data using the Project Explorer dialog. See Bentley’s
On-line Help.
Manage project data using the Project Explorer dialog. See Bentley’s On-line
Project Explorer
Help.
Toggle Used to toggle the AccuDraw Compass on/off. See Chapter 7 Drawing with
AccuDraw Precision.
Key-in Opens the Key-in window. See Section 2.2.2.1 for more detailed information.
Toggle PopSet on or off. If PopSet is toggled on the icon appears Green. See
Pop Set
Section 2.2.2.2 for more detailed information.

2.2.2.1 Key-in Window
While nearly all of MicroStation’s command can be accessed from either a tool box or a pull-down menu, there are
times when you may want to type in a command. MicroStation’s Key-in Window allows the user to type in any
MicroStation command, as well as browse through the command’s options.
If you want the Key-in tool box to display as a separate dialog box, you can open it by selecting the icon from the
Primary Tool Bar and dock the window or you can select Utilities > Key-in from the Main Menu Bar.
 If you are unsure of what key-in is used to run a command, you can build the key-in from the four
boxes and then select the Enter key.
 A history of recently used key-ins appears at the bottom of the Key-in window.
 The Key-in dialog can be docked and only the key-in field will show.

2.2.2.2 PopSet
A tool that works in conjunction with the Tool Settings Window is PopSet, located on the Primary Tools tool box.
When PopSet is enabled, the Tool Settings Window appears next to any tool the user selects, and then hides itself
after the settings are adjusted. Using PopSet is a great way to reclaim valuable screen “real estate” and reduce
pointer movement.
PopSet, which is disabled by default, is indicated by the red indicator light, as shown below. It is located on the far
right side of the Primary Tools tool box.
When PopSet is enabled, the indicator light changes to green as shown above. The Tool Settings Window remains
visible while the pointer is over:
• The PopSet indicator light.

• The selected tool's icon.
• The Tool Settings Window itself.
Moving the pointer over a view window hides the Tool Settings Window after a period of time defined in the
PopSet Properties dialog box. To access the PopSet Properties dialog box Right-Click over the PopSet icon and
select Properties from the menu list.
Once the Tool Settings Window disappears, it reappears when the user:
• Moves the pointer over the PopSet indicator light.

• Select a different tool icon or moves the pointer over the currently selected tool's icon.
• Press [Ctrl] + [Spacebar] when the pointer is inside a view window. Pressing [Ctrl] + [Spacebar], a
second time hides the Tool Settings Window.

2.2.3 Standard Tool Box
The Standard Tool Box contains standard Windows tools such as New, Save, Cut, Copy, etc that are commonly
used.
If the Standard Tool Box is not displayed when MicroStation is first launched, the user can open it by selecting
Tools > Standard from the Main Menu Bar.
New Creates a new file. You can also select File > New from the main menu bar.
Open Opens an existing file. You can also select File > Open from the main menu bar.
Save Saves the open file. You can also select File > Save from the main menu bar.
Print Prints the open file. You can also select File > Print from the main menu bar.
Deletes selected items in the open file. You can also select File > Cut from the
Cut
main menu bar.
Copies selected items in the open file. You can also select File > Copy from the
Copy
main menu bar.
Pastes selected items in the open file. You can also select File > Paste from the
Paste
main menu bar.
Undo negates the last drawing operation. There is no limit to the number of
Undo undo’s that can be performed. For more detailed information see Chapter 6,
Section 6.7 “Undo and Redo Functions”.
Redo negates the last undo operation. There is no limit to the number of
Redo redo’s that can be performed. For more detailed information see Chapter 6,
Section 6.7 “Undo and Redo Functions”.
Bentley Library opens your Web browser and requests the browser to open
either the Bentley Library site or a local HTML document delivered with
Bentley Library
MicroStation which contains a link to Bentley Library. The site provides tools,
resources, and information you can use in your daily work.
Help Help accesses Bentley’s on-line help.

2.2.4 Attributes Tool Box
The Attributes Tool Box contains controls for setting the active element attributes. These settings control the
appearance of elements in a design file which is referred to as symbology.
If the Attributes Tool Box is not displayed when MicroStation is first launched, the user can open it by selecting
Tools > Attributes from the Main Menu Bar.
Sets the Active Element Template, which is a set of

element properties that can be applied to an element
that is being placed or can be applied to existing
Active Element elements.
Template
Note: ODOT does not use Element Templates since we
use the ByLevel Symbology feature in MicroStation for
our CADD Standards.
Sets the Active Level Filter.
Active Level Filter
See Chapter 5 Levels for more information.
Sets the Active Level.
Active Level
See Chapter 5 Levels for more information.
Sets the Active Color.
Active Color
See section 2.2.4.1 Symbology for more information.
Sets the Active Line Style.
Active Line Style
Sets the Active Line Weight.
Active Line Weight
Sets the Active Element Class.
Active Element Class
See section 2.2.4.2 Element Class for more information.
Sets the Active Element Transparency.
Active Element
See section 2.3 Priority and Transparency for more
Transparency
information.
Sets the Active Element Priority (2D models only).
Active Element
See section 2.3 Priority and Transparency for more
Priority
information.
Symbology Preview Gives a preview of a line with the active symbology.

2.2.4.1 Element Symbology
Element Symbology is composed of the following attributes:

• Color
• Line Weight
• Line Style
• Fill Color (For Closed Elements)
• Class
• Transparency
• Priority (2D only, for display)
While symbology can be set per element, ODOT uses the ByLevel feature of MicroStation. All symbology is tied to
the levels, so users only have to change the active level to change the active symbology. An element with ByLevel
Symbology settings uses the symbology settings assigned to that level like below.
To change one of the symbology components, click on the item and choose the new symbology from the drop-
down list. In this manner, users are manually overriding the ByLevel symbology settings for that Level.
 Changing the color, line style, and weight apart from the level is not suggested.
 For Detailed Information about using the ByLevel feature see Chapter 5 Levels, Section 5.5 “By Level”
Symbology.

2.2.4.2 Element Class
Another option on the Attributes tool box is the Active Element Class Button. There are two classes of Elements,
Primary, and Construction.
• Primary Used for nearly all elements in a drawing. These elements plot.
• Construction Used for creating construction geometry. These elements do not plot.
One of the advantages of using construction elements is that it can be turned off easily, regardless of what level it
resides on. To turn off the construction elements, select Settings > View Attributes from the Main Menu Bar. In
the View Attributes dialog toggle off Constructions.

2.2.5 View Window
The View Window is the area where the design appears. The user can have up to eight view windows for each
design. The view that you are working in is known as the Active View. Opening multiple view windows allows the
user to focus on details, as well as an overview of the design, without getting lost in between.
 See Chapter 3 Views for more detailed information.

2.2.6 View Control Bar
Each View Window has its own View Controls that allow the user manipulate a view in the view window. The View
Control Bar is docked by default to the top of each view window with the most commonly used view controls.
2.2.7 View Groups
A View Group is a saved arrangement of view windows applicable to a model within the open design file. Used to
manipulate view groups and view windows and to navigate between models that have been active at some point
during the current design session.

2.2.8 Status Bar
The Status Bar is located across the bottom of the screen layout and provides information back to the user and
allows the user to change various settings for the design file.
The Status Bar provides the following information:
Shows the name of the selected tool or view control and (usually) a prompt for
Selected Tool > Prompt
the next step in the normal procedure for using it.
Displays system message information. Clicking in the Message Center portion of
Message Center the Status Bar opens the Message Center dialog, which contains a running log of
system messages and any further description of the message, if applicable.
Shows the type of snap selected. Clicking the Snap Mode field displays the pop-up
Snap Mode Snap Modes menu. This menu may also be called by pressing the tentative button
while holding down the Shift key.
Clicking the Locks Icon accesses the Locks submenu. Active locks are displayed
Locks Icon
with a checkmark next to them.
Displays the Active Level. Clicking the Active Level field opens the Level Manager
Active Level dialog, which is used to control both level display and symbology for the open
design file and any attached references.
Element Selection Indicates that elements are selected and displays the total number of selected
Indicator elements. If no elements are selected, this field on the Status Bar is blank.
Tasks Shows the name of the current task (Hidden by default).
As you move the cursor, displays the coordinates of your current position. Click in
Running Coordinates this field to open the pop-up menu of options (Hidden by default) to select the
type of coordinates you would like to display.
Indicates the fence mode a fence was placed with. If there is no fence placed in
Fence Indicator
the design file, this field on the Status Bar is blank.
Indicates which work mode is in effect. In DWG work mode, certain functionality
DGN Work Mode is disabled by default so that MicroStation only creates information that can be
stored in DWG format.
If a “diskette icon” is shown in the lower right-hand corner, it indicates that the
DGN file has been modified during the current editing session. If the preference
DGN File Changes
Automatically Save Design Changes is disabled, it indicates that there are changes
Indicator
that have not been saved. If the diskette is red with an “X” through it, it means
that the design file is read-only.
Design History Status This shows if Design History has or has not been initialized.
Input Focus Status Indicates the focus location for common operations.
Digital Rights Status Indicates if the file is protected and digitally signed.
 When you Right-Click on the status bar, a menu displays all the available fields that you can show or
hide on the status bar. Tasks and Running Coordinates are hidden by default.

2.2.9 Accudraw Window
The Accudraw Window is MicroStation’s precision input area. This allows the user to easily draw geometry at the
correct distance and angle using the Accudraw Compass. See Chapter 7 Drawing with Precision.
2.2.10 Tool Settings Window
The Tool Settings Window appears whenever you select a MicroStation tool. The Tool Settings Window will
dynamically change its size and content to reflect the options that are available for the current tool.
 Whenever you see the down arrow like above, there are more settings/options available for the tool.
 This window is open by default upon start up. If you close the tool settings window, new tool settings
will automatically appear when you select the next tool. Hint: Check the tool settings window and the
status bar to see which tool is active.

2.2.11 Main Tool Box
The Main Tool Box, shown right, contains tools used to select elements, manipulate and
modify elements.
The Main tool box is open when you start MicroStation for the first time. It can be
undocked or docked to the right-hand edge.
If the Main Tool Box is not displayed when MicroStation is first launched, the user can
open it by selecting Tools > Main from the Main Menu Bar.
With the exception of Element Selection and Delete Element, the tools in the Main tool
box are also members of a “child” tool box. When one of the other tools is pointed to and
the Data button held down, a drop-down menu opens from which a tool in the child tool
box can be selected. The child tool box can be “torn off” and floated by choosing Open as
ToolBox from the drop-down menu like shown below.

When a tool is selected in a child tool box (attached or floating), the tool automatically becomes the
“representative” of the child tool box in the Main tool box.
Tools can be hidden and shown on a tool box, or frame, by right mouse clicking on the tool box and selecting or
deselecting the check mark beside the tool name.
 Additional tool frames and boxes can be opened through the Tools pull down from the Main Menu
bar.
 Tool Boxes can be closed by clicking on the Close button on the far right side of the tool box or by
selecting Tools > Close Tool Boxes from the Main Menu bar.

2.2.12 Task Navigation Tool Box
The Task Navigation Tool Box contains tools used to draw and place elements in the design file.
The Task Navigation tool box contains the Task List and the tools of the active task. It can be undocked or docked
to the left edge.
If the Task Navigation Tool Box is not displayed when MicroStation is first launched, the user can open it by
selecting Tools > Tasks from the Main Menu Bar.
Each of the tools in the Drawing task is also a member of a “child” task. When a tool is pointed to and the Data
button held down, a drop-down menu opens from which a tool in the child task can be selected. The child task can
be opened as a floating tool box by choosing Open as ToolBox from the drop-down menu.
When a tool is selected in a child task, the tool automatically becomes the “representative” of the child task in the
Drawing task.
Tools can be hidden and shown on a tool box, or frame, by right mouse clicking on the tool box and selecting or
deselecting the check mark beside the tool name.

A task is a set of tools grouped to facilitate a particular workflow. Tasks can contain overlapping sets of tools. By
defining and grouping tasks, you can create a task-based user interface. Therefore the interface will contain all the
tools and tool boxes you need to complete your work, grouped the way you want them.
When you select a task from the list it becomes the active task and the active task's tools appear in the Task
Navigation tool box. For example if you pick the Drawing task Linear, then all the Linear tools appear in the task
navigation tool box.

You can change the appearance of the Task Navigation tool box by selecting Workspace > Preferences on the Main
Menu Bar, select the category Task Navigation.
Change “Presentation:” to Dialog and toggle on Show Navigation Tools and/or

Show Main Task Tools, as shown below. This changes the appearance of the
Task Navigation tool box shown right.
 The Main Tool Box task can now be embedded in the Tasks dialog
box.

By default the Tasks dialog is docked to the left-hand side of the application window and the active task is the
Drawing task.
Clicking the up and down arrows on a task's tab, shown below, collapses the task and hides them or expands the
task so you can see the tasks and tools in it.
You can change the Layout Modes of the tools. Click on one of the Layout Mode icons on the task's tab to view
the tools in one of the following display arrangements:
• Icon Layout mode
• List Layout mode

• Panel Layout mode (the default)
Right-clicking a task presents a list of settings for the task:
• Set as Task Root — The selected task becomes the root task, which moves it to the top of the Tasks dialog
and hides the other tasks.
• Clear Task Root — Resets the task so that is no longer the root task.
• Layout Mode:
o Icon — Displays the tools as icons only.
o List — Displays the tools' icons, position mappings, and names.
o Panel — Displays the tools' position mappings and icons.
• Apply Layout Mode to All — Applies the current task's layout mode to all tasks.
• Open as Toolbox — Opens the selected task as a toolbox.
• Open in new Dialog — It must be a work flow and must have child tasks in it in order to open it in a
separate dialog. When the Tasks dialog is docked, the new dialog appears on a separate tab at the bottom
of the Tasks dialog.
• Display Help — Available only if a help topic is linked to the selected custom tool, task, or workflow.
Opens the help topic.
• Show/Hide Drawing Tools — Allows you to show or hide individual tools.
o Show All — Shows all of the tools.
o List — Lists the tools in a dialog in which you can choose which to show or hide them.

2.2.13 Window Docking Options
To gain more screen space many dialog boxes can be docked along the edges of the application window.
When you begin to move a dockable dialog box transparent Docking Indicators
appear on the screen, like shown right. Click on the dialog box’s title bar and drag
the dialog box over one of the docking indicators, when it highlights in the area
you want, release the mouse button, the dialog box will be placed along the
corresponding edge selected.
 Some dialog boxes can only be docked either horizontally or vertically

or some can be docked both.
The user can dock one dialog box on top of another existing dialog box to the edge of the application window as
tabs. Select the appropriate tab and the dialog box displays. The dialog boxes can also be resized when docked.
An Auto Hide (pushpin) icon appears in the upper right corner of the dialog box’s title bar after the dialog boxes
are docked, as shown below.
You can Click the Auto Hide (pushpin) icon to hide the docked dialog box(s). When the dialog
box is hidden a Roll Out Tab appears in its place along the same edge of the application
window like shown at right.
To display a docked dialog box when the Auto Hide (pushpin) icon is enabled, as shown below,
move and hold the mouse pointer over the docked dialog box’s Roll-Out Tab.
To re-dock a dialog box, pause the mouse pointer over the docked dialog box's Roll-Out Tab,
and then while the dialog box is displayed, Click the Auto Hide (pushpin) icon shown above.
 If you close a dialog box while it is docked, and later open it, the dialog box will
open again in the same position it was last docked in.
 If a dialog box is docked when MicroStation exits, it will be docked in the same position the next time
you start MicroStation.

2.3 Priority and Transparency

The Attributes tool box not only contains settings for level, color, line style and weight but also contains symbology
settings for Element Priority and Transparency. The Priority and some Transparency settings have been
incorporated into ODOT CADD Standards to facilitate the on-screen viewing of the plan features.
• Priority – Sets the Active Element Priority, which determines how an element is displayed relative to
other elements.
• Transparency – Sets the Active Element Transparency. Transparent elements allow you to see other
graphic elements that are “underneath” a transparent element.
2.3.1 Priority
Display Priority is a technique for specifying the relative front-to-back order in which 2D elements appear in a 2D
model (only) when they are displayed in a view. Display priority is only useful or necessary for 2D models, since all
elements in 3D models have their own explicit 3D coordinate space. In 3D models, elements closer to the eye are
always drawn in front of elements further from the eye so display priority is not necessary.
The elements with the highest priority values are displayed in front, while the elements with the lowest priority
values are displayed in the back. Values for Element and Level priority may range from -500 to 500.

By default, MicroStation displays the elements on your screen in the order in which they were drawn. If you're
using reference files, the active file will display first followed by the reference files in the order of attachment. And
finally, if you're using raster reference files, the order is: the raster images first, then the active file elements,
followed by the vector reference files.
 Levels for Raster Reference files have been created. The Raster Reference files have been assigned a
low priority value so they will always be displayed behind any existing and proposed features and
references.
 Display priority is not supported in editions prior to XM. Files created using display priority will appear
“unsorted” when displayed in previous editions of MicroStation or when saved to DGN V7.
In 2D models, you can assign display priority values to references, levels, and to individual elements. The hierarchy
for display priority is reference: level: element. That is:
• All elements in a reference with a higher reference display priority will appear in front of all elements
from references with a lower value.
• Within a single model, or from references with the same reference display priority, elements on levels
with higher level display priority will appear in front of those with a lower value.
• Where elements have the same reference and level display priority, the element display priority
determines those that will appear in front of others.
• Where two elements have the same reference, level, and element display priorities, the one that appears
later in the display order (that is, file position and update sequence) appears on top.

Levels are the main priority differentiator on top of which the individual elements of a particular level can be
tweaked relative to each other. Priority values have been assigned for each level in the ODOT level library as
shown below.
• Levels for Existing plan features have been assigned a priority value of -100.
• Levels for Proposed plan features have been assigned a priority value of 100.
• Levels for Existing and Proposed Text have been assigned a priority value of 500.
• Levels for Existing and Proposed Centerlines have been assigned a priority value of 500.
• The level SH_Major_Grid_Line has been assigned a priority value of -480.
• The level SH_Minor_Grid_Line has been assigned a priority value of -490.
• Levels used for GEOPAK specific features have been assigned various priority values to facilitate better on-
screen viewing of the graphics.
• Levels configured for Raster Reference files have been assigned a priority value of -500.
With these priority assignments, proposed plan view features will always display on top of existing plan view
features regardless of the order in which the elements are drawn.
You do not need to assign a priority value to the elements as they are placed in the design file. The elements will
be displayed according to the priority value that is assigned to the level.
 The Active Element Priority value is not a true ByLevel setting. When the Active Level is changed on
the Attributes tool bar, the value of the Active Element Priority is not set to match the value assigned
to the level. See Chapter 5 Section 5.5.2 Using “By Level” Priority and Transparency Symbology.

In the case where two elements are placed on different levels that have the same priority setting, the last element
drawn is displayed on top. This can be changed by assigning a priority value to the element. Priority values can be
assigned when the element is initially placed, or assigned later with the Change Element Attributes tool.
The priority value assigned to an element is not an “override” of the level setting. The priority value assigned to an
individual element is “relative” to the level setting. Behind the scenes, MicroStation uses an equation to
determine the “final” priority value of the element. However, most users will be content to know that modifying
the priority assigned to an individual element up or down by increments of one (1) will allow them to modify the
display priority as needed.
It should be noted that the priority value of an element that is reported in the Element Info dialog is the actual
value assigned to the element, not the calculated value.
The priority of an element can be modified using the Change Element Attributes tool.

Priority can also be assigned to Reference files. By default, where a reference is attached it is assigned a value of 0
as shown below.
Values for priority assigned to a reference file can range from -5 to 5.
The hierarchy for display priority is reference: level: element. Therefore, when an element is drawn over
referenced graphics, the reference file will take priority over elements placed in the master design file on a level
that has the same priority value.
All of the graphics representing existing features, which are in a reference file, are displayed on top of the shape
drawn on the existing building level as shown below.

2.3.2 Transparency
Transparency can be set for elements, levels, and references. Transparency may vary from 0% to 100%. A value of
0 indicates no transparency at all, while a value of 100% indicates almost complete transparency.
Transparency can be assigned to elements when they are placed by selecting a value from the Attributes tool bar.
 The Active Element Transparency value is not a true ByLevel setting. When the Active Level is
changed on the Attributes tool bar, the value of the Active Element Transparency is not set to match
the value assigned to the level.

The Change Element Attributes dialog can be used to set the Transparency values for previously placed elements.
Just like Priority, when new elements are drawn they take on the Transparency value assigned to the level. Setting
the Active Element Transparency in the Attributes tool box is not an “override”. Behind the scenes, MicroStation
uses an equation to determine the “final” transparency value of the element.

The Transparency value reported in the Element Info dialog represents the value assigned to the element and not
the “final” transparency value as calculated by MicroStation.
 When opening an existing V8 design file in XM or V8i, the priority and transparency values will not be
in effect unless an “Update Levels from Library” command is issued.

2.4 Mouse Button Functions

MicroStation is operated with a mouse to enter graphical input. The buttons on the mouse are mapped to
“logical” buttons, which send different types of graphical input to MicroStation. When you use the mouse with
MicroStation, the mouse buttons are used for three primary functions: Data, Reset, and Tentative.
• Data - button can be called the pick button because it is used to “pick” tools and points on the screen.
The default is mapped to the left-hand mouse button.
• Reset - button cancels or restarts a command, accesses the Reset pop-up menu and the view control pop-
up menu. The default is mapped to the right-hand mouse button.
• Tentative - button snaps to points on existing elements. The default is mapped by clicking the Left and
Right-hand mouse buttons at the same time. This is called a button “chord” and serves as a third button.
 AccuSnap automates the Tentative Snap Process. See Chapter 7 Section 7.3 “AccuSnap”.
 By default, the middle scroll button (wheel) is not set to Tentative; it is set to Zoom In and Out of the
design file.
When working with MicroStation’s tools, a left mouse button, or data button, click is referred to
as entering a data point. The data button is used to select tools and menu items. It is also used
to enter points, to place or manipulate elements in the design, and to confirm input. Consider this
the Yes button. “Yes, I want to select this tool” or “Yes, I want to enter a point here”.
When working with MicroStation’s tools, a right mouse click is called a reset. You use a reset to
back up a step during an operation or to end an operation. You can consider this the “No”
button.
The reset button is used to perform the following functions:

• It returns you to the previous operational step.
• It resumes the last drawing or editing operation after using a view control.
• It reflects the currently selected element and cycles between eligible elements within the
location tolerance of the pointer.

2.4.1 Change Button Assignments
To change the default button assignments, select Workspace > Button Assignments from the Main Menu Bar to
display the Button Assignments dialog. Click the Remap Buttons button on the Button Assignments dialog box.
To Change the Button Assignments:
1. Select a Button function to assign from the list at the left.
2. Move the pointer to the Button Definition Area and Click.
 The XButton 2 – XButton 15 buttons are unassigned when using a standard 3-button wheel-mouse.
 It is recommended that users take time to work with the default settings before making changes to
the button assignments.

2.4.2 Button Assignments
The Button Assignments dialog box is used to assign MicroStation key-ins and to add key combinations to logical
buttons, thus creating additional button assignments.
Logical buttons are mapped to physical buttons. For example, in the default setup the "logical" Tentative button is
mapped to the "physical" Left-Right button mouse chord. You could create a button assignment by adding the
<Alt> key and the “PLACE FENCE” key-in to the "logical" Tentative button. Then when you press the <Alt> key and
the left and right mouse buttons, the Place Fence tool is active.
Button assignments are stored in button menus (“.btnmenu”). The title bar of the Button Assignments dialog box
identifies the open button menu. Select Workspace > Button Assignments from the Main Menu Bar to access the
dialog shown below.

2.4.3 Wheel Mouse Preferences
The mouse wheel can be used to pan and zoom in a drawing. Different zoom functions can be assigned to the
wheel alone, using the wheel while holding the CTRL key, and using the wheel while using the SHIFT key.
You can change the way that the wheel works through the Mouse Category of the Preferences dialog box. Select
Workspace > Preferences from the Main Menu Bar select the Mouse Category.
The following are the Default Preference settings for the Mouse Wheel:
• Wheel - Sets the mouse wheel to zoom in and out by default. Options are Zoom In/Out, Walk
Forwards/Backwards, Slide Up/Down, Pan With Zoom or (none).
• Ctrl + Wheel - Sets the mouse wheel to Walk Forwards/Backwards (3D only) by default. Options are Zoom
In/Out, Walk Forwards/Backwards, Slide Up/Down, Pan With Zoom or (none).
• Shift + Wheel - Sets the mouse wheel to zoom and re-center. Options are Zoom In/Out, Walk
• Alt + Wheel - Sets the mouse to change the Z elevation (3D only). Options are Zoom In/Out, Walk
• Zoom In/Out Ratio - Sets the zoom ratio increment for each turn of the mouse wheel.
• Navigate Distance (Cursor/Wheel) - Sets the percentage of the camera motion view range when using
the keyboard pointer keys or rolling the mouse wheel.
• Navigate Distance (Mouse) - Sets the percentage of the camera motion view range when navigating with
the mouse.

2.5 Reset Pop-Up Menu

The Reset Pop-up Menu is a menu that provides a convenient way to access
frequently used tools and utilities.
If the Element Selection tool is active, some of the items in the menu are context-
sensitive, that is, they operate on the element at the pointer location and/or on the
selected elements(s).
A context menu is a menu that appears when you Right-Click and press and hold
down the Reset button for a few seconds, like shown right.
The menu pops up when the Reset button is either clicked, or pressed and held, as
determined by the Reset Pop-up Menu preference. The parameters for the Reset
Pop-up Menu are found in the Input category of the Preferences dialog box
(Workspace > Preferences).
You can choose between the following options for opening the Reset Pop-Up Menu:
• Press and Hold - the Reset button (the default) by selecting this technique, you will be able to Reset by
clicking the Reset button, as with previous editions.
• Click - the Reset button by selecting this technique, you will be able to Reset by choosing Reset from
either the Reset pop-up menu or the view control pop-up menu.
If the Reset Pop-up Menu preference is set to the default, Press and Hold, the time interval during which the
Reset button must be pressed and held in order to access the menu is determined by the Hold Delay preference,
also in the Input category.

2.6 Keyboard Input

In Microsoft Windows and other graphical computer interfaces, the focus - sometimes called the input focus or
keyboard focus - refers to the window or control to which keyboard input is directed.
MicroStation has a hierarchical focus model. The top level is called Home.
A field in the Status Bar indicates the focus location:
When the focus is home, you need not use the mouse to navigate tool boxes,
tasks, and the Tool Settings window: You can quickly select tools by pressing keys
on your keyboard. This technique is called Positional Keyboard Navigation.
Home
To move the focus Home, press <Esc> or if you are using the default function key
menu, press <F12>.
The Tool Settings window has the focus.
Tool Settings
To move the focus to the Tool Settings window, Click inside the window or on its
title bar. If you are using the default function key menu, press <F10>.
Key-in The Key-in window has the focus.
The AccuDraw window has the focus.
AccuDraw To move the focus to the AccuDraw window, click inside the window or on its title
bar. If you are using the default function key menu, press <F11>. If the focus is
home, press <spacebar>
No icon Another window or dialog box has the focus.

2.6.1 Positional Keyboard Navigation
When the focus is Home, you can use Positional Keyboard Navigation. This technique lets you easily select tools
and adjust tool settings controlled through option menus and check boxes.
Positional Keyboard Navigation is a technique that utilizes a position-mapped keyboard to map keyboard zones
into logical collections of controls in the user interface.
MicroStation position maps your keyboard by default. The following figure shows the default position mapping:
The keys <1>, <2>, <3>, <4>, <5>, <6>, <7>, <8>, <9>, and <0> are mapped to the icons in the Main tool
box.
The keys <Q>, <W>, <E>, <R>, <T>, <A>, <S>, <D>, <F>, <G>, <Z>, <X>, <C>, <V>, and are mapped to
the icons in the Task Navigation tool box.
The keys <Y>, , , <O>, , <H>, <J>, <K>, <L>, <;>, <N>, <M>, <,>, <.>, and </> are mapped to the
controls in the Tool Settings window.

2.6.1.1 Using Positional Keyboard Mapping with the Main Tool Box
If you wanted to select the Rotate tool in the Manipulate tool box using positional keyboard navigation you would
do the following:
Press <3> on the Keyboard. The Manipulate tool

box opens at the location of your pointer.
Press <4> on the Keyboard. This activates the

Rotate tool.

2.6.1.2 Using Positional Keyboard Mapping with the Task Navigation Tool Box
If you wanted to select the Construct Angle Bisector tool, located in the Task Navigation tool box, using positional
keyboard navigation you would do the following:
Press <Q> on the Keyboard. The Linear

tool box opens at the location of your
pointer.
Press <8> on the Keyboard. This activates

the Construct Angle Bisector tool.
2.6.1.3 Using Positional Keyboard Mapping with the Tool Settings Window
Keyboard shortcuts are assigned to each item in the Tool Settings window. By default, the shortcuts are not
displayed in the Tool Settings window as they are in the Main and Task Navigation tool boxes. To temporarily
display the keyboard shortcuts in the Tool Settings window, take the following steps:
Ensure that Keyboard Focus is set to Home.
With Focus set to Home, press the <Esc> key to

display the keyboard shortcuts as shown in the
example at right.

2.6.2 Special Key assignments for Positional Keyboard Navigation
To move the focus Home, press <Esc> or if you are using the default function key menu, press <F12>.
When the focus is Home, the following keys are enabled during positional keyboard navigation:
Opens the Key-in window at the pointer location or if the window is already open, puts
<Enter> focus within the browsable lists of keywords if they are visible. To dismiss the pop-up
window without entering a key-in, move the pointer away from the pop-up.
<spacebar> Moves focus to the AccuDraw window.
<Tab> Change to the next element under the pointer.
<PgUp> Next task.
<PgDn> Previous task.
2.6.3 Customizing Position Mapping
You can customize your keyboard's position mapping by adjusting the preferences in the Position Mapping
category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
To disable it, turn off the preference Use Position Mapping.
The display of keyboard key labels as navigational aids on tool icons, accessible via positional keyboard navigation,
is enabled by default. To disable it, turn off the preference Show Position Mapping Aids.

2.7 Function Keys

Function Keys are application keys that can be preprogrammed for shortcuts for the user without having to key-in
a command line or select a tool. Function keys are defined in user definable menus that contain action strings that
cause an action to occur when you press a specific function key.
The default function key menu in the Default workspace is funckey.mnu, which is installed in Bentley's
Workspace\interfaces\Fkeys directory.
The Function Keys dialog box is used to modify function key menus. To access the Function Key dialog box select
Workspace > Function Keys from the Main Menu Bar. You also can define and modify function keys using the <F1>
through <F12> function keys along with the <Ctrl>, <Alt>, and <Shift> keys and add them to function key menu.
 Creating alternate function key definitions for function key definitions that already have special meaning
in MicroStation, such as <F1> which opens Help, is not recommended.
2.8 Design File Settings

When a new design file is created, it is a good idea is to review the set-up of the design file parameters that control
how the drawing functions. The most common file settings are found in the DGN File Settings dialog box. The
DGN File Settings dialog box provides control over things such as Working Units, coordinate readout, highlight
colors, etc. To access DGN File Settings, select Settings > Design Files from the Main Menu Bar.
 It is important to note that if the proper ODOT seed file is used when the MicroStation file is created, then
it is not necessary to change the DGN File Settings. However, you may need to change your coordinate
readout, highlight colors for an example.
 If any changes are made in the DGN File Settings dialog box, to ensure that the file settings are saved with
the file, choose the pull down File > Save Settings or [CTRL]+[F] on the keyboard.

2.8.1 Working Units
MicroStation lets you draw in "real world" units like feet and inches. These real world units are called working
units. Typically, the working units are defined in the seed design files from which you create your working design
file.
MicroStation recognizes Metric and English units, either of which may be selected. Changing between the units
used in a model makes no difference to the size of geometry in the model. MicroStation allows users to define
custom drawing units by use of a units definition file. ODOT has a standard Unit Definition file that is used for
ODOT plans called ODOT_Units.def, which contains Survey Feet and Inches. The active unit definition file is
specified by the configuration variable MS_CUSTOMUNITDEF. This file is located in the i:/ODOTstd/V8istd/data
directory.
MicroStation design files used in plan preparation shall use the following standard Working Units as defined in the
ODOT seed files and in ODOT_Units.def:

The Advanced Settings unit option contains controls for setting the resolution of the design environment, which
determines the accuracy of the design plane within a MicroStation design file. The ODOT Standard resolution
setting of 12000 per Survey Foot, defined in the ODOT seed files, shall not be changed by the user.
 It is important to note that if the proper ODOT seed file is used when the MicroStation file is created,
then it is not necessary to change the Working Units. Deviation from these working units is not
permitted.

2.8.1.1 Foot vs Survey Foot
Did you know there are two different lengths of a foot in the United States? There are, and MicroStation V8 must
be setup correctly or you may not be drawing what you think you are drawing. Internally MicroStation stores
everything as a meter. Actually the meter is the official base unit of measure throughout the world. Even though
feet and inches are the dominant units of measure in the United States, they are legally defined relative to a
meter.
MicroStation uses the working unit definition to convert coordinates and distances to and from meters. Therefore,
when the working units are set to feet and inches, MicroStation still stores the coordinates in meters and converts
to feet and inches to display coordinates, distances, measurements, dimensions, etc.
Because MicroStation V8 converts all values from feet (or any other unit) to meters to store the data, it is critical
that you understand the conversion process and the desired foot measurement. If not, your data may not be
correct. Before we get into MicroStation further, take a minute to review the difference between a foot and a US
Survey foot.
The following definition is taken from the 1991 edition of ASTM publication E380-89a (Standard Practice for Use of
International System of Units):
“The U. S. Metric Law of 1866 gave the relationship, 1 meter equals 39.37 inches. Since 1893 the U.S. yard has
been derived from the meter. In 1959 a refinement was made in the definition of the yard to bring the U.S. yard
and the yard used in other countries into agreement.
The U.S. yard was changed from 3600/3937 m to 0.9144 m exactly. The new length is shorter by two parts in a
million. At the same time it was decided that any data in feet derived from and published as a result of geodetic
surveys within the U.S. would remain with the old standard (1 ft = 1200/3937 m) until further decision. This foot is
named the U.S. survey foot.”
Therefore the following definitions are in existence today:
1 foot = .3048000 m
1 survey foot = 1200/3937 m » .3048006 m
IMPORTANT: The foot used by MicroStation in the standard unit list is based on the International Foot definition,
not the US Survey Foot definition. This is the correct definition for most work outside of the civil engineering and
surveying disciplines. Many states continue to base their survey work on the US Survey Foot. You must verify the
basis of the survey for your projects to ensure you are working in the correct units of measure. If the data is based
on US Survey Foot survey measurements, using the standard foot definition (International Feet) in MicroStation
will yield incorrect results on the order of 6 feet at a coordinate of 1,000,000.
MicroStation does not include the survey foot in the standard unit list to avoid confusion for those who do not
understand the difference between a foot and a survey foot. However, MicroStation does understand the survey
foot; the definition simply needs to be enabled. All MicroStation units are defined in a units.def file. Once enabled
in the units.def file, the units are available for selection in the Master Unit and Sub Unit boxes.

2.8.2 Customizing Display Colors
There a few different ways MicroStation allows the user to customize colors to represent highlighted elements in
an open design file or customize the Model Background color.
a. In any Open Design file select Workspace > Preferences from the Main Menu bar and select the category
View Options from the Preferences dialog box like shown below.
The View Options category consists of controls for setting preferences to customize MicroStation's view window
look/layout. MicroStation allows the user to customize the colors for the Design and Sheet Model Backgrounds
and the following:
• Design Model Background - If on, sets the color used as the design model background color. To
change the color, click the color icon and select a color from the Color Override Preference dialog.
Default is off.
• Sheet Model Background - If on, sets the color used as the sheet model background color. To change
the color, click the color icon and select a color from the Color Override Preference dialog. Default is
off.
• Element Highlight Color Override - If on, sets the color used to highlight the active element. To
change the color, click the color icon and select a color from the Color Override Preference dialog.
Default is off.
• Selection Set Color Override - If on, sets the color used to display the selection set. To change the
color, click the color icon and select a color from the Color Override Preference dialog. Default is off.

b. In the Open Design file select Settings > Design File from the Main Menu bar and select the category
Color from the DGN File Settings dialog box.
The Design File Settings dialog box is used to change Design File-specific settings. The Color category consists of
controls that are used to modify the color settings in the elements and the dynamic X pointer.
• Element Highlight Color- Controls the appearance of elements when you select them or use the
Tentative mouse button to snap to them.
• Drawing Pointer Color - Controls the color of the dynamic × pointer, the tentative point
crosshair, and the Element Selection arrow aperture.
• Selection Set Color - Controls the color of selection sets created with the Element Selection Tool.
 The Design File Settings can be overridden by your Element Hilite Color and Selection Set Color
Preferences setting if it is toggled on.

2.9 User Preferences

MicroStation provides many options to customize the way it works. Preferences are settings that allow the user to
change the way MicroStation operates and looks that are not significant to other members of a workgroup. Users
can adjust these settings to suit their preferences.
 Do not change any Preference Setting unless you know what you’re altering since some of the
settings are set for a particular reason.
To open the Preferences dialog box, choose Workspace > Preferences from the Main Menu bar.
The settings in this dialog work at the system level, which means that they are not specific to any design file like
the DGN File Settings, but are active no matter which design file is being worked in. This dialog box has many
options, which are referred to throughout this manual.
Every CADD User with ODOT has a User Preference File, ODOTV8i.upf located in their Home directory
w:\V8iUser\.
 Some of the Preference Settings are mentioned throughout the manual.

2.9.1 Transparent Dialog Boxes
You can make the Tool Settings window, or any non-modal dialog box, partially transparent in order to see more of
your model.
You can set the following preferences related to transparent dialog boxes in the Look and Feel category of the
Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences):
The following settings are available:
• Transparent dialog boxes become opaque when receiving focus - If on and the transparency is set, the
dialog becomes opaque when it receives the focus.
• All modeless dialog boxes use the same transparency - If on, all modeless dialogs use the same
transparency from 0–100 as set in the slider scale where a value of 0% indicates no transparency and a
value of 100% indicates full transparency.

2.10 MicroStation’s On Line Help

MicroStation's Help menu and Help window are used to access MicroStation's extensive online help. You can
access the help menu by selecting Help from the Main Menu Bar or by selecting the question mark icon on the
Standard tool bar.
Subtopics within a help topic are collapsed by default. While a subtopic is collapsed only its heading is visible. To
make visible a subtopic's body text and graphics you must expand the subtopic. Click the Expand (+) icon to the
left of the subtopic heading or the heading itself. To simultaneously expand all subtopics in a topic Click the Show
All (magnifying glass) icon in the topic pane's top banner.
Hypertext links, which appear in color and are underlined, when you pass the pointer over them, let you move
easily between related topics.
• Quick Start Guide (PDF) – This is a training PDF that is provided as an overview with exercises to become
familiar with the basic features of 2D MicroStation.
• Contents – Help for MicroStation. If the Contents option is selected from the Help menu, the on-line help
file is accessed. Here, the Table of Contents displays so the user can search for help on a specific topic. By
default, the on-line help file opens to the Contents tab.
The Help window consists of two panes — the navigation pane on the left and the topic pane on the right.
Index tab - is an index of the help content.
Search tab - is used for full text searching of the help content.
Favorites tab – used to customize a list of your favorite topics.
• Tool Index - The Tool Index opens a “child” window of the Help window. The Tool Index window is useful
for locating help topics associated with tools. Once you locate a tool's help topic, you can select the tool
for usage directly from the topic pane.

• Tracking - The Tracking feature lets you see help on each tool as you select it. To see help for each
selected tool turn on Tracking in the Help menu. If you continue your work with the Tracking toggled on
the window will display help for each tool you select.
• Key-in Browser – Another way to Open the Key-in Window.
• Bentley Institute Training – Opens Bentley Learning web site.
• OnLine Support – Opens Bentley’s web site for support, but requires a Select Login.
• BE Communities – Opens Bentley’s web site for BE Communities. To participate in the news groups you
must join the BE Communities.
• About MicroStation V8i – Gives you the information about what version of MicroStation you have loaded
on your computer.

Table of Contents:
3.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................... 3
3.2 ACTIVE VIEW ................................................................................................................... 3
3.3 OPEN A VIEW .................................................................................................................. 3
3.4 ARRANGING VIEWS ......................................................................................................... 4
3.5 VIEW GROUPS................................................................................................................. 7
3.6 VIEW CONTROLS ............................................................................................................. 9
3.7 VIEW ATTRIBUTES ......................................................................................................... 11
3.8 SAVED VIEWS................................................................................................................ 13
3.9 VIEW PREFERENCES ...................................................................................................... 17


3.1 Introduction
As a drawing becomes more and more complex, it may be useful to open multiple View Windows. Opening
multiple View Windows allows the user to focus in on details of the design, as well as an overview, without getting
lost in between. Each View Window in MicroStation is commonly referred to as a “View”.
3.2 Active view

When you have a single View window open, by default it is the Active View. Where you have multiple Views open,
the view that you are working in is known as the Active View. The active view is indicated by a highlighted title
bar.
You can make any open view the active view by:
• Entering a data point within it.

• Clicking its title bar.
• Starting a tool from the view's control bar.
3.3 Open a View

MicroStation gives you the option of having up to eight view windows open at any time. Each view functions
independently of other views. Each contains its own attribute settings and can be zoomed, panned, and rotated
without affecting other views.
The following are some different ways to open a View window:
a. Select Window > Views from the Main Menu Bar; Click the number of the view window you want to open.
Check marks in the submenu indicate the numbers of open View windows.

b. Select Window > Views >Dialog from the Main Menu Bar, this opens the View Groups dialog box which
has a toggle for each view to allow for opening or closing. Numbered buttons that are highlighted
represent the open views. Click or drag the mouse across the numbered button(s) to open or close a
view.
By default, it is already open and is docked automatically to the bottom of the view window.
3.4 Arranging Views

Views can be arranged either manually or automatically. There are several different options for automatically
arranging the views.
The following are some different ways to automatically arrange a View Window(s):
• Select Window > Cascade from the Main Menu Bar. This layers the Views on top each of each other.
• Select Window > Tile from the Main Menu Bar. This tiles the views to the best fit.
• Select Window > Arrange from the Main Menu Bar. This fits the open Views together according to their
current position on the screen.
• Views can also be resized by resting the cursor (mouse) at the edge of the View and waiting until the
cursor changes to a Resize Arrow. A View window may be moved to any location in the design file by
clicking and dragging on the view window title bar.

There are some other options for Views that you can use that do not change the arrangement of the view
windows. The following are some options to help customize your View Windows:
• Scroll Bars – if selected adds or removes the scroll bars along the side and bottom of the view windows.
o To show the Scroll Bars in Views select Window > Scroll Bars from the Main Menu Bar.
o Or you can select Workspace > Preferences from the Main Menu Bar, select View Options
Category, and toggle on/off the checkbox next to Scroll Bars on View Windows.

• Task Navigation in Views - causes a Task Navigation tool box to be docked in each view window. This
enables you to activate different tasks in different views. If Task Navigation in Views is off (the default),
only one task is active at a given time.
To show the Task Navigation in Views select Window > Task Navigation in Views from the Main
Menu Bar.
o Or you can select Workspace > Preferences from the Main Menu Bar, select Task
Navigation Category, select Presentation: In Views.
• View ToolBox - causes the View Control toolbox to be docked in the open view windows.
 If both Task Navigation in Views and View ToolBox are on, the Tasks toolbox is docked in the open
view windows and the view controls do not appear in the views.
 If View ToolBox is off, the open view windows do not have any docked toolboxes, regardless of the
Task Navigation in Views setting.

3.5 View Groups

View Groups are used to manipulate view groups and view windows and to navigate between models that have
been active at some point during the current design session. By default, it is docked at the bottom left of your
View Window above the status bar.
A View Group is a named collection of eight view windows which allows you to set up your desktop to display your
preferences including number of open view windows, window size and view orientation. Each view group is
associated with a model making it easy to access and navigate through different models in the active DGN file, via
the View Group drop-down menu.
During a MicroStation session you may activate many models, and those models may reside in multiple DGN files.
To enable you to more easily navigate the current session's model history - that is, switch between models you
have activated - regardless of the files in which those models reside.
The first two icons, Previous Model and Next Model, enable you to navigate backward and forwards, sequentially,
through the models you have activated.
Clicking the downward-pointing arrow next to the third icon, All Models Visited, represents the entire model
history, enabling you to reactivate any model you have visited during the current session.
When you select a model that resides in a different file using these icons, that file is automatically opened.

MicroStation allows an unlimited number of view groups to be saved. The Manage View Groups dialog is invoked
by clicking on the Manage View Groups icon.
The Manage View Groups dialog is used to create, manage, edit, and delete view groups.
When users create a model, they are prompted to create a view group associated with that model by populating
the Create a View Group checkbox in the Create Model dialog box.
Manage View Groups Dialog Settings
• Create View Group - Opens the Create View Group dialog to specify a name and description for the new
view group.
• Edit View Group Properties - Opens the View Group Properties dialog to edit the name and description of
the selected view group.
• Delete View Group - Deletes the currently selected view group.
• List Box - Displays a complete list of all view groups for all models in the design file. The active view group
is highlighted in green.
• Apply - Activates the currently selected view group.
• Close - Closes the Manage View Groups dialog.

3.6 View Controls

Each View window has its own View Controls that allow the user to manipulate a view in the view window. Using
the View Control Tools is one of the most common tasks in MicroStation. The View Control Bar is docked by
default to the top of each view window with the most commonly used view controls.
The following are the most commonly used View Controls:

Adjust view attribute settings. View Attributes contain a series
View Attributes of toggles that allow the user to enable or disable view display
settings.
Set the view display mode from the drop-down list of display
View Display Mode
styles or from the Display Styles dialog.
Apply scene lighting to a view and adjust brightness of shaded

Adjust View Brightness
views.
Update View Refreshes the current view to display elements correctly.
Increases the magnification of a design by a user specified

Zoom In
Zoom Ratio.
Decreases the magnification of a design by a user specified

Zoom Out
Zoom Ratio.
Magnifies an area of the design by a user defined window.
Window Area The zoom ratio is dynamically determined by the size of the
zoom window created.
Fit View Fits the entire design file to the View Window.
Rotate View Rotates and un-rotates the view.
Pan View Shifts the view based of off two user displacement points.
Returns to the view of the design just prior to the current

View Previous
view.
Only used after View Previous. Moves forward in the viewing

View Next
sequence.
Copy View Copies from one view window to another.
Open the Clip Volume toolbox and apply a clip volume to a

Clip Volume
view.
Clip Mask Apply a clip mask to a view.

You can move the View Control Bar to a different edge of the View windows. Select Workspace > Preferences
from the Main Menu Bar, select the View Options Category, select the Show View ToolBox drop down menu and
select Left, Right, Top or Bottom like shown below.
While the View Control tools located on the View window contain the most common tools for view control,
additional tools are located on the View Control Bar.
To access the View Control Bar, select Tools > View > View Control > Open as ToolBox from the Main Menu Bar.
This tool box may be docked anywhere in the screen layout.

3.7 View Attributes

The View Attributes contain a series of toggles that allow the users to enable or disable how elements display in a
View window.
The View Attributes dialog box can be displayed by one of the following methods below:
a. Select View Attributes from the View Control bar.
b. Click the icon at the upper left of a View window and select View Attributes from the drop-down list.
c. Select Settings > View Attributes from the Main Menu Bar.

Each View can have its own View Attributes settings and the View Number at the top of the View Attributes dialog
determines which View window the settings are applied. Changes to the selected View take effect immediately.
You can select the List Layout Mode or the Icon Layout Mode and Collapse or Expand Groups in the View
Attributes dialog box.
• Apply to open views - is selected, changes are only made to all views that are open.
• Apply to selected view - is selected, changes are applied to the selected view.
• Display Style – Controls how the contents of a view display.
• Open Display Styles Dialog - Opens the Display Styles dialog, which is used to define and manage
display styles in the active file.
• View Attribute toggles – Determines how elements display in the View windows.
• Global Brightness - The Global Brightness slider lets you adjust the brightness of the elements. Only
available with Display Styles of Shaded and above.
• View Setup - Allows you to recall a saved, predefined view definition to a destination view window.

Right-Clicking on the View Attributes dialog box opens a menu that allows you to turn on or off each of the two
sections of the View Attributes dialog box.
 To save changes to the View Attributes, select File > Save Settings from the Main Menu Bar.
3.8 Saved Views

MicroStation allows the user to save Views in a design for easy retrieval at a later time. A Saved View stores the
area of the design shown in the View, the view window proportions and location, the levels displayed, view
attributes, and reference settings.
The Saved Views dialog can be accessed by one of the following methods:
a. Select Utilities > Saved Views from the Main Menu Bar.
b. Click the icon at the upper left of a View window and select View Save/Recall from the drop-down list or
select View Attributes and select the View Setup group in the Attributes dialog box.
c. Click the Saved Views icon in the Primary Tools toolbox.

The Saved Views dialog box is used to name, save, delete, import, apply and recall saved views. The list box shows
the name and description of each view saved in the active design file. To apply or delete a view, you must first
select it or double-click the entry in the list.
• Right-click on the title bar of the list box to get all the options for the Saved Views list box as well as the
option to Save Layout.
• Right-click a saved view in the list box to see additional options related to that saved view.

To create a Saved View select the Create Saved View icon .
The Create Saved View dialog box is used to name and describe the view that you are saving. The saved view can
be recalled to a destination view window or attached as a reference.
Tool Settings Effect

Allows you to choose the method of creating the saved view, either From View or From 2-
Method
Points.
View Type Allows you select either a saved view or one of the dynamic views types.
Name Text field that lets you provide a name for the Saved View.
Description Optional text field that lets you provide a description of the saved view.
Select (From View) or the named fences from the drop-down list to allow the clip volume
to be used.
Clip Volume
A named fence is created when you save a fence from the Place Fence tool or the Clip
Volume tool.
Lets you associate a clip volume with the saved view.
Associative Clip
Volume
Modifying the clip volume will adjust the saved view also.
If on, the Create Dynamic View dialog opens after creating the saved view. This dialog is
Create Dynamic View
used for automating dynamic views.

To Name and Save a View do the following:
1. Set up the source view so that the desired portion of the design is displayed and the view attributes are
set as desired.
2. Open the Create Saved View dialog box.
3. In the Saved View dialog, click the Create Saved View icon.
4. From the Method option menu, choose From View.
5. From the View Type option menu, choose Saved View.
6. In the Name field, key in a name for the view.

The maximum number of characters in the name is limited to 511. Alphabetic and numeric characters are
valid. Special characters are not supported. You can use upper and lowercase characters.
7. (Optional) In the Description field, key in a description.
8. From the Clip Volume option menu, select From View to allow the clip volume to be used.
9. Turn on Associative Clip Volume to associate the clip volume with the saved view.
10. Click in the view window to select the source view.
 Section 502.2 Saved View in the CADD Engineering Standards Manual states: “Whenever files are
submitted or exchanged with the Department, the MicroStation command Saved View shall be initiated to
capture all reference file and level settings in place at the time of final plotting.”
The Saved View should be named “Final Print” like below:

3.9 View Preferences

The View Preferences contains options to customize MicroStation's View window look/layout.
To customize the view window look/layout select Workspace > Preferences from the Main Menu Bar select View
Options from the Category list.
• Show View ToolBox - If on (the default), sets the position of where to dock the tools in a view window.
Default position is Top.
• Scroll Bars on View Windows - If on, view windows are displayed with borders, including scroll bars and
view control bars. The default is off.
• Black Background -> White - If on, the view background color (if set to black) is displayed in white. The
default is off.
• Preserve Aspect Ratio of Views - If on, MicroStation attempts to open views based on the aspect ratio of
views from the last saved version. It only applies if you have changed the size of MicroStation's
application area since saving a file.

• Fast Visible Edges – If on, improves the visible edge display on large models but may produce incorrect
hiding of edge geometry in some models. The default is off.
• Anti-alias Lines - If on, angled lines appear smoother (jagged edges are smoothed) in MicroStation views.
• Anti-alias Text - If on, TrueType fonts appear smoother (jagged edges are smoothed) in MicroStation
views.
• Line Weights - Opens the Line Weights Translation dialog, which is used to set the display width (in pixels)
for each of the 32 line weights.
• Update Refresh Frequency (secs) - Sets the frequency (in seconds) that the display is refreshed during
updates. The default is 1.0.
• Frame Rate for View Tools (frames/sec) - Sets the minimum number of frames per second during viewing
operations. Higher values mean less information may be displayed, or drawn, per frame. The default is
5.0.
• Gamma Correction - Affects the brightness of rendered images on the Right/primary (and, if present, a
Left/secondary) screen. The default value of 1.7 is close to ideal for most monitors. The valid range is 0.1
to 3.0.
• Dynamic Transparency - Sets the amount of transparency used to display elements in dynamics. This is
particularly useful when working in shaded views. The default setting is moderately opaque.
• Auto-Locate Transparency - Set the amount of transparency in the Element Highlight Color used to flash
(highlight) elements for auto-locate (the Element Highlight Color is set in the Color item of the Design File
Settings dialog.)
o When set to Opaque, highlighted elements appear in the Element Highlight Color. As you move
the slider towards Clear, progressively less of the highlight color and more of the original
element color is seen in the highlight color. The default is moderately clear.
• Auto-Locate Display Thin Edges in Overlay - If on, auto-locate displays the edges of elements as they are
highlighted in shaded views.
• Design Model Background Color - If on, sets the color used as the design model background color. To
change the color, click the color icon and select a color from the Color Override Preference dialog. Default
is off.
• Sheet Model Background Color - If on, sets the color used as the sheet model background color. To
change the color, click the color icon and select a color from the Color Override Preference dialog. Default
is off.
• Element Hilite Color - If on, sets the color used to highlight the active element. To change the color, click
the color icon and select a color from the Color Override Preference dialog. Default is off.
• Selection Set Color - If on, sets the color used to display the selection set. To change the color, click the
color icon and select a color from the Color Override Preference dialog. Default is off.

Chapter 4 – Models
Table of Contents:
4.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................... 3
4.2 WORKING WITH MODELS ................................................................................................ 3
4.2.1 TYPES OF MODELS .......................................................................................................... 5
4.2.2 MODELS DIALOG BOX ..................................................................................................... 5
4.3 MODEL PROPERTIES ........................................................................................................ 8
4.4 ODOT’S USE OF MODELS ............................................................................................... 10
4.4.1 ODOT’S STANDARD MODEL NAMES ................................................................................ 11
4.5 MODEL ANNOTATION SCALE ......................................................................................... 12
4.6 MODEL LINE STYLE SCALE .............................................................................................. 14


4.1 Introduction
A design file is composed of Models. A design file can be thought of as a container for many models. When users
draw or place elements with MicroStation tools, the elements are added to the active Model. A Model can be
either 2D or 3D and can be stored within the open design file.
 Design files can contain multiple models. They are equivalent to worksheets in Excel. Think of a model as
a separate design within a design file.
This chapter focuses on the use of Models and how they are incorporated into the ODOT work environment.
4.2 Working with Models

When you first create a new 2D or 3D DGN file you create at least one model within your new DGN whether you
know it or not. This model is the default - Design model ready for you to place elements. This model has several
unique properties.
To manage the model’s properties in a DGN file open the Models dialog box. This dialog box contains tools that
not only allows the user to edit the model’s properties but also allows the user to create, copy, import, delete and
open specific models in the DGN file.
The Models Dialog Box can be displayed by selecting one of the following methods below:
a. Select the Models icon in the Primary Tools Box like below:
b. Select File > Models from the Main Menu pull down bar.

c. In the Key-in Browser type: model manager.
When you open the Models dialog box for the first time the default model is listed. The default model has the
name “Design” with the Description as “Master Model”.
In previous versions of MicroStation before V8 if you never create another model within the DGN and there is only
the default Design Model listed there is no apparent difference in operation.
Each Model is completely independent and can have its own set of eight views, working units, reference
attachments, etc., stored within the same file. MicroStation allows the user to view and edit only one model at a
time. However, all models within the same DGN use the same Color Table and Background Colors. To work with
another model in the design file, you must activate it.

4.2.1 Types of Models
MicroStation has different types of models available in MicroStation. The model types are Design, Drawing and
Sheet. The other model types are Design From Seed, Drawing From Seed, and Sheet From Seed use a model’s
attributes from a chosen seed file to create a model.
• Design – type model is used for creating design geometry that can be either 2D or 3D.
• Drawing – type model serves as a “container” for centralizing annotations that need to be shared across
multiple sheets. A drawing model is always a 2D model. ODOT does not use the Drawing model.
• Sheet – type model is used to assemble the plan sheets that are used for plotting a set of plans that can
be either 2D or 3D.
4.2.2 Models Dialog Box
The Models Dialog Box is what allows the user to create, manage, and open specific models in the DGN file.
Double-clicking a Model within the dialog box makes the model active. Alternatively, you can use the View Groups
window to rapidly switch between models visited in the current design session as shown below.

The name of the current Model you are working in is also contained in the title bar of the View window as shown
below.
The Models Dialog Box has many tools that allow the user to work with models. In the Models Dialog Box you can:
Click the down arrow and select one of two modes:

• Active File Mode – shows the current source of the models
Models in Active in the master file.
Design File • Link Set Mode – shows the models in Project Explorer,
allowing you to select an active file or folder from the
active project in Project Explorer.
A “Sheet” or “Design” model can be created in the open DGN file.

Design models generally contain design elements, while sheet
Create a new models are used for plotting. Select the type and dimensionality
Model that you want to create. If you use a 2D seed file, then the default
setup is 2D, while a 3D seed file defaults to a 3D setup. In either
case, you can create both 2D and 3D models in the open DGN file.
Copy a Model Creates a copy of an existing model in the open DGN file.
This allows the user to change the model type, name, description,
Edit Model
and Annotation scale. See Section 4.3 Model Properties for more
Properties
detailed information.
The user can delete an existing model. The default “Design” model
Delete Model(s) the Master Model which is present in every design file cannot be
deleted.
Import Models This allows the user to import models from other existing DGN files.
allows you to define the size of a sheet layout. This is for Sheet
Models only. ODOT does not use this function. ODOT places all
Sheet Boundary
sheets as cells from the standard sheet cell library,
ODOT_Sheets.cel.
If on displays a filter row in the list box that lets you define a filter
List Filter
for any of the list columns.

• List Box - Columns are added to the list box in the Models dialog box to make it easy to identify models
designated as cells and annotation cells and to determine the cell types of such models. The Cell Type and
Is Annotation Cell columns are not displayed by default. To enable their display, Right-Click on the list
heading row and turn on Cell Type and Is Annotation Cell from the pop-up columns menu.
o Type - column show what type of model it is, the blue icon symbolizes a Design type model, and
the White icon symbolizes a Sheet type model.
o 2D/3D - column shows if the model is a 2 or 3 Dimensional model.
o Name - column shows the name of the model. See section 4.5.1 ODOT’s Standard Model Names.
o Description – column shows the description of the model, this is optional.
o Is Cell – column shows whether or not the model “Can be placed as a cell”.
o Cell Type – column shows what “Cell Type”, Graphic or Point, the model is if the model “Can be
placed as an annotation cell” is toggled on.
o Is Annotation Cell – column shows if the cell “Can be placed as an Annotation cell”.
o Design File – column shows the location and name of the DGN file.
o Sheet Name – column shows the name of the sheet. This is used in conjunction with Project
Explorer.

4.3 Model Properties

You can select or edit Properties of a model in the open DGN file. The model properties are different depending
on what type of model it is, Design or Sheet. The properties are similar to those in the Create Model dialog box
also.
“Design” Model Properties
“Sheet” Model Properties
• Type - sets the model's type (Design or Sheet) and dimensionality (2D or 3D).
• Name – is a text field to enter a name for the model. See section 4.4.1 ODOT’s Standard Model Names.
• Description – is a text field to enter a description of the model.
• Ref Logical - sets the Reference Logical name for the model. The logical name identifies the model when
it is attached to another model as a reference.
• Annotation Scale - sets the scale for text, dimensions and cells in the model. You can select from
the list of common scales used for ODOT plan sheets. When placing text, dimensions and cells the
Annotation Lock in the tool settings window must be on to ensure that they are placed at the defined
scale. The list of common scales is located from the ODOT_Scales.def file located in the
i:/ODOTstd/V8istd/data directory. For more information on using Annotation Scale, see Section 4.5
“Model Annotation Scale”.

• Line Style Scale - Lets you set the scale for custom line styles, via the field at far right. For more
information on using Line Style Scale, see Chapter 14 Custom Line Styles, Section 14.4 “ODOT
Recommendations for Scaling Line Styles”.
• Update Fields Automatically - If set on, fields are automatically updated when a file is opened. See
Chapter 10 Text Section 10.11 “Fields” for information on Fields.
Cell Properties:
Now 2D or 3D Models can be placed in a design file as a cell. Therefore, any cell library (*cel) can be opened in
MicroStation as if it were a DGN file.
• Can be placed as a cell – if toggled on, it is possible to place the model as a cell.
• Cell Type - sets the cell type (Graphic or Point). This option menu is enabled only if “Can be placed as
a cell” is toggled on.
• Can be placed as an annotation cell – if toggled on, (Can be placed as a cell enabled only) If on, it is
possible to place the model as an annotation cell. When placed as an annotation cell, the current
annotation scale is applied to the cell.
Sheet Properties:
• Sheet Name – Lets you assign a name to the sheet model.
• Sheet Number – Lets you assign a sheet number to sheet models. This makes it easy to control the
order of sheet models for presentation, printing, cataloging in a project, or generating PDFs.
• Display Sheet Boundary – If toggled on, a sheet element will display in the new sheet model. This is
not used since the sheet border cells are placed from the cell library, ODOT_Sheets.cel, in the Sheet
model.
• Border Attachment - When you associate a border attachment to a sheet model, any changes to the
annotation scale for the sheet, automatically are propagated to the border attachment.
o Size - sets the sheet size.
o Origin - sets the origin of the sheet.
o Rotation - sets the rotation angle of the sheet, measured in degrees counter-clockwise from
the x-axis (horizontal).
• Create a View Group – if toggled on, a View Group is created with the model. This is a property in the
Create Model dialog box when Create a new model is selected in the Models dialog box.
If you define at least one view group for each model in a DGN file, you can use the View Groups window
to switch between models. See Chapter 2 “Views” about more information on View Groups.
• OK - accepts the changes and closes the dialog box.
• Cancel - Closes the dialog box without making any changes.

4.4 ODOT’s use of Models

When creating a new DGN file using ODOT’s Seed files the default Design Model and a Sheet Model are already
created for use.
Select the Design or Sheet model to work in depending on your workflow described below.
Design Model
The default design model named “Design” is to be used for creating all design geometry. The Description was left
as “Master Model” but if necessary the description can be changed by the user.
 The Master Model cannot be deleted.

All basemap information shall be drawn in the default “Design” Model using real world dimensions at a 1:1 scale.
All Line Styles and Cells shall be placed in the basemap design model at a scale of one (1) and then scaled using the
Model Properties Annotation Scale and Line Style Scale feature. See Section 4.5 Model Annotation Scale and
Section 4.6 Line Styles Scale.
Sheet Model
The sheet model named “Sheet” is to be used to assemble plan sheets for plotting the design geometry. A
Description can be added if needed.
Based on the type of sheet to be built (title sheet, schematic sheet, etc.), a sheet border cell is placed in the
“Sheet” model from the ODOT_Sheets.cel cell library. Final design graphics contained in the “Design” model must
then be attached (referenced) to the “Sheet” model and annotations are added as needed. The “Sheet” model
then contains a graphic representation of the final plan sheet, and is ready to be plotted.
The benefit of attaching the “Design” model as references to the “Sheet” model is that any changes made to the
“Design” model is then reflected immediately in each “Sheet” model.

 For Roadway projects and for the Bridge site plan, when attaching basemap Design Models to the
Sheet Model the user shall not scale, move, or rotate the basemap reference attachment. Basemap
Design Models shall be attached using the MicroStation Coincident-World setting. If a rotated plot
view is required, the user shall rotate the Sheet Model view only for proper plot orientation. The sheet
border cells shall be placed in the rotated view. All reference file clipping shall be done in the rotated
view. See Section 303 References in the CADD Engineering Manual.
 ODOT’s CADD Engineering Standards Manual Section 303.4 Sheet Design Files states the following:
o Each sheet of the plan shall be contained in its own separate design file when submitted to
the Department.
o When sheet design files are submitted to the Department, no other graphics are permitted in
the Sheet model other than the graphics representing the final plotted sheet. All extra
graphics used to generate the sheet, or old versions of the sheet, should be deleted or moved
to a design model. No extra reference attachments that are not a part of the final sheet are
permitted to be attached to the Sheet model.
 It is highly recommended to place all drawing and sheet annotations only in the Sheet model. Using
this approach will enable you to reuse designs in other DGN files while avoiding conflicts in
annotation. Some exceptions would be annotation that is placed in the Design model by GEOPAK
when designing the geometry like stationing and curve data.
4.4.1 ODOT’s Standard Model Names
ODOT has a recommended standard for naming models when developing a set of plans. Any future applications
developed by ODOT utilize the current Sheet model name and most of ODOT’s plotting needs including creating
TIFFs are also dependent on the model name.
The current Sheet model name, “Sheet” and in any other model whose name matches “*Sheet*”, for example
Sheet1, Sheeta, XS_Sheet_1, XS_Sheet_2, etc. as provided by the seed file are acceptable.
Therefore, it is strongly recommended not to change the model names in the DGN files. Any name changes to
the models could prevent any future application(s) from working properly and could cause problems creating
TIFFs and plots.

4.5 Model Annotation Scale

The Model Annotation Scale sets the proper scale for all Annotations placed in a Design or Sheet model. Any Text,
Dimensions and Cells that are placed in the model are referred to as Annotations in MicroStation.
The Model Annotation Scale is a property of the model that can be set in the Model Properties dialog box. The
Model Properties dialog box can be accessed through the Models dialog box by selecting the desired model first
then selecting the Edit Model Properties icon shown below.
The Model Annotation Scale can then be set by selecting the appropriate engineering scale for ODOT plan sheets
as shown below.

The Model Annotation Scale should be set prior to placing any annotations in the Sheet model. This automates the
process so that any text, dimensions or cells that are placed in the sheet are placed at the correct scale for
printing.
When placing Text, Dimensions or Cells in the model there is an Annotation Scale Lock located in the tool settings
window that must be ON to use the model annotation scale as shown below.
 All ODOT’s Text and Dimension Styles and Cells were created at a 1:1 scale so they are scaled to the
appropriate sheet scale.
 If the Model Annotation Scale Lock is off, any annotation placed in the model will not be scaled
automatically.
ODOT uses the Model Annotation Scale primarily for creating Sheet models for plotting a set of plans. When
creating the Sheet models ODOT’s drawing border is scaled to fit the design since all geometry is drawn and
referenced at a 1:1 scale. With this method, where the drawing border is scaled up (or down) to cover the
required area in the design, all text, dimensioning and cells must be scaled the same amount, also. This is to
ensure that when the scaled print is created, text, dimensioning and cell elements are at the correct physical and
cosmetic size.
When you specify an annotation scale, the Sheet cell is scaled by that amount. Additionally, any text that you
place in the Sheet model, with the Annotation Scale lock enabled, automatically will be scaled by the same
amount. For example, if you are creating a 1” = 20’ scale drawing, any text that you place would have to be 20
times bigger than normal so that it prints at the correct size. With Annotation Scale set to 1:20, you don't have to
worry about calculating the size of the text. If you turn on the Annotation Scale lock and then select .14” text, it
will be placed in the Sheet model as 2.8’ high, but when printed at 1:20 scale it will be scaled back to .14” high.

4.6 Model Line Style Scale

The Model Line Style Scale sets the proper scale for all Line Styles placed in a Design or Sheet model.
The Model Line Styles Scale is a property of the model that can be set in the Model Properties dialog box. The
Model Properties dialog box can be accessed through the Models dialog box by selecting the desired model first
then selecting the Edit Model Properties icon shown below.
The Model Line Style Scale can then be set by using one of the following two methods as shown below.
1. Select Annotation Scale if you want the display of the lines styles to match the Model Annotation
Scale.

2. Select Global Line Style Scale if you need to set the line style scale factor to a value different than the
Model Annotation Scale.
 All ODOT’s Custom Line Styles were created at a 1:1 scale so they are scaled to the appropriate sheet scale.
For more information on Line Styles see Chapter 14 Custom Line Styles.
ODOT uses the Model Line Style Scale primarily for creating Sheet models for plotting a set of plans. When
creating the Sheet models ODOT’s drawing border is scaled to fit the design since all geometry is drawn and
referenced at a 1:1 scale. With this method, where the drawing border is scaled up (or down) to cover the
required area in the design, all line styles must be scaled the same amount, also. This is to ensure that when the
scaled print is created, line styles are at the correct physical and cosmetic size.

Chapter 5 – Levels
Table of Contents:
5.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................... 3
5.2 WHAT ARE LEVELS? ......................................................................................................... 3
5.3 THE ACTIVE LEVEL ........................................................................................................... 4
5.3.1 SETTING THE ACTIVE LEVEL ............................................................................................... 4
5.4 LEVEL LIBRARY ................................................................................................................ 5
5.4.1 NAMED LEVELS .............................................................................................................. 6
5.5 “BY LEVEL” SYMBOLOGY ................................................................................................. 7
5.5.1 USING COLOR, LINE STYLE, AND LINE WEIGHT SYMBOLOGY ...................................................... 7
5.5.2 USING PRIORITY AND TRANSPARENCY SYMBOLOGY ................................................................. 8
5.6 LEVEL DISPLAY DIALOG BOX ............................................................................................ 9
5.6.1 TURNING LEVELS ON/OFF .............................................................................................. 15
5.6.1 SORTING LEVELS .......................................................................................................... 17
5.7 USING FILTERS .............................................................................................................. 18
5.8 LEVEL MANAGER ........................................................................................................... 20
5.8.1 TURNING LEVELS ON/OFF USING THE LEVEL MANAGER .......................................................... 22
5.8.2 SYMBOLOGY OVERRIDE ................................................................................................. 23


5.1 Introduction
In MicroStation when users draw or place elements in the design file, the elements are placed on a Level(s). This
chapter focuses on the use of level functionality in MicroStation and how they are used for an ODOT project.
5.2 What are Levels?

Prior to the development of Computer Aided Design, drawings were created in overlays. This manual method
required placement of various features onto individual transparent sheets which eventually were combined to
create a composite drawing. As a result of early overlay techniques, CADD was developed to address this method
of drawing. Levels, overlays, layers, etc., are names which essentially translated to overlay drawing in the world of
CADD. In MicroStation, Levels is the term which refers to the overlay drawing process. Each level can have its own
symbology, i.e. color, style, and weight.
MicroStation has a limit of 4 billion levels that can be created and used in a drawing. Obviously, using such a high
number of levels is impractical at best. ODOT has created a level system that uses approximately over 800 levels
for all disciplines which are used to organize graphic information within the file to maintain uniformity among
different drawing files.
In addition to adding symbology to a drawing, levels can be toggled on and off to display only the desired
information. When MicroStation users refer to turning levels on and off or toggling their display, they really mean
toggling the display of elements residing on those levels. Some of the benefits of working with levels are:
• Avoid drawing the same elements twice.

• Producing composite drawings efficiently.
• Organizing and managing graphic information.
• Providing a means of reducing clutter in a drawing with the ability to turn off various drawing items.

5.3 The Active Level

While a MicroStation design file can have many levels that are available to the user, only one level is active at any
given time. This level is referred to as the Active Level.
All elements are created on the Active Level. It is important to change the active level to the desired level name
before placing elements. The level that an element resides on may be changed later, but the best practice is to
create it on the correct level to start with.
5.3.1 Setting the Active Level
The easiest way to set the Active Level is to use the “Active Level” pull-down on the Attributes Tool Box. Select
the Active Level pull down list and choose the desired level to be set as the Active Level like below.
 The name of the level to which the Active Level is set is shown in the Status Bar also.
 If you Save Settings in the open DGN file before closing it, the Active Level settings will remain in
effect the next time you open the file.
 You can also set the Active Level using the Level Display and Level Manager Dialog box.

5.4 Level Library

A Level Library refers to a component of a DGN library that contains a level structure that can contain one or more
level definitions. They can be filtered at any time to make only specific levels within a level library available during
the design process.
A DGN library, sometimes referred to as a DGNLIB, contains data that is shared throughout files and among users.
These shared resources consist of things that you define and name, which are used as standards by members of a
workgroup.
A standard set of Levels has been developed for use on all ODOT construction plans. All of the levels that are
present in an ODOT drawing come from an attached DGNLIB called ODOT_Levels.dgnlib located in the
i:\ODOTstd\V8istd\dgnlib directory. This is a library of level information, including level structure, filter
information, and level symbology. This level library is attached to a design file by use of a configuration variable,
MS_DGNLIBLIST, which has been defined for ODOT users in the ODOT Project Configuration file, ODOTV8i.pcf.
New Levels can be created using the Level Manager dialog box. However in order to maintain uniformity, ODOT’s
standard configuration for MicroStation restricts the ability to create new levels or to delete levels. If a user needs
a level to display specific features that don’t fit on any of the levels already created they should contact the Office
of CADD and Mapping Services CADD Section with requests for new levels or questions about the use of ODOT’s
standard levels. You can submit your requests, comments or questions on ODOT’s CADD website at:
http://www.dot.state.oh.us/Divisions/Engineering/CaddMapping/CADD/Pages/Suggestions%20and%20Questions.aspx
Level structures are not hierarchical, but level library filters are. In MicroStation, level filters are used to combine
level definitions into groups.
A level definition does not technically attach from a level library to a design file until it is used. This is similar to
attaching a cell from a cell library. After attaching a cell library, the cells are not present in the design file until they
are placed.

5.4.1 Named Levels
In MicroStation, each level is given a name as well as a unique number. Users will most commonly select levels by
the name rather than the number.
ODOT’s standard levels have been developed using the following naming convention:
Classification_Disposition_Logical Name
Consists of two (2) uppercase characters used to group

Classification
the levels into categories.
Is used to identify the level for placement of either X

Disposition
(existing) or P (proposed) information.
Is used as a description of the element contents. Where

Logical Name
appropriate, common industry abbreviations are used.
All ODOT level names use alphanumeric characters only. No spaces or special characters are used other than the
underscore “_” character.
An example of a level name is as follows:
BD_P_Building:
BD is the 2 letter Classification code that stands for Buildings.

P is the Disposition identifying the building is for a proposed feature.
Building is the Logical Name used to describe the level.
 See the CADD Engineering Standards Manual, Section 202 Level Assignments and Appendix A for a
complete list of the ODOT levels.

5.5 “By Level” Symbology

The Attributes tool box contains settings that allow the attributes (symbology) to be set with a “By Level” feature.
With the “ByLevel” feature selected in the Attributes Tool Box the elements drawn on the Active Level will be
placed using the default values as defined in ODOT’s Level Library, ODOT_Levels.dgnlib.
In general, to facilitate the use of MicroStation’s “ByLevel” attributes, the ODOT levels have been established such
that each curvilinear feature will have its own level. In order to keep the overall number of levels manageable,
there are cases where similar features will be placed on the same level making it impossible to use ByLevel
attributes for those features. There are some exceptions noted in the CADD Manual in Section 202.3 ByLevel
Considerations. For example: Pavement Marking – Different colors are needed to represent the various pavement
marking color, so you may have to change the color for that particular level instead of using the ByLevel Color that
is set for that particular level.
 The “ByLevel” Attribute settings work differently for Color, Line Style & Line Weight versus Priority
and Transparency. See section 5.5.2 Using Priority and Transparency Symbology.
5.5.1 Using Color, Line Style, and Line Weight Symbology
The Color, Line Style, and Line Weight pull-down boxes on the Attributes Tool box each have a “By Level” option
as shown below. This setting allows the level to control the active color, line style, and line weight.
With “ByLevel” options selected the elements drawn on the selected level will be placed using the default values
as assigned for that level in ODOT_levels.dgnlib. For example, the level BD_P_Building has been assigned the
following default values in ODOT_Levels.dgnlib:
Color = 7, Line Style = 0, Weight = 1

When using MicroStation to create an ODOT drawing, the color, style and weight attributes should be set to “By
Level”. This setting allows the level to control the active color, line style, and line weight. This ensures that the
levels comply with ODOT standards.
The ODOT standard configuration has been set to automatically default the Color, Line Style, and Weight values to
“ByLevel” each time a new level is selected. In the example below, when the level RD_P_Fence is selected, the
Color, Line Style, and Weight values are automatically changed.
 The ODOT standard configuration has been set to automatically default to the color, line style, and weight
values to “ByLevel” each time a new level is selected.
5.5.2 Using Priority and Transparency Symbology
The Attributes tool box contains some different symbology settings, other than the color, line style and line weight,
called Priority and Transparency. The Priority and Transparency settings unlike the color, line style and line weight
setting does not have a toggle for the “ByLevel” option.
Without changing the Priority or Transparency setting and leaving their settings’ displayed at 0, the default values
are assigned for that level in ODOT’s Level Library. For example, the level BD_P_Building has been assigned the
following default values in ODOT_Levels.dgnlib:
Color = 7, Line Style = 0, Weight = 1, Priority = 100, Transparency = 0
But the Attribute settings for the Priority and Transparency values do not change; they remain at 0 in the
Attributes tool box as shown below, unlike the settings for color, line style and line weight.
With the ODOT standard configuration that has been set to automatically default to the color, line style, and
weight values to “ByLevel” each time a new level is selected, the settings for Priority and Transparency do not
automatically reset. So, if the user has the need to change a setting for the Priority and Transparency of an
element in the design file, they will have to reset the Priority and Transparency setting value back to 0.

5.6 Level Display Dialog Box

One of the biggest advantages of using Levels in a drawing is the ability to control level display. This is done
through the Level Display dialog box, which can be accessed by one of the following methods:
a. Click the Level Display icon on the Primary Tools tool box like below:
b. Select Settings > Level > Display from the Main Menu bar,
c. Click the icon at the upper left corner of the View window and select Level Display.
The Level Display dialog box opens listing levels in the open DGN file. The Level Display dialog box is used to turn
levels on and off in the model.

Apply To Open Views – If on, applies to all the open views for Level display settings adjustment.
Apply to Selected View – If on, applies to the selected view for Level display settings adjustment.
Level Display Setting (Option pull down Menu) - Sets the operating mode for this dialog box.
• View Display — Changes in the level display affect the chosen view in the active model.
• Global Display — Changes in the level display affect all views in all models in the open file.
• Global Freeze — Changes in the level display affect all views in all models in the open file. When Global
Freeze is on, elements on the frozen levels are not displayed and cannot be printed (plotted). If a
reference is assigned to a level, and the level is frozen, it does not display.
 Turning on/off View Display or Global Display is basically the same as thawing/freezing levels, with
one difference. When a level is frozen, any cells or references placed on that level will not be
displayed, regardless of how levels are used in the elements that make up the cell or reference.

Change Level Tool - is used to toggle the display or locked status of a level.
• Display Only - Turns on the display of the selected level(s).

• Display Off - Turns off the display of the selected level(s).
• Lock - Locks the display of the selected level(s) in the current
state.
• Unlock - Unlocks the display of the selected level(s).
• Set Target - Sets the target level for the display of the selected
level(s).
• Set Active – Set the active level for the display of the selected
level(s).
Show Target Tree - Toggles the display of the target tree, which is used to set the target model for level display
settings changes or sets the model as a target.
List Filter - If the mode option menu is set to Levels, sets the Filter — named or defined on-the-fly— applied to
level display.

Show Level Names or Filters (option menu) - Determines the contents of the list box.
• Levels — Lists the levels in the open file (and in reference attachments if they are selected in the target
tree).
• Filters — Lists level filters defined in the open file (and in reference attachments if they are included in
the target tree).
Dialog Properties - Pops up the Level Display Properties dialog box, which is used to set the properties of the Level
Display dialog box.
• Target List – Sets the orientation of the Level Display dialog box.
• Merge Names - When multiple targets are selected, only unique
level names are displayed. For example, if 10 instance of the
same level name exists that level name will only appear once.
• Link Tree Selection - Links the actions of the Level Manager and
the Level Display dialog. When turned on, any target file(s)
selected in the tree in Level Manager are selected in Level
Display and vice versa.
• Auto-arrange items - If on, icons in the tool bar wrap when the
dialog is resized.
• Allow Docking - If on, the next time you open the Level Display
dialog, it will be available for docking.
• Follow Active View – If on, the levels that are turned off or on
are only applied to the Active View and the View Index is not
displayed.
• DGN Levels as – Sets the interface of the Level Display dialog

box to display Names or Number Map.

Target List - Used to select the model for turning levels on or off. This tree control enables selection of the active
model, another model in the open DGN file, or an attached reference in the open file or another file, as the target.
A dimmed entry in the tree indicates that the display of that reference is turned off.
Right-clicking in the target tree area opens up a pop-up menu with the following options shown below.
• Reference — opens the References dialog or Attach

Reference dialog.
• Update Levels
• Select All
• Select None
• Invert Selection
• Cut
• Copy
• Paste
• Properties

Levels (List Box) - Lists the levels (or filters if Mode is set to Filters) in the target model.
Right-click on a level in the list box brings up a pop-up menu.
• Set Active - Sets the selected (highlighted) level to the active level in the active model.
• Jump To Active Level – Takes you to the active level.
• Create Display Set - Creates a display set. Display sets let you select a group of elements to display in
selected views, with all other elements hidden.
• All On - Turns on all levels in the file (and attached references if they are included in the Target field).
• All Off - Turns on all levels in the file (and attached references if they are included in the Target field).
• Invert On/Off - Selects all unselected and deselects all selected levels listed in the dialog box.
• Off By Element - Opens the Change Level tool in Display Off mode.
• All Except Element - Opens the Change Level tool in Display Only mode.
• Save Filter - If the Mode is Levels and Untitled, All Levels or a filter is select from the Filter List, the
filter row appears allowing you to create an on-the-fly filter. Clicking Save Filter opens the Save Filter
dialog box for saving and naming the filter.
• Level Manager - Opens the Level Manager dialog box.

5.6.1 Turning Levels On/Off
To toggle levels Off and On, simply click on the Level Name. A level with a blue background is on; a level with a
white background is turned off.
If the level name is in bold type, it is being used in the drawing. A used level is a level with elements placed on it.
The Active Level has a green background. To make a level the Active Level using the Level Display dialog box,
Double-Click the name of the level to set as the Active Level.
The Show Target Tree button opens the file target area. This is used to turn levels off and on in reference
files.
View Number
Target Area
Level On and
Used
Level Display
Off
Active Level
Level On and
Unused

The Target Tree allows the user to select which file, Master or Reference, for which to adjust level display settings.
The level display for each file can be controlled independently or groups of files can be manipulated at once. If the
tree is expanded, as shown in the example below, individual reference files can be selected and the corresponding
levels turned on/off.
Multiple files can be selected, as shown at left below, and the corresponding levels toggled on/off as needed. If
the tree is collapsed, as shown in the example at right below, the levels for the active file and all reference files can
be toggled on/off.
 Right-Click the Target Tree to access a pop-up menu with additional options to manipulate the
references.

5.6.1 Sorting Levels
As stated earlier, the ODOT standard has roughly over 800 levels that elements may be placed on. With that many
levels, it becomes necessary to sort them intelligently so that the user is not overwhelmed with the sheer volume
of levels.
The Level Display dialog box can be sorted by simply reordering the list, or applying filters.
Sorting the Level List by Headings
Clicking on a heading name will sort the list according to the heading selected (i.e. Name, Used). Click once to sort
in ascending order and click a second time to sort in descending order.
More categories can be added by Right-Clicking on an existing category and choosing the category name to add
from the list.
The list of heading may be reordered by dragging a heading to a new location.

5.7 Using Filters

Another way to sort and organize the list of levels is by using Level Filters. Filters provide a useful way to group
associated levels for the purpose of viewing or not viewing a specific group of levels. ODOT has created a set of
level filters, in the ODOT_levels.dgnlib, to allow the user to see only the level names they are interested in
accessing. See the CADD Engineering Standards Manual, Section 202.4 Filters for a list of ODOT Filters.
To activate a filter, choose its name from the filter drop down list like below. When a filter is selected, only levels
matching the filter are displayed in the level list. For example, you might want to limit the level display in the
dialog box or in the Attributes dialog to show only the Geometry levels, so all levels starting with the two letter
code “GE” are shown.

Filters can also be accessed from the Attributes tool bar like below. To activate a filter, choose its name from the
filter drop down list.
The user can also change the level list to display only level Filters. In this mode the user can turn levels on and off
by selecting the filter. This is accomplished by changing the Level toggle from Levels to Filters in the Level Display
dialog as shown below.

5.8 Level Manager

The Level Manager dialog box is used to create and delete levels, modify level attributes, and define filters for
controlling the display of groups of levels based on their attributes. Since the Level Manager is mainly used to
manage levels most of the level editing function has been disabled. However there is still a use for the Level
Manager to control level display and level symbology for the open design file and attached references.
The following are some different ways to open the Level Manager dialog box:
a. Click the Level Manager icon on the Primary Tools tool box like below.
b. Select Settings > Level > Manager from the Main Menu bar.
c. If the Level Display dialog box is open, Right-Click inside the Level Display dialog box and select Level
Manager.

By default, the Level Manager includes a list of models, levels, and filters on the left, and a detail section on the
right.
You can select multiple design files and/or reference attachments from the tree by holding the left mouse button
down and dragging the cursor over the desired files. The levels for all the selected files display in the level list.
Levels List - shows the attributes and properties of individual levels for the selected file or reference. You can filter
this list using the dialog box's Filter option. The list entry for the Active Level is displayed in the color green.
To modify attributes and properties for a level, select the level in the list, and Right-Click. Under the Modify
column a dot identifies whether the level has been modified.
Update Levels from Library - If the open DGN file is selected or a reference in the left-hand pane, clicking Update
Levels from Library synchronizes the properties of levels in the open DGN file and in DGN files that contain
referenced models, with the properties of the corresponding source levels in the attached level library.
Symbology - Displays elements with the same value.
• ByLevel - When turned on causes all elements with bylevel attributes to be displayed.
• Overrides - View setting that, when turned on, causes all elements on a particular level to be displayed
with an alternate set of element symbology than the default. Level Overrides must be turned on in the
View Attributes dialog box for the override symbology to display. ODOT’s levels uses the same symbology
for the symbology overrides, but can be changed if needed.

Level Filter - Lets you select the active level filter, which is the filter used to limit
the display of levels in the levels list box and the active level list in the Attributes
tool box.
Select <none> to not use a filter, select All Levels to display all levels in all
models, or select the filter name.
Dialog Properties – Used to set preferences for the Level Manager dialog box.
• Merge Names - When multiple targets are selected, only unique level names are displayed. For example,
if 10 instance of the same level name exists, that level name will only appear once. This is toggled on by
default.
• Link Tree Selection - Links the actions of the Level Manager and the Level Display dialog box. When
turned on, any target file(s) selected in the tree in Level Manager are selected in Level Display and vice
versa. This is toggled on by default.
5.8.1 Turning Levels On/Off using the Level Manager
To turn off a level using the Level Manager click the checkmark under the heading Global Display for that level as
shown below. The checkmark disappears and this level is turned off in all views. To turn the level back on, click
under the heading Global Display for that level and the checkmark reappears indicating the level is turned on in all
views.
To freeze a level using the Level Manager, click the under the heading Global Freeze for that level as shown below.
A checkmark appears indicating this level is frozen in all views. To thaw that level click the checkmark under the
heading Global Freeze for that level again. The checkmark disappears indicating that level is no longer frozen.
 Global Freeze indicates whether the level is frozen. If frozen, its elements are not displayed and they
cannot be printed. A frozen level is similar to a level with the display off. However, when a level is
frozen, any shared cells or references placed on that level will not be displayed, regardless of how
levels are used in the elements that make up the cell or reference.

5.8.2 Symbology Override
Another control that can be assigned to a level is an Override set of symbology settings. Each element in a design
file has its own symbology, e.g. color, line weight and line style. Most elements using ODOT Standards are placed
using the ByLevel Symbology feature, which is considered normal symbology of an element. However, elements
in MicroStation can have an alternate symbology called Override Symbology. This feature is not used by ODOT for
creating or plotting a set of plans.
If a level is selected in Level Manager and the Level Properties dialog is opened, the user can see the symbology
settings.
To open Level Properties, select Levels > Properties from the Level Manager or Right-Click on the level. The user
can review and or change the Symbology Overrides in the bottom of the Level Properties dialog.

The ability to select multiple target files allows the ability to apply override symbology on specified levels existing
in multiple files. The color symbology can be changed once so the color is changed in all of the selected files. This
is accomplished by selecting the Symbology: Overrides toggle on the top left of the Level Manager.
 The Level Overrides checkbox must be toggled on in the View Attributes dialog box for the override
symbology to display as shown below.

Table of Contents:
6.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................... 3
6.2 LINEAR ELEMENTS TOOL BOX .......................................................................................... 4
6.2.1 PLACE SMARTLINE .......................................................................................................... 6
6.2.2 PLACE LINE ................................................................................................................... 8
6.2.3 PLACE MULTILINE .......................................................................................................... 9
6.2.4 PLACE STREAM LINE STRING............................................................................................ 10
6.2.5 PLACE POINT OR STREAM CURVE...................................................................................... 11
6.2.6 CONSTRUCT ANGLE BISECTOR .......................................................................................... 13
6.2.7 CONSTRUCT MINIMUM DISTANCE LINE .............................................................................. 13
6.2.8 CONSTRUCT LINE AT ACTIVE ANGLE .................................................................................. 14
6.3 POINTS TOOL BOX ......................................................................................................... 15
6.3.1 PLACE ACTIVE POINT ..................................................................................................... 17
6.3.2 CONSTRUCT POINTS BETWEEN DATA POINTS....................................................................... 18
6.3.3 POINT ON ELEMENT...................................................................................................... 19
6.3.4 POINT AT INTERSECTION ................................................................................................. 20
6.3.5 CONSTRUCT POINTS ALONG ELEMENT ............................................................................... 21
6.3.6 CONSTRUCT ACTIVE POINTS AT DISTANCE ALONG ELEMENT .................................................... 22
6.4 POLYGONS TOOL BOX ................................................................................................... 23
6.4.1 PLACE BLOCK .............................................................................................................. 25
6.4.2 PLACE SHAPE .............................................................................................................. 26
6.4.3 PLACE ORTHOGONAL SHAPE ........................................................................................... 27
6.4.4 PLACE REGULAR POLYGON.............................................................................................. 28
6.5 CIRCLES TOOL BOX ........................................................................................................ 29
6.5.1 PLACE CIRCLE .............................................................................................................. 31
6.5.2 PLACE ELLIPSE ............................................................................................................. 33
6.5.3 PLACE ARC ................................................................................................................. 35
6.5.4 PLACE HALF ELLIPSE ...................................................................................................... 37
6.5.5 PLACE QUARTER ELLIPSE ................................................................................................ 37
6.5.6 MODIFY ARC RADIUS .................................................................................................... 38
6.5.7 MODIFY ARC ANGLE ..................................................................................................... 39
6.5.8 MODIFY ARC AXIS ........................................................................................................ 39
6.6 DELETE ELEMENT TOOL ................................................................................................. 40
6.7 UNDO AND REDO FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................... 41


6.1 Introduction
This chapter will cover the basic 2D drawing tools available in MicroStation. Most of the basic 2D drawing tools are
located on the Tasks Drawing Navigation Tool Box. The Task Navigation tool box contains the Task List, from
which the active task is selected, and the tools of the active task.
When using the drawing tools in MicroStation, the Tool Settings Window is very important. This dialog
dynamically changes to allow settings specific to the selected drawing tool.
For example, when using the Place Line tool, the Tool Settings Window provides fields to enter Length and Angle
for precise placement of the line. These settings are optional. The user does not have to use both or either
setting. When neither or only one setting is selected for use, the tool requires the user enter two data points to
place a line. If both settings are chosen, then only one data point is required to place a line.
Many of the tools in the Task Navigation Tool Box add new elements to the design file. Elements vary, but
generally the same series of steps is followed to create them.
1. Select the appropriate tool.

2. Enter the desired tool settings.
3. Specify the location for the new element.

6.2 Linear Elements Tool Box

Lines are the most basic element in any design file. The tools in the Linear Elements tool box are used to place
linear elements. To access these tools, select the Linear tool box from the Task Navigation tool box using one of
the following methods shown below.

The Linear – Task Tool Box:
Used to place a chain of connected line segments and arc

Place SmartLine segments as individual elements or as a single line string, shape,
circle, complex chain, or complex shape element.
Place Line Used to place or construct a line.
Used to place a MultiLine, which can be made up of 16

Place MultiLine
components.
Used to place Active points select the down arrow button to

Points
select the Points task tool box.
Used to place Curves select the down arrow button to select the
Create Curves
Create Curves task tool box.
Used to place a stream line string - primarily for tracing images

Place Stream Line String
when digitizing.
Place Point or Stream Curve Used to place a point or stream curve.
Used to construct a line that bisects an angle defined by three

Construct Angle Bisector
data points.
Construct Minimum Used to construct a line between two elements at their closest
Distance Line points.
Construct Line at Active Used to construct a line that intersects a line segment (line or
Angle segment of a line string or shape) at the Active Angle.

6.2.1 Place SmartLine
The Place SmartLine tool is used to place a chain of connected line segments and arc segments as individual
elements or as a single line string, shape, circle, complex chain, or complex shape element.
To place a chain of connected line segments and arc segments using SmartLine
1. Select the Place SmartLine tool.
2. From the Segment Type option menu, choose the segment type.
3. If this is the first segment, enter a data point to position the first vertex.
4. Enter data points to define the segment (follow the prompts in the status bar), snapping if necessary to
previously defined segments. For information about snapping, see Tentative snap points.
5. To define another segment of the same type, return to step 4. If snapping to the first segment but not
completing a shape or complex shape, turn off Closed Element before accepting the tentative point.
Or
To choose a different type of segment, return to step 2.
Or
To complete a line, line string, arc, or complex chain, Reset.
Or
To complete a shape, circle, or complex shape, snap to the first vertex point, and accept the tentative
point.
Tool Settings for Place SmartLine:


Sets the type of segment.
Segment Type • Lines — Sets line segments
• Arcs — Sets arc segments
Sets the type of vertex.
• Sharp
• Rounded
Vertex Type
• Chamfered
If after snapping to the first vertex point and before accepting it, you change Vertex Type,
the new setting applies only to the final vertex.
(with Vertex Type set to Rounded) If on, sets the arc radius for a rounded vertex. If after
snapping to the first vertex point and accepting it, you change Rounding Radius, the new
Rounding Radius setting applies only to the next radius. If after snapping to the first vertex point but
before accepting it, you change Rounding Radius, the new setting applies to the
previously placed radius as well as the next radius.
(with Vertex Type set to Chamfered) Sets the two distances required to define a chamfer.
Chamfer Offset Chamfer Offset requires that the two chamfer distances be equal (from the theoretical
intersection point).
If on, places segments as a single element. With a tentative snap on the first vertex point,
the Closed Element settings appear.
Join Elements If off, places segments as individual elements. The Closed Element settings do not
appear, and the individual segments can have different symbologies.
Toggling this setting affects previously defined segments in the chain.

If on, accepting a tentative snap on the first vertex point closes the element. Otherwise,
Closed Element
accepting such a tentative snap does not close the element.
Area (with Closed Element on) Sets the Active Area — Solid or Hole.
(with Closed Element) Sets the Active Fill Type.
• None (no fill)
Fill Type
• Opaque (filled with Active Color)
• Outlined (filled with Fill Color)
(with Closed Element on) Sets the color and optional gradient with which the element is
filled:
Fill Color
• If Fill Type is Opaque, the fill color is the Active Color.
• If Fill Type is Outlined, the fill color can be different from the Active Color.
(in SmartLine Placement Settings) If on, after you enter line segments, AccuDraw typically
rotates its compass such that the x-axis aligns with the line that you just placed. Instead
Rotate AccuDraw to
of turning off AccuDraw's “context sensitivity” feature which would stop this aligning
segments
behavior in all the tools, the Rotate AccuDraw to segments setting affects only the Place
SmartLine tool.
(in SmartLine Placement Settings) If on, when you select the Place SmartLine tool, the
Always start in line
segment type normally defaults to “Lines,” despite the last segment type used. If off,
mode
AccuDraw uses the last segment type that you used.

6.2.2 Place Line
The Place Line tool is used to place or construct a line.
To Place a Line
1. Select the Place Line tool.
2. Enter a data point to define one endpoint.
3. If necessary, enter a data point to define the other endpoint.
Tool Settings for Place Line:
Length If on, sets the length of the line in working units.
Angle If on, constrains the line to the Active Angle, which can be keyed in here as well.

6.2.3 Place MultiLine
The Place MultiLine tool is used to place a MultiLine, which can be made up of 16 components.
To Place a Multi-Line
1. Select the Place Multi-line tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the beginning of the multi-line.
3. Continue entering data points to define other vertices.
4. To complete an open multi-line, Reset.
Tool Settings for Place MultiLine:

Style Sets the current multi-line style from a list of all available multi-line styles.
Multi-line Styles
Opens the Multi-line Styles dialog which is used to create and modify multi-line styles.
icon
Length If on, sets segment length, in working units.
(Active) Angle If on, constrains the multi-line to the Active Angle, which can be keyed in here as well.
Style Scale If on, the offset distances for the component lines are scaled by the amount shown.
Sets the work line's position in the multi-line when placed and how the component lines are
offset. The work line's position can be changed between placements of individual segments.
Place By
Placing a multi-line in this manner, however, prevents you from using Association to associate
vertices with other elements.
If on, and Snap Lock is on, any vertex in a multi-line can be associated to another element by
Association
snapping to that element.
Close Element Connects the first point of the multi-line with the last point of the multi-line.
 To change a multi-line's attributes to the active multi-line definition, use the Change Multi-line tool.

6.2.4 Place Stream Line String
The Place Stream Line String tool is used to place a stream line string - primarily for tracing images when digitizing.
To Place a Stream Line String
1. Select the Place Stream Line String tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the origin.
3. Move the pointer. A stream of data points is entered without pressing the Data button.
4. Reset to end the line string.
Tool Settings for Place Stream Line String:

Delta Sets the minimum distance, in working units, between sampled points.
Tolerance Sets the maximum distance, in working units, between recorded data points.
Sets the angle, in degrees, that when exceeded, causes the last sampled point to be recorded
Angle
as a data point.
Area Sets the area that, when exceeded, causes a sampled point to be recorded as a data point.
 A line string element can have a maximum of 5000 vertices. If more than 5000 vertices are defined, a
complex chain consisting of one or more line string elements is created.

6.2.5 Place Point or Stream Curve
The Place Point or Stream Curve tool is used to place a point or stream curve.
To Place a Point Curve
1. Select the Place Point or Stream Curve tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Points.
3. Enter a data point to define the curve's beginning.
4. Enter a second data point for the first curve segment.
5. Enter a data point to complete the first curve segment.
6. Enter additional data points to add segments to the curve.
7. Reset to end the curve.
To Place a Stream Curve
1. Select the Place Point or Stream Curve tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Stream.
4. Move the pointer. A stream of data points is entered without pressing the Data button.
5. Reset to end the curve.

Tool Settings Place Point or Stream Curve:
Sets how the curve is defined.

• Points — Traditional MicroStation curve: “Flat” between the first and second and
next-to-last and last data points entered. In many cases, B-splines are more accurate
and easier to manipulate.
Method
• Stream — Primarily for tracing images when digitizing. Many vertices can be defined
without having to enter a large number of individual data points. The movement of
the tablet cursor is sampled and data points are recorded based on the Active
Stream Delta, Tolerance, Angle, and Area.
Non-planar If on and Method is set to Points, a space curve can be placed (the active design must be 3D).
Delta If Method is Stream, sets the minimum distance, in working units, between sampled points.
If Method is Stream, sets the maximum distance, in working units, between recorded data
Tolerance
points.
If Method is Stream, sets the angle, in degrees, that when exceeded, causes the last sampled
Angle
point to be recorded as a data point.
If Method is Stream, sets the area that, when exceeded, causes a sampled point to be
Area
recorded as a data point.
 A curve element can have 3 to 5000 vertices. If more than 5000 vertices are defined, a complex chain
consisting of one or more curve elements is created.

6.2.6 Construct Angle Bisector
The Construct Angle Bisector tool is used to construct a line that bisects an angle defined by three data points.
To Construct an Angle Bisector
1. Select the Construct Angle Bisector tool.
2. Enter a data point to define one endpoint of the angle that is to be bisected.
3. Enter a second data point to define the vertex of the angle.
4. Enter a third data point to define the second endpoint of the angle.
Tools Settings – None
6.2.7 Construct Minimum Distance Line
The Construct Minimum Distance Line tool is used to construct a line between two elements at their closest
points.
To Construct a Minimum Distance Line
1. Select the Construct Minimum Distance Line tool.
2. Click on the first element.
3. Click on the second element.
4. Accept the line by clicking in the drawing area.

6.2.8 Construct Line at Active Angle
The Construct Line at Active Angle tool is used to construct a line that intersects a line segment (line or segment of
a line string or shape) at the Active Angle.
To Construct a Line that Intersects a line segment at the Active Angle
1. Select the Construct Line at Active Angle tool.
2. Identify the element to intersect.

If the Method is From Point, this data point defines the intersection.
3. Enter a data point.

If Length is off, this data point defines the length.
If the Method is To Point, this data point defines the intersection.
Tool Settings for Line at Active Angle:

Sets when the intersection is defined.
Method • From Point — The intersection is defined when the element being intersected is
identified (step 2).
• To Point — The intersection is defined by the second data point, as shown in step 3.
Sets the angle, measured counter-clockwise from the intersected line segment, at which the
Active Angle
line is constructed.
Length If on, the length is constrained to the value that is keyed in the field.

6.3 Points Tool Box

Points are very simple geometric elements, consisting of a zero-length line at specific coordinates. Points are
rarely used to represent real-world items, but are used to construct other elements. For an example ODOT uses
Active Points on Summary Sheets and Sub-Summary tables that act as an aid for the placement of text.
To access these tools, select the Linear tool box from the Task Navigation tool box, then select Points using one of

The Points Tool Box:
Place Active Point Used to place the Active Point.
Used to construct a number of equally spaced Active Points

Point(s) Between
between two data points.
Used to construct the Active Point on an element at the point

Point On Element
closest to the data point.
Used to construct the Active Point at the intersection of two

Point at Intersection
elements.
Used to construct the Active Point a specified number of times

along an element between two data points. The distance along
Point(s) Along Element
the element between each instance of the Active Point is the
same.
Used to construct the Active Point on an element at a keyed-in

Point(s) at Distance Along
Distance from where the element is identified.

6.3.1 Place Active Point
The Place Active Point tool is used to place the Active Point.
To place the Active Point
1. Select the Place Active Point tool.
2. Enter a data point to position the Active Point.
3. Continue to enter data points to place the same Active Point.
Tool Settings for Place Active Point:

Sets the Active Point type:
Point Type • Element — A zero-length line.

• Character — A character.
• Cell — A cell.
Character If the Active Point Type is Character, the character or symbol.
Cell If the Active Point Type is Cell, the Active Point Cell.
Browse Cell(s) Opens the Cell Library dialog for setting an Active Point Cell.
 These basic settings are standard for all of the point tools.

6.3.2 Construct Points Between Data Points
The Construct Points Between Data Points tool is used to construct a number of equally spaced Active Points
between two data points.
To construct Active Points between data points
1. Select the Construct Active Points Between Data Points tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the location of the first Active Point.
3. Enter a second data point to define the location of the last Active Point.
The remaining Active Points are equally spaced between the two data points.
4. Continue from step 3 to enter additional Active Points from the last data point entered, or Reset to return
to step 2.
Tool Settings for Point(s) Between:


Points Sets how many Active Points are constructed.

6.3.3 Point On Element
The Point On Element tool is used to construct the Active Point on an element at the point closest to the data
point.
To project the Active Point onto an element
1. Select the Project Active Point Onto Element tool.
2. Identify the element.
3. Enter a data point to project the Active Point—that is, place it on the element at the point closest to the
data point.
Tool Settings for Point on Element:



6.3.4 Point at Intersection
The Point at Intersection tool is used to construct the Active Point at the intersection of two elements.
To construct an Active Point at an intersection
1. Select the Construct Active Point at Intersection tool.
2. Identify the first element close to the desired point of intersection.
3. Identify the second element.
4. Accept the construction.
Tool Settings for Point at Intersection:



6.3.5 Construct Points Along Element
The Construction Points Along Element tool is used to construct the Active Point a specified number of times
along an element between two data points. The distance along the element between each instance of the Active
Point is the same.
To construct Active Points along an element
1. Select the Construct Active Points Along Element tool.
2. Identify the element to define one end of the segment on which to construct Active Points.
3. Enter a data point to define the other end of the segment.
Tool Settings for Point(s) Along Element:


Points Sets how many Active Points are constructed.

6.3.6 Construct Active Points at Distance Along Element
The Construct Active Points at Distance Along Element tool is used to construct the Active Point on an element at
a keyed-in Distance from where the element is identified.
To construct the Active Point at a distance along an element
1. Select the Construct Active Point at Distance Along Element tool.
2. Identify the element at the point from which to measure the distance.
3. Enter a data point to define the direction in which to construct the Active Point.
Tool Settings for Point at Distance Along:


Sets the distance along the element from the point identified in step 2 at which the active
Distance
point is constructed.

6.4 Polygons Tool Box

While it is possible to create closed polygonal shapes using the Place line or Place SmartLine tools, it is often easier
to use the tools contained in the Polygons Tool Box. The Polygons Tool Box contains tools that facilitate the
creation of regular and irregular polygons.
Because polygons are closed objects, they can be filled in with a user selected color. For the fill color to be visible,
the Fill must be toggled on in the View Attributes dialog box like below:

To access the Polygon tools, select the Polygons tool box from the Task Navigation tool box using one of the
following methods shown below.
The Polygons Tool Box:
Place Block Used to place a block (rectangular shape).
Used to place a polygonal shape by entering a series of data

Place Shape
points to define the vertices.
Used to place a non-rectangular shape in which each segment is

Place Orthogonal Shape
either perpendicular or parallel to all other segments.
Used to place a regular polygon — a shape with 3- 4999 equal

Place Regular Polygon length sides and equal angles at each vertex. For example, a
square is a four-sided regular polygon.

6.4.1 Place Block
The Place Block tool is used to place a block (rectangular shape).
To place a rectangular shape
1. Select the Place Block tool.
2. Enter a data point to define one corner.
3. If Method is set to Rotated, enter a data point to define the orientation.
4. Enter a data point to define the corner that is diagonal from the first.
Tool Settings for Place Block:
Sets how the block's orientation is determined.

• Orthogonal — Block is orthogonal to the view in which the first data point is
Method
entered.
• Rotated — Orientation is defined with a data point (step 3).
Area Active Area — Solid or Hole.
Active Fill Type:

• None (no fill)
Fill Type
• Outlined (filled with Fill Color)
Sets the color and optional gradient with which the block is filled.
• If Fill Type is Opaque, the Active Color is the fill color.
Fill Color
• If Fill Type is Outlined, the fill color can be different from the Active Color, and the
Active Color becomes the outline color.

6.4.2 Place Shape
The Place Shape tool is used to place a polygonal shape by entering a series of data points to define the vertices.
To place a polygonal shape
1. Select the Place Shape tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the first vertex.
3. Continue entering data points to define the other vertices.
4. To close the shape, enter a data point at the location of the first vertex.
Or
Click the Close Element button.
Tools Settings for Place Shape:

Length If on, sets segment length, in working units.
(Active) Angle If on, constrains sides to the Active Angle, which can be keyed in.
Area Active Area: Solid or Hole.
Active Fill Type:
• None (no fill)
Fill Type
• Outlined (filled with Fill Color).
Sets the color and optional gradient with which the shape is filled.
Fill Color • If Fill Type is Opaque, the Active Color.
Close Element Closes a shape by connecting the first point with the last point.

6.4.3 Place Orthogonal Shape
The Place Orthogonal Shape tool is used to place a non-rectangular shape in which each segment is either
perpendicular or parallel to all other segments.
To place an orthogonal shape
1. Select the Place Orthogonal Shape tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the first vertex.
3. Enter a data point to define the orientation and second vertex.
4. Continue to enter data points to define the other vertices.
5. Close the shape by entering the last data point at the location of the first vertex.
Tool Settings for Place Orthogonal Shape:

Active Fill Type:
• None (no fill)
Fill Type
Sets the color and optional gradient with which the shape is filled.

6.4.4 Place Regular Polygon
The Place Regular Polygon tool is used to place a regular polygon — a shape with 3- 4999 equal length sides and
equal angles at each vertex. For example, a square is a four-sided regular polygon.
To place a regular polygon
1. Select the Place Regular Polygon tool.

2. In the tool settings window's Radius field, key-in a non-zero value.
3. Set Method to Inscribed or Circumscribed.
4. Enter a data point to define the center.
5. Enter a data point to define the orientation.
Tool Settings for Place Regular Polygon:

Sets how a polygon is positioned in the design.
• Inscribed — Polygon is inscribed in an imaginary circle. If the Radius is keyed in, one
vertex is placed at center's right.
Method
• Circumscribed — Polygon is circumscribed in an imaginary circle. If the Radius is
keyed in, the midpoint of one side is placed at center's right.
• By Edge — One edge is defined graphically.
Edges Sets the number of edges (3-4999).
If a non-zero value is keyed in, determines the inscribing or circumscribing circle's radius.
Radius
If zero, the radius is defined with a data point.
Active Fill Type — None (no fill), Opaque (filled with Active Color), or Outlined (filled with Fill
Fill Type
Color).
Sets the color and optional gradient with which the polygon is filled.

6.5 Circles Tool Box

The tools in the Circles task are used to place circles, ellipses, and arcs.
While a straight line is one of the most common geometry types, lines alone are not enough to fully describe
everyday geometric shapes. Arcs and Circles allow the user to create curved segments of geometry.
The Circle Tool Box has many important settings that can be changed in the Tool Settings dialog box. These
settings control the method of how arcs and circles are drawn.
To access these tools, select the Circles tool box from the Task Navigation tool box using one of the following
methods shown below.

The Circles Tool Box:
Place Circle Used to place a circle.
Place Ellipse Used to place an ellipse.
Used to place a circular arc. Arcs can be placed clockwise or

Place Arc
counterclockwise.
Place Half Ellipse Used to place an elliptical arc with a sweep angle of 180°.
Place Quarter Ellipse Used to place an elliptical arc with a sweep angle of 90°.
Used to modify the radius, sweep angle, and center of a

Modify Arc Radius
circular arc. The endpoints do not move.
Modify Arc Angle Used to extend or shorten the length (sweep angle) of an arc.
Modify Arc Axis Used to lengthen or shorten an axis of an arc.

6.5.1 Place Circle
The Place Circle tool is used to place a circle.
To place a circle by its center
1. Select the Place Circle tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Center.
4. If Diameter (or Radius) is off, enter a data point to define the radius.
To place a circle by defining three points on its circumference
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Edge.
3. Enter a data point on the circumference.
4. Enter a second data point on the circumference.
5. If Diameter (or Radius) is off, enter a third data point on the circumference.
To place a circle by its diameter
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Diameter.
3. Enter a data point to define one endpoint of a diameter.
4. Enter a second data point to define the other endpoint of the diameter

Tool Settings for Place Circle:

Sets the method by which the circle is placed.
Method • Center — position by center.

• Edge — position by three data points on the circumference.
• Diameter — position by diameter's endpoints.
Active Fill Type:

• None (no fill)
Fill Type
Sets the color and optional gradient with which the circle is filled.
Fill Color
• If Fill Type is Opaque, the Active Color.
If on, sets the diameter, in working units (if Method is set to Center or Edge). To instead set
Diameter
the radius, choose Radius from the adjacent option menu.

6.5.2 Place Ellipse
The Place Ellipse tool is used to place an ellipse.
To place an ellipse by center and edge
1. Select the Place Ellipse tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Center.

If Primary, Secondary, and Rotation are on, the ellipse is placed.
4. If necessary, enter a data point.
5. If necessary, enter a third data point.

If Secondary is off, it defines the secondary axis radius.
To place an ellipse by edge points
1. Select the Place Ellipse tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Edge.
3. Enter a data point to define one end of the primary axis.

If Primary, Secondary, and Rotation are on, the ellipse is placed.
4. If necessary, enter a second data point to define another point on the ellipse.
If either combination of constraints is on, the ellipse is placed:
Primary or Secondary, and Rotation
Primary and Secondary
If the pointer is moved to a point that cannot be on an ellipse that includes the points defined in steps 3
or 4, the dynamics disappear.
5. If necessary, enter a third data point to define the other end of the primary axis.

Tool Settings for Place Ellipse:

Sets the method by which the ellipse is placed.
Method
• Center — position by the center and one end of the primary axis.
• Edge — position by both ends of the primary axis.
If on, sets the primary axis radius.

Primary
If both Primary and Secondary are on, the primary and secondary axes are parallel to the view
x- and y-axes, respectively.
Secondary If on, sets the secondary axis radius.
Rotation If on, sets the rotation of the primary axis relative to the view x-axis.
Area Sets Active Area — Solid or Hole.

Active Fill Type:
• None (no fill)
Fill Type
• Opaque (filled with Active Color )
Sets the color and optional gradient with which the ellipse is filled.
Fill Color
• If Fill Type is Opaque, the fill color is the Active Color.

6.5.3 Place Arc
The Place Arc tool is used to place a circular arc. Arcs can be placed clockwise or counterclockwise.
To place an arc by its center
1. Select the Place Arc tool.
2. Set Method to Center.
3. Enter a data point to define the arc's beginning, from which the arc extends.
Or
If Radius, Start Angle, and Sweep Angle are all on, enter a data point to define the arc's center and place
the arc.
4. If necessary, enter a data point.

If Radius and Start Angle are on, this data point defines the arc's sweep angle and places the arc.
If Sweep Angle is on, this data point defines the arc's center and places the arc.
Otherwise, this data point defines the arc's center.
5. If necessary, enter a data point to define the arc's sweep angle and place the arc.
To place an unconstrained arc by three points
1. Select the Place Arc tool.
2. Set Method to Start, Mid, End.
3. With no constraints on, enter a data point to define the arc's beginning.
4. Enter a second data point to define a point on the arc.
5. Enter a third data point to define the endpoint and sweep angle.

Tool Settings for Place Arc:
Option menu that sets the method to be used for constructing the arc:
• Start, Center — Arc is constructed by placing its start point, center point, then
sweep angle and direction.
• Center, Start — Arc is constructed by placing its center point, start point, then
Method
sweep angle and direction.
• Start, Mid, End — Arc is constructed by placing three points defining its start
point, a second point on the arc, and its end point.
• Start, End, Mid — Arc is constructed by placing three points defining its start
point, end point, and a third point on the arc.
Radius If on, sets the radius.
Length If on, sets the length of the arc.
If on, sets the angle between the view's x-axis and an imaginary line between the start of
Start Angle
the arc, and its center.
Sweep Angle If on, sets the arc's sweep angle.
If off, you can define the direction of the arc interactively with the pointer.
If on, the direction of the arc is controlled by the option menu.

Direction
• CW — The arc is constrained to a clockwise direction.
• CCW — The arc is constrained to a counter-clockwise direction.

6.5.4 Place Half Ellipse
The Place Half Ellipse tool is used to place an elliptical arc with a sweep angle of 180°.
To place a half ellipse
1. Select the Place Half Ellipse tool.
2. Enter a data point to define one end of the primary axis.
3. Enter a second data point at a point on the ellipse.
4. Enter a third data point to define the other end of the primary axis.
6.5.5 Place Quarter Ellipse
The Place Quarter Ellipse tool is used to place an elliptical arc with a sweep angle of 90°.
To place a quarter ellipse
1. Select the Place Quarter Ellipse tool.
2. Enter a data point to define one endpoint.
3. Enter a second data point to define the orientation of an axis.
4. Enter a third data point to define the other endpoint.

6.5.6 Modify Arc Radius
The Modify Arc Radius tool is used to modify the radius, sweep angle, and center of a circular arc. The endpoints
do not move.
To modify an arc's radius
1. Select the Modify Arc Radius tool.
2. Identify the arc.
3. Enter a data point to redefine the radius, sweep angle, and center.
To modify an arc’s radius without changing the center or sweep angle
1. Select the Element Selection tool.
2. Select the arc.
3. Drag the midpoint handle to define the new radius.
 To modify an arc's radius with greater precision, use the Modify Element tool in conjunction with
AccuDraw.

6.5.7 Modify Arc Angle
The Modify Arc Angle tool is used to extend or shorten the length (sweep angle) of an arc.
To modify an arc's sweep angle
1. Select the Modify Arc Angle tool.
2. Identify the arc close to the end to modify.
3. Enter a data point to lengthen or shorten the arc.
Alternative Method - To modify an arc's sweep angle
2. Select the arc.
3. Drag the endpoint handle(s) to lengthen or shorten the arc.
 To modify a sweep angle with greater precision, use the Modify Element tool in conjunction with
AccuDraw.
6.5.8 Modify Arc Axis
The Modify Arc Axis tool is used to lengthen or shorten an axis of an arc.
To modify an arc's axis
1. Select the Modify Arc Axis tool.
2. Identify the arc near the axis to modify.
3. Enter a data point to redefine the axis.

6.6 Delete Element Tool

Up to this point, all of the tools that have been covered are geometry creation tools. Deleting geometry is also
very important. The Delete Element tool is one of the most used tools used to delete an element(s) from the
design. The Delete Element tool is located in the Main Tool Box as shown below.
The Delete Element tool is used to delete element(s) from the design.
To delete an element
1. Select the Delete Element tool.
2. Identify the element to be deleted.
3. Accept the deletion.
Alternative Method - To delete an element
1. Select the element(s) to be deleted.
2. Select the Delete Element tool.

or
Press the <Delete> key.
Tool Settings – None
 Choosing Delete from the Reset pop-up menu selects the Delete Element tool. When the tool is
selected in this manner, all selected elements are deleted.
 The Element Selection Tool can be used to select a group of objects to be deleted before using the
Delete Element Tool.
 The Delete Fence Contents tool in the Fence Toolbox can be used to delete a group of elements.
 To un-delete an element(s), choose Undo (action) from the Edit menu.

6.7 Undo and Redo Functions

No matter how careful the user is, errors occur when creating a design. MicroStation stores commands in an undo
buffer that goes back a single step or multiple steps when a mistake is made. Redo is the opposite of Undo. The
Undo and Redo tools are located on the Standard tool box like shown below.
Undo Negates the last drawing operation.
Redo Negates the last Undo operation.
There is no limit to the number of Undo’s that can be performed.
 The undo buffer is cleared when a design file is compressed, so after compressing, the user will no
longer be able to undo any previous operations.
More advanced Undo functions can be accessed through the Edit pull-down menu on the Main Menu Bar as
shown below.
Sets a mark in the undo buffer back to which

Set Mark
subsequent drawing operations can be undone.
Negates drawing operations performed after a

Undo Other > To Mark
mark was set
Opens an alert box that lets the user negate all of

Undo Other > To All the drawing operations recorded in the Undo
buffer.

Table of Contents:
7.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................... 3
7.2 USING LOCKS .................................................................................................................. 3
7.2.1 LOCKS POP-UP MENU ..................................................................................................... 3
7.2.2 LOCKS DIALOG BOX ........................................................................................................ 4
7.2.3 LOCKS TOGGLES DIALOG .................................................................................................. 4
7.2.4 LOCK FUNCTIONS: .......................................................................................................... 5
7.2.4.1 Snap Lock ..................................................................................................................................................6
7.3 ACCUSNAP .................................................................................................................... 10

7.3.1 ACCUSNAP SETTINGS DIALOG BOX ................................................................................... 10
7.4. MICROSTATION’S COORDINATE SYSTEM ...................................................................... 14
7.5 DATA ENTRY FORMATS ................................................................................................. 15
7.6 PRECISION PLACEMENT KEY-INS .................................................................................... 15
7.7 ACCUDRAW .................................................................................................................. 16
7.7.1 ACCUDRAW COMPASS .................................................................................................. 17
7.7.1.1 The origin point .......................................................................................................................................18
7.7.1.2 The Frame (Drawing Plane Indicator) .....................................................................................................18
7.7.1.3 The X/Y Axes............................................................................................................................................19
7.7.2 ACCUDRAW WINDOW .................................................................................................. 19
7.7.3 USING ACCUDRAW....................................................................................................... 20
7.7.3.1 AccuDraw’s Shortcut Key-ins ..................................................................................................................22
7.7.3.2 AccuDraw’s Popup Calculator .................................................................................................................23
7.7.4 ACCUDRAW SETTINGS ................................................................................................... 23
7.7.4.1 AccuDraw Settings Operation Tab ..........................................................................................................24
7.7.4.2 AccuDraw Settings Display Tab:..............................................................................................................25
7.7.4.3 AccuDraw Settings Coordinates Tab: ......................................................................................................26


7.1 Introduction
The tools discussed in this chapter are used in conjunction with drawing tools to create drawings with greater
precision. These tools control accurate placement of elements by locking or constraining various settings.
7.2 Using Locks

The first sets of tools that are covered are the locks. Locks are settings that let you control the actions of various
tools to help you produce drawings more effectively.
There are several ways to access the Lock toggles or the Locks dialog box:
1. The Locks Pop-up menu

2. The Locks Dialog
3. The Lock Toggles Dialog
7.2.1 Locks Pop-Up Menu
To access the Locks Pop-Up Menu, click the lock icon on the lower right of the MicroStation Status Bar. This
provides a temporary menu to turn on/off various locks. Clicking the desired lock places a checkmark beside the
name indicating that it has been activated. To deactivate the lock, click the name a second time to remove the
checkmark.

7.2.2 Locks Dialog Box
To specify settings for a specific lock, the Locks Dialog Box needs to be activated. This can be accessed from the
same Lock Pop-Up Menu by selecting Full or selecting Settings > Locks > Full from the Main Menu Bar. This
invokes the Locks Dialog Box, which contains several options to control how the locks behave.
7.2.3 Locks Toggles Dialog
The Locks Toggles dialog box is a floating toggle dialog that can be invoked, allowing easy access to the on/off
operation of various locks. This may be beneficial when constantly switching back and forth between multiple lock
settings. This can be accessed from the same Lock Pop-Up Menu by selecting Toggles or selecting Settings > Locks
> Toggles from the Main Menu Bar.

7.2.4 Lock Functions:
Each lock performs a different function by controlling or constraining some portion of MicroStation. A description
of each lock is shown below.
(3D only) If on, each data point is forced to lie on the Active ACS's xy plane (z=0). The
ACS Plane Active ACS is set in the Auxiliary Coordinates dialog box, which is opened by selecting
Utilities > Auxiliary Coordinates.
If on, each data point and tentative points are forced to fall precisely on a point on
the grid. The grid consists of evenly-spaced points in the design plane. It is a visual
measurement and alignment aid at certain magnifications. To make a grid visible it
also necessary to turn the Grid on in the View Attributes dialog box. This makes the
grid visible only in the particular view that it is activated in.
Grid Lock
Grid Lock, along with Master/Grid and Configuration, can also be set in the Grid
category in the Design File Settings dialog (Settings > Design File). The Grid settings
are defined in the Design File Settings dialog box and should not be changed by the
user since this is an ODOT Setting.
When on, only elements on the Active Level can be selected; elements not on the
Level Lock
Active Level cannot be manipulated.
When on, the annotation scale is applied to any text, dimensions, and annotation
cells that are placed in the model. The Annotation Scale is set through the Model
Annotation Scale
Properties dialog box. For more detailed information on Annotation Scale see
Chapter 4 Models.
When on, any manipulation performed on one member of a graphic group is
automatically performed on all members. If off, the member elements of a graphic
Graphic Group Lock
group can be manipulated individually. For more detailed information on graphic
groups see Chapter 9 Selecting and Grouping Elements.
When on, newly placed text is attached to empty text nodes, and text cannot be
Text Node Lock
placed if there aren’t any empty text nodes.
Sets how the fence contents are determined for element manipulations. Fence
Fence Mode (Selection) Mode is also a tool setting for the fence placement tools in the Fence
toolbox.
The Snap section contains the controls that are used to determine how tentative
Snap points snap to elements. (For more detailed information see section 7.2.4.1 Snap
Lock.)
The Axis Lock limits the placement of elements to predefined axes. The Start Angle
Axis
and angle Increment between the axes can be adjusted as needed.
The Unit lock causes the cursor to snap to a user-specified interval. This feature can
be used in conjunction with the grid or independently. If enabled, each data point is
Unit forced to lie at coordinates that are multiples in each dimension of the (Unit)
Distance. Unit Lock works with the imaginary unit grid in the same manner Grid Lock
works with the real grid.
Isometric section contains controls for 3D only that determine how data points relate
Isometric
to the Isometric Plane.

7.2.4.1 Snap Lock
During a drawing session, many design tasks revolve around joining new elements to existing elements in the
design or modifying existing elements. In manual drafting, this is done by eye. With MicroStation, users can work
precisely, letting the system find the exact location of elements, or various points on elements. Points can be
defined relative to other points as well. All this is done using tentative snap points.
To be able to use tentative snap point, Snap Lock must be activated in the
Locks dialog box as shown right.
• Snap Lock - When Snap Lock is on, how a tentative point snaps to
an element is set by the active Snap Mode (or the override setting
if one is active). The default Snap Mode can be set via the Locks
dialog box or the Snap Mode button bar or the Snap Pop-Up Menu.
The Snap Mode (or Snap Mode override) is indicated in the Status
Bar.
• Snap Mode - Sets the manner in which tentative points can be

snapped to elements or used to constrain elements.

You can change the default Snap mode by selecting the pull down
menu in the Locks dialog box or you can select the Active Snap Mode
icon on the Status Bar shown right, hold down the <Shift> key and
then click the desired snap mode in the Pop-Up Menu. This cancels
the original snap mode and the one selected now becomes the active
snap mode. A solid dot indicates the default snap mode in the pop-
up menu.
To override the snap mode setting for one operation, single click on the desired snap from the Pop-Up
Menu or the Snap Mode Button Bar.
To access the Snap Mode button bar, select Settings > Snaps > Button Bar from the Main Menu Bar or
select the Snap Pop-Up Menu and select Button Bar.
In the Snap Mode Button Bar you can double-click a snap to make it the active snap mode. The
highlighted background indicates the current active snap mode.
 You can also hold the <Shift> key to make it the active snap mode.
The button bar, like other MicroStation tool boxes, does not show all available options. To access hidden
icons, Right-click while the cursor is over one of the buttons. A pop-up menu appears with checkmarks
next to the visible icons. Click next to tools to toggle their status.

Effects of Snap Modes:
With Snap Lock on, each snap mode setting has an effect on tentative snap points. Below is a description of snap
modes and their effects.
Snap Modes: Description:
Nearest Snaps to a point on the element nearest to the pointer.
Snaps to the nearest of the element’s keypoints (endpoint, midpoint and

Keypoint
radius). This is the most generally useful of the snap modes.
Midpoint Snaps to the midpoint of the segment of the element closest to the pointer.
Snaps to the center of elements (such as circles, arcs, text, etc.) with centers
Center and the centroid of other elements, including shapes, line strings, and B-
splines.
Snaps to the origin of a cell or text, centroid of a B-spline, first data point of
Origin a dimension element, or the first vertex of a line, multi-line, line string, or
shape.
Snaps to the midpoint of an entire line string, multi-line, or complex chain,
Bisector rather than to the midpoint of the closest segment. It also snaps to the
midpoint of a line or arc.
Snaps to the intersection of two elements. A minimum of two tentative

points are required when AccuSnap is not enabled, although more can be
used. The first tentative point snaps to one element, and that element is
Intersection
highlighted. The second tentative point snaps to another element. The two
segments from the two elements used to find the intersection displayed as
dashed lines.
The edge of the element being placed is constrained to be tangent to an

Tangent existing element. The tentative point dynamically slides along the element
to maintain the tangency as the pointer moves to finish placing the element.
The edge of the element being placing is constrained to be tangent to the

Tangent From existing element at the tentative point. The tentative point does not move
dynamically as the pointer moves, but is locked in place.
The line being placed is constrained to be perpendicular to the element.
The tentative point slides dynamically along the element in order to
Perpendicular
maintain the perpendicularity as the pointer moves to finish placing the
element.
The line being placed is constrained to be perpendicular to the element at
Perpendicular
the tentative point. The tentative point does not move dynamically as the
From
pointer moves, but is locked in place.

Does not define a point through which the line being placed passes.
Parallel Instead, when the tentative point is accepted, the line placed is parallel to
the line to which the tentative point was snapped.
Through Point Defines a point through which the element being placed must pass.
Snaps to the nearest element, as follows:

When entering second or later data point, constrains the next data point to
lie on it (if it is a closed element) or anywhere on the line on which it lies (if
Point On
it is a linear element). When entering the first data point, constrains the
element being placed to extend to that element (or the line on which it lies)
from the second data point
MultiSnap1 Multi-snap mode 1 by default is Intersection, Keypoint, Nearest.
MultiSnap2 Multi-snap mode 2 by default is Intersection, Keypoint, and Center.
MultiSnap 3 Multi-snap mode 3 by default is Midpoint, Intersection, and Center.
 MultiSnaps are used to set up groups of snaps.

• Snap Divisor
Defines the number of keypoints that you can snap to on a line, line string segments, or curve segment.
Snap Divisor Keypoints can snap to:

1 Endpoints of a line or segment.
2 (or any even value) Endpoints and midpoint of a line or segment.
• Association Lock
When on, an association point is created each time an element is snapped to with one of the following:
Dimensioning tools
Place Multi-line
Place Active Cell (with the Use Shared Cells on)
• ACS Plane
3D only.

7.3 AccuSnap
AccuSnap automates the tentative snap process, virtually eliminating the need to press the tentative snap button,
thus reducing the number of “button presses” required during an editing session. It provides graphical assistance,
a “smart” pointer, for snapping to elements. You simply move the screen pointer to the region of the element that
you want to identify and AccuSnap snaps to it automatically.
When AccuSnap is enabled, the user selects a tool and moves the pointer over the elements, letting AccuSnap find
and display the nearest tentative snap point. When the correct snap point is displayed, enter a data point to
accept. Various settings can be adjusted to configure AccuSnap.
AccuSnap can be toggled on or off by clicking the Toggle AccuSnap button on the Snap Mode button bar located at
the far left shown below.
 Pressing the [Ctrl] + [Shift] keys temporarily toggles AccuSnap on or off. Releasing the [Ctrl] + [Shift] keys
returns AccuSnap to its previous setting.
7.3.1 AccuSnap Settings Dialog Box
The AccuSnap Settings dialog box contains a series of controls that affect the
behavior of AccuSnap. Controls in this dialog box are grouped into three tabbed
sections; General, Elements, and Feel.
To access the AccuSnap settings dialog box click on the AccuSnap option from
the Active Snap Mode Pop-Up Menu on the Status Bar shown at right.

AccuSnap Settings General Tab:
Enable AccuSnap If on (default), AccuSnap is automatically enabled when you start MicroStation.
If on (default) and the pointer is within the range of the Snap Tolerance, AccuSnap
Show Tentative Hint
displays the nearest snap point with a cross-hair.
If on (default), AccuSnap displays the icon of the current snap mode at the snap
Display Snap Icon
point.
If on, the coordinate readout in the status bar updates for each tentative snap
Update Statusbar point. That is, each time that AccuSnap snaps to a point on an element, or when
Coordinates you press the tentative point button, the coordinates for the snap point appear in
the status bar.
Play Sound on Snap If on, a sound is played when you snap to an element.
If on, AccuSnap highlights the active element as soon as the pointer is within the
range of the Snap Tolerance.
Hilite active element
If off, AccuSnap highlights the active element only when a tentative snap point is
displayed.
Identify Elements
If on, elements are identified automatically, as you pass the pointer over them.
Automatically
Enable For Fence Create If on, AccuSnap is active when placing a fence.

If on, and you pause or hover the pointer over a highlighted element, a pop-up
displays information about the element. An option menu lets you define when this
information appears.
Pop-up Info • Automatic - Pop-up information appears whenever you pause or hover the
pointer over a highlighted element.
• Tentative - Pop-up information appears only when you manually snap a
tentative point to an element and then hold the pointer over any part of the
highlighted element.
AccuSnap Settings Elements Tab:
If on, AccuSnap can snap to B-spline curves. If off, AccuSnap ignores B-spline
Curves
curves.
If on, AccuSnap can snap to dimension elements. If off, AccuSnap ignores

Dimensions
dimension elements.
Text If on, AccuSnap can snap to text. If off, AccuSnap ignores text elements.
Meshes If on, AccuSnap can snap to mesh elements.
Find Elements By:

Interior of Filled If on, AccuSnap can snap to the interior area of filled elements.
Elements
If on, the order in which AccuSnap snaps to overlapping elements is determined by
Sort Hits By: Element
their class — Primary elements first, followed, in order, by Construction, Pattern,
Class
and Dimension elements.

AccuSnap Settings Feel Tab:
Allows the user to adjust how close the screen pointer must be to a snap point
KeyPoint Sensitiviy
before AccuSnap snaps to it.
Lets the user adjust the sensitivity of AccuSnap to the current element. When
snapping to an element, as long as the pointer moves along that element, the snap
Stickiness
system will have a preference for that element over other elements that may have
snap points closer to the cursor.
Lets the user adjust how close the pointer must be to an element in order to snap a
Snap Tolerance
tentative point to it.

7.4. MicroStation’s Coordinate System

Although the earth is nearly spherical in shape, humans and computer programs such as MicroStation prefer to
work in a two or three dimensional Cartesian coordinate system. A cartographic projection is required to convert
spatial data coordinates, which are latitude and longitude, to a Cartesian coordinate system.
The design plane is simply a Cartesian coordinate system upon which your design model lies. Elements in the
design file are drawn by placing data points. Each data point placed in the design plane has associated X (easting),
Y (northing) and Z (elevation, 3D files only) positions or coordinates.
In the ODOT Seed files, the point called the Global Origin is set to the design plane's exact center (178,956.9707,
178,956.9707) and assigned the coordinates 0,0 (2D files) and 0,0,0 (3D files). The Global Origin is defined in
ODOT’s Seed Files and should never be changed for ODOT projects.
To this point, all geometry has been created by choosing points on the screen. Points for geometry can also be
created by entering values in the Key-in window.
 The Global Origin is not a DGN File Setting, but is set already in the ODOT Seed files.

7.5 Data Entry Formats

The working units that ODOT files use are Survey Feet and Inches. When entering data for point placement, the
default units are assumed to be Survey Feet. Below is a list of ways to enter information.
Data Entry:
10 Feet, 6 Inches 10:6 or 10.5
6 Inches :6 or .5
12 Feet 12
7.6 Precision Placement Key-ins

To place points using coordinates, the user must use the key-ins that relates to point placement.
• XY= Absolute Coordinate Key-in

This allows the user to enter x and y values for point placement based off the global origin.
1. Open the Key-in window by selecting Utilities > Key-in from the Main Menu Bar.
2. In the Key-in window, type xy=0, 0 (or desired coordinates). The coordinates must be entered in
Easting, Northing format.
3. Hit the enter key to accept the coordinates.
• DL= (Delta X/Y) Relative Coordinate Key-in

This allows the user to enter x and y values for point placement based off of the last point chosen.
2. In the key in window, type dl=2, 3 (or the desired coordinates).
• DI= (Distance and Angle) Relative Coordinate Key-in

This allows the user to enter a distance and angle for the next point based off of the last point chosen.
2. In the key in window, type dl=1, 45 (or the desired distance and angle).

7.7 AccuDraw
AccuDraw is a drafting aid that evaluates such parameters as your current pointer location, the previously entered
data point, the last coordinate entered, the current tool's needs, and any commands the user has entered via
shortcut key-ins or AccuDraw options. AccuDraw then generates the appropriate precision coordinates and
applies them to the active tool.
Because of its versatility, the AccuDraw function reduces the need to rely on other drawing assist tools such as
grids or locks. Once AccuDraw has been mastered, nearly all drawing and editing techniques can be performed
faster using it that any other drawing aid.
To turn AccuDraw on or off, select the Primary tools tool box and select the Toggle AccuDraw tool as shown
below.
AccuDraw has two main areas; the AccuDraw Compass and the AccuDraw Window. The AccuDraw Compass gives
visual feedback as elements are added or modified. The AccuDraw Window is used to enter precision key-ins.
 AccuDraw is activated automatically each time MicroStation is restarted, by default.

7.7.1 AccuDraw Compass
AccuDraw's most recognizable feature is its compass. Visible only when AccuDraw is active and has control of
MicroStation's coordinate input, the compass acts as both a status indicator and a focus for input. Normally, the
AccuDraw compass does not appear until you enter the first data point after selecting a tool.
AccuDraw compasses. Left: Rectangular coordinate system, Right: Polar coordinate system.
• Rectangular coordinate system - is used for specifying distances along the drawing plane axes.
AccuDraw's frame appears as a square indicator.
• Polar coordinate system - is used for specifying distances and angles relative to the origin. AccuDraw's
frame appears as a circular indicator.
To switch between the Rectangular and Polar coordinate systems, with the focus in the AccuDraw window press
the Space Bar on the keyboard.
When AccuDraw has focus, its compass has a transparent blue background. When it does not have focus, the
compass appears grey.
AccuDraw's compass with focus (left) and when it does not have focus (right).

7.7.1.1 The origin point
At the center of the compass is AccuDraw's origin point. This is the focal point of all AccuDraw operations. As the
user selects various AccuDraw options, their functions operate from this origin point.
This last point is important. All AccuDraw commands (distance key-ins, shortcut key-ins, and so on) operate in
conjunction with the compass. In most cases, the compass is located at the last entered data point. In addition,
there are AccuDraw directives that allow you to move the compass to entirely different locations without
generating a new data point.
7.7.1.2 The Frame (Drawing Plane Indicator)
Surrounding the origin point is the frame, or drawing plane indicator. When the frame appears as a rectangle, the
rectangular coordinate system (X, Y) is in effect. When the frame appears as a circle then the polar coordinate
system (Distance, Angle) is active. By default, the frame's color is gray but you can change this in the Display tab of
the AccuDraw Settings dialog box.
The primary purpose of the drawing plane indicator is to show the current orientation of AccuDraw's drawing
plane and the current coordinate system in effect.

7.7.1.3 The X/Y Axes
The final parts of the AccuDraw compass are the two axes. Oriented at right angles to one another, these axes
represent the drawing plane X and Y axes.
To differentiate between the two axes, each is color coded. By default, the positive or +X-axis is displayed in red
while the positive or +Y-axis is green in color but you can change this in the Display tab of the AccuDraw Settings
dialog box.
7.7.2 AccuDraw Window
AccuDraw has its own window, named AccuDraw, which contains the data entry fields and axis lock buttons for the
currently active coordinate system.
AccuDraw Window. Left: Rectangular coordinate system, Right: Polar coordinate system.
The AccuDraw window is docked at the bottom edge of the MicroStation application window. However, it can be
moved as a floating window in MicroStation like shown above.
AccuDraw window docked along the bottom edge of the application window.
 The fields found in the AccuDraw window change depending on whether you are in polar or
rectangular mode and whether you are in a 2D or 3D DGN file.

7.7.3 Using AccuDraw
Generally, the AccuDraw compass does not appear until you enter the first data point after selecting a tool.
AccuDraw's behavior changes slightly with the drawing tools themselves. Most of the time, a combination of
mouse movements and keyboard entry is required to place elements with AccuDraw. AccuDraw employs the
same general procedure:
1. Select the desired tool.

2. Enter a data point to activate dynamics and set the location of the drawing plane origin.
3. Optional, rotate the drawing plane axes.
4. Optional, set the type of drawing plane coordinate system.
5. Preview and constrain the next data point.
6. Enter the data point.
Typically, you will use a mix of AccuDraw options throughout the design process. The key to working with
AccuDraw is understanding how it interacts with the active tool and the current data point. As you learn to use
AccuDraw you will find that it can be used as a substitute for many individual tool settings.
 Sometimes AccuDraw will not activate or display when it conflicts with other tools.
How AccuDraw reacts to pointer movement
When active, AccuDraw reacts to pointer movement by trying to anticipate your intent.
As you move the pointer, the fields in the AccuDraw window automatically update to reflect the drawing plane
coordinates of the current pointer location (expressed as either relative x and y offsets, or as a distance and an
angle) with respect to the location of the AccuDraw compass.
Furthermore, the AccuDraw window's input focus automatically adjusts, based on the general direction of the
pointer movement. As you move the pointer in the same direction as either drawing plane axis the focus moves to
the field that you would use to precisely locate the data point along that axis.
To Index the Compass Axes

When entering a data point and you move the pointer around the drawing plane indicator a dynamic line appears
around the drawing plane indicator. When you move the pointer near one of the X and Y Axes indicators,
AccuDraw senses the axis and the dynamic line will snap to the axis and highlight like below.

While the axis is highlighted you can key in a number for the horizontal or vertical distance. Don't worry about
telling AccuDraw the direction, it has already figured that out and also has placed the input focus (where the key-in
data will appear) in the correct X or Y field of the Accudraw Window.
Remember that you can use AccuSnap in conjunction with AccuDraw. This speeds up the process of snapping
tentative points.
Previous distance recall

Another example of how AccuDraw tries to help you is its previous distance feature. As you place elements in your
model, AccuDraw keeps track of the distance between your last two data points. Known as the Previous Distance,
AccuDraw uses this distance as a hint for your next data point.
AccuDraw displays a small tangent line, as shown below, called the previous distance indicator, and locks the
pointer to this point. Just continue dragging the pointer until it is outside the Tolerance and the previous distance
lock disengages.
Recalling previous values

AccuDraw stores all entered values for its X, Y, Distance, and Angle fields for recall as needed. When in the X, Y,
Distance, or Angle fields, pressing the <PgUp> key recalls the last distance or angle value entered in any of these
fields. Pressing <PgUp> again recalls the next to last entered value and so on.
 It is not necessary to delete existing information in the AccuDraw Window to input new information.
 When entering the values for the Polar coordinate system to change from one input field to another,
press the [Tab] key or the up and down arrow keys.
 The AccuDraw Compass will rotate itself automatically when the pointer is moved to an angle. To
return the Compass to base rotation, type on the keyboard or type <V> to return the compass to
the view rotation.
 The easiest way to use AccuDraw is to move the pointer in the desired direction, type the desired
distance, and then data point.

7.7.3.1 AccuDraw’s Shortcut Key-ins
Although AccuDraw tries to anticipate your next move it cannot always predict your intentions. AccuDraw
therefore includes a wide variety of single and double character command directives known as the shortcut key-
ins. By pressing the appropriate key, you can direct AccuDraw to perform a specific task.
Pop-ups confirm single letter shortcuts below the focused input field as shown below. This function is not only
useful to confirm the key-in, but also it serves to communicate that the shortcut is received via AccuDraw's input
fields.
 The AccuDraw window must have focus for the Key-in to be recognized.
The following is a list of the more common shortcut key-ins:
Key Effect
<?> Opens the AccuDraw Shortcuts window.
Smart Lock locks the axis that is currently has AccuDraw’s focus. It is activated by pressing the
<Enter> key on the keyboard. Pressing the <Enter> key again deactivates Smart Lock and
releases the dynamic line back to free motion.
<Enter> • If the pointer is oriented closer to the X axis of the compass, the pointer will lock to
the X axis.
• If the pointer is oriented closer to the Y axis of the compass, the pointer will lock to
the Y axis.
<spacebar> Switches between Rectangular and Polar coordinates.
Moves the drawing plane origin to the current pointer position. This can also be used to
explicitly activate AccuDraw before you enter a data point.
To relocate the compass origin point:
1. Snap to the desired location using either AccuSnap or the tentative button, but DO
<O>
NOT accept the point.
2. Press the [O] key on the keyboard. The compass with move to the pointer location.
3. Move the pointer in the desired direction and enter the desired offset.
4. Accept the direction and distance by clicking the Data point button.
<X> Toggles the lock status for the X value.
<Y> Toggles the lock status for the Y value.
<D> Toggles the lock status for the Distance value.
<A> Toggles the lock status for the Angle value.

7.7.3.2 AccuDraw’s Popup Calculator
With AccuDraw’s Pop-up Calculator, you can perform mathematical operations on the values displayed in some
MicroStation text fields and the values adjust accordingly. It is often useful to enter not only a distance, but also
the total length of many distances, or perhaps a distance minus a certain amount.
The calculator performs standard mathematical functions, such as addition, subtraction, multiplication and
division.
To use the pop-up calculator
1. With the input focus in a field that supports pop-up calculation, type any of the following:
+, -, *, /, =
2. Type a value or expression to complete the calculation.

Press <Enter>, enter a data point, or click outside the pop-up calculator to accept the calculated value.
Press <Esc> if you want to reject the value.
7.7.4 AccuDraw Settings
AccuDraw is a powerful drawing construction tool, and it has a many associated settings. Most of these settings
are contained in the AccuDraw Settings dialog. The AccuDraw Settings dialog contains three tabs to group the
settings in an intelligent way.
To open the Accudraw Settings Dialog Box select Settings > AccuDraw from the Main Menu Bar or with the focus
in the AccuDraw Window, press <G>, <S>.

7.7.4.1 AccuDraw Settings Operation Tab
The AccuDraw Settings Operation tab contains controls that are used to select preferences for operation and alter
aspects of the way AccuDraw performs.
Auto Load If on (the default), AccuDraw starts up automatically when MicroStation is started.
Floating Origin If on (the default), the origin moves to the last point placed.
If on (the default), enables tools to provide “hints” to AccuDraw to override its
default behavior for smoother operation. This may include setting custom
Context Sensitivity
“Context” rotations, setting the origin, locking values, or setting the coordinate
system type.
If on (the default), AccuDraw interprets a number as positive or negative, depending
Smart Key-ins
on the direction of the pointer from the compass.
If on, places data points automatically when they have been fully constrained (if you
Auto Point Placement have locked both the X and Y values, or if you have locked one or the other while the
pointer is indexed to zero). The default is off.
If on, when the users locks the Z axis, it will remain locked through consecutive
Sticky Z Lock
operations. Normally, locks are cleared when you enter a data point.
If on, when the user activates AccuDraw, the compass displays prior placing a data
Always Show Compass
point for the current operation.
(Polar coordinates only) If on, the <A> and <D> AccuDraw shortcuts set focus to the
Auto Focus Fields
selected field and lock the current value.
Lets the user choose the default origin. When a tool starts AccuDraw and there is no
origin currently defined, then this setting specifies the default location of the
AccuDraw drawing plane origin.
• View Center on active Z — Sets AccuDraw's origin to the center of the
Default Origin
view, at the Active Z depth of the view.
• Global origin — Sets AccuDraw's origin to the Global Origin of the file.
• Global origin on active Z — Sets AccuDraw's origin to the Global Origin
(X,Y) at the Active Z depth of the view.

7.7.4.2 AccuDraw Settings Display Tab:
The AccuDraw Settings Display tab contains controls that control various display features of AccuDraw.
Allows the user to change the color for the positive X axis indicator on the AccuDraw
X Axis
compass.
Allows the user to change the color for the positive Y axis indicator on the
Y Axis
AccuDraw compass.
Allows the user to change the color for the negative X and Y axis indicators on the
Hilite
AccuDraw compass.
Frame Allows the user to change the color for the AccuDraw compass frame.
Fill Sets the fill color of the inside of the AccuDraw compass.
Sets the width of the AccuDraw window.

Small — 100 pixels.
Dialog Size
Medium — 126 pixels.
Large — 152 pixels.
If on, X/Y coordinates are updated in the AccuDraw window when the screen
Delayed Update pointer comes to a rest. If off (default), coordinates are updated in the AccuDraw
window continuously.
If on, a coordinate display at the pointer shows the increments in the x, y, and z (for
Display Coordinates
3D) directions from the previous data point.
If on (default), AccuDraw displays negative angles (that is, +/-180°). If off, AccuDraw
Show Negative Angles
displays angles as 0° to 360°.
Pop-up Confirmation If on (default), AccuDraw displays shortcut popups.
Shortcut Key-ins Opens the AccuDraw Shortcuts menu that lists the AccuDraw shortcut keys.

7.7.4.3 AccuDraw Settings Coordinates Tab:
The AccuDraw Settings Coordinates tab contains controls that are used to rotate AccuDraw’s drawing plane and to
set AccuDraw’s Coordinate System.
Contains controls that are used to rotate AccuDraw's drawing plane and to set
Coordinate System
AccuDraw's Coordinate System.
Contains controls that are used to set the roundoff value for distances and angles
Unit Roundoff
relative to the drawing plane origin.
If on, indexing is activated for AccuDraw's drawing plane X and Y axes. The distance
Indexing – Axis required to move the pointer from the indexed axis is controlled by the Tolerance
setting.
If on, sets the minimum distance that the pointer must move from the AccuDraw
Indexing - Distance origin in order to place a new data point. The minimum distance is controlled by the
Tolerance setting.
Sets the minimum distance, in screen pixels, used by the Axis and Distance settings.
Tolerance
Allowable values are 1–99.

Table of Contents:
8.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................... 3
8.2 MANIPULATE TOOLS ....................................................................................................... 3
8.2.1 COPY ELEMENT .............................................................................................................. 5
8.2.2 MOVE ELEMENT ............................................................................................................ 6
8.2.3 SCALE ELEMENT ............................................................................................................. 7
8.2.4 ROTATE ELEMENT........................................................................................................... 9
8.2.5 MIRROR ELEMENT ........................................................................................................ 10
8.2.5 MIRROR ELEMENT ........................................................................................................ 11
8.2.6 CONSTRUCT ARRAY ...................................................................................................... 13
8.2.7 ALIGN EDGES .............................................................................................................. 15
8.2.8 STRETCH ELEMENT........................................................................................................ 16
8.2.9 MOVE/COPY PARALLEL ................................................................................................. 17
8.2.10 MOVE TO CONTACT .................................................................................................... 18
8.3 MODIFY ELEMENT TOOLS .............................................................................................. 19
8.3.1 MODIFY ELEMENT ........................................................................................................ 21
8.3.2 PARTIAL DELETE ........................................................................................................... 23
8.3.3 BREAK ELEMENT .......................................................................................................... 24
8.3.4 EXTEND LINE ............................................................................................................... 24
8.3.5 TRIM TO INTERSECTION .................................................................................................. 25
8.3.6 TRIM TO ELEMENT ........................................................................................................ 25
8.3.7 TRIM MULTIPLE ........................................................................................................... 27
8.3.8 INTELLITRIM ELEMENT ................................................................................................... 28
8.3.9 INSERT VERTEX ............................................................................................................ 29
8.3.10 DELETE VERTEX .......................................................................................................... 30
8.3.11 CONSTRUCT CIRCULAR FILLET ........................................................................................ 30
8.3.12 CONSTRUCT CHAMFER ................................................................................................. 31
8.4 ARC MODIFICATION TOOLS ........................................................................................... 32
8.4.1 MODIFY ARC RADIUS .................................................................................................... 33
8.4.2 MODIFY ARC ANGLE ..................................................................................................... 33
8.4.3 MODIFY ARC AXIS ........................................................................................................ 33

8.5 CHANGE ATTRIBUTES .................................................................................................... 34

8.5.1 CHANGE ELEMENT ATTRIBUTES ........................................................................................ 35
8.5.2 CHANGE TO ACTIVE AREA ............................................................................................... 37
8.5.3 CHANGE TO ACTIVE FILL TYPE .......................................................................................... 38
8.5.4 MODIFY LINE STYLE ATTRIBUTES ...................................................................................... 39
8.5.5 CHANGE MULTI-LINE ..................................................................................................... 40
8.5.6 MATCH ELEMENT ATTRIBUTES ......................................................................................... 41
8.5.7 SMARTMATCH ............................................................................................................ 42

8.1 Introduction
Many times MicroStation users are not called on to create new designs, but edit existing ones. The user needs
tools that allow manipulation and modification of existing geometry. MicroStation provides many tools dedicated
to changing existing graphic elements. This chapter will cover the modification tools located on the Main Tool
Box.
8.2 Manipulate Tools

The tools in the Manipulate tool box are used to copy, move, resize, rotate, mirror, and create arrays, align and
stretch of existing elements.
To access these tools, select the Manipulate tool box from the Main tool box using one of the following methods
shown below.

Manipulate Tool Box
All tools in a toolbox are not always visible by default. To see all tools, right-click in the toolbox and select Show All
from the menu.
Copy Element Copy or stretch an element(s).
Move Element Move or stretch an element(s).
Scale Element Resize and stretch an element(s) by the active scale factors.
Rotate Element Rotate and stretch an element(s).
Mirror Element Mirror an element(s).
Copy an element(s) many times to create a rectangular or a

Construct Array
polar (circular) array.
Align Elements By Edge Align an element(s) to an edge of another element.
Stretch Element Stretch an element(s)
Move or copy an element with the sides of the copy parallel to

Move/Copy Parallel
the original.
Move an element(s) in a defined direction until it contacts an

Move To Contact
existing element in the model.
These tools can be used in conjunction with the Element Selection tool, discussed in Chapter 9, to manipulate
groups of elements simultaneously. Of course, they can also be used by themselves to manipulate elements with a
single selection.
 With the Element Selection tool active, you can right-click on an element to open a menu with options
to copy, move, scale, rotate, mirror, delete, or display the properties for the selected element(s).
 To manipulate an attached reference with these tools, you must first turn on the attachment's Treat
Attachment as Element for Manipulation setting.

8.2.1 Copy Element
The Copy Element tool creates a duplicate of an existing element without affecting the original. It identifies the
element to be copied with a data point and then enters a second data point at the location where the copy or
copies should appear. An element can be copied multiple times in one operation, similar to creating an array.
To copy an element(s)
1. Select the Copy tool.
2. Click on the element.
3. Enter a data point to position the copy.
Tool Settings for Copy Element:
Copies Sets the number of copies to create.
If the checkbox is populated, the fence contents are copied. The fence option menu sets
Use Fence
the Fence (Selection) Mode.

8.2.2 Move Element
The Move Element tool relocates an element. After identifying the element to be moved, enter a second data
point to define its new location. Additional data points continue to move the element until the reset command is
issued.
To move an element
1. Select the Move tool
2. Click on the element.
3. Enter a data point to reposition the element.
Tool Settings for Move Element:
If the checkbox is populated, the fence contents are moved. The fence option menu sets
Use Fence

8.2.3 Scale Element
The Scale Element tool is used to resize an element(s). Scaling an element can be useful for changing the size of an
element without having to redraw the element. Elements can be scaled in any or all of the three axis directions (X,
Y and Z).
To scale an element(s) by the active scale factors
1. Select or fence the element(s).
2. Select the Scale tool.
3. In the Tool Settings window, set Method to Active Scale.
4. Enter a data point to define the point about which the element(s) are scaled.
Tool Settings for Scale Element:
Sets the method used to scale an element.

• Active Scale — Scale by the active scale factors (X Scale, Y Scale, and Z Scale). If a
scale factor is 0-1 (for example, 0.25), size in that direction is decreased; if a scale
Method
factor is greater than 1, size in that direction is increased.
• 3 points — Scale graphically, through the entry of three data points. The scale
factors are computed by dividing the distance between the first and third points
by the distance between the first and second points.

X Scale Scale factor along view x-axis (horizontal), used with the Active Scale method.
Y Scale Scale factor along view y-axis (vertical), used with the Active Scale method.
If the checkbox is populated, the element(s) proportions are maintained, when the 3
Proportional
points method is used.
If on, in Extended Information section of tool settings, the selected element(s) is scaled
About Element
about its center point instead of a selected point. Cells and text elements are scaled about
Center
their origins.
If the checkbox is populated, the element(s) are copied and the copy(s) are scaled; the
Copies
original(s) are not manipulated.
If the checkbox is populated, the fence contents are scaled. The fence option menu sets
Use Fence
Scale Multi-line If the checkbox is populated, multi-line offsets are scaled (i.e., scaling the wall thickness
Offsets when resizing a room).
Scale Dimension
If on, dimension values are modified to reflect the size of the scaled dimension.
Values
Scale Annotations If on, annotations are scaled.

8.2.4 Rotate Element
The Rotate Element tool is used to rotate elements. Elements can be rotated individually, as a selected group or
within a fence. When About Element Center is toggled on, selected elements are rotated about their (individual)
center points.
To rotate an element(s)
2. Select the Rotate tool.
3. Enter a data point to define the pivot point.

If Method is set to Active Angle, the element(s) are rotated by the Active Angle; repeat to rotate the
element(s) again. Otherwise, continue with step 4.
4. If Method is set to 2 Points, enter a data point to define the angle of rotation graphically.
Or
If Method is set to 3 points; enter a data point to define the start of rotation.
If Method is set to 2 Points, the element(s) are rotated; repeat to rotate the element(s) again. Otherwise,
continue with step 5.
5. Enter a data point to define the angle of rotation graphically.
Tool Settings for Rotate Element:
Sets the method used to rotate an element.
Method • Active Angle — The element(s) are rotated by the Active Angle, which can be keyed
in.
• 2 Points — The angle of rotation is defined by entering two data points.
• 3 points — The angle of rotation is defined by three data points.

If on, in Extended Information section of tool settings, the selected element(s) is rotated
about its center point instead of a selected point. Cells and text elements are rotated about
their origins.
About Element
Center
Elements may be selected individually, or you can select multiple elements to rotate in a
selection set or using a fence. Where multiple elements are selected they all will be rotated
about their own center points.
If on, the element(s) are copied and the copy(s) are rotated; the original(s) are not
Copies
manipulated. The adjacent field sets the number of rotated copies to create.
Use Fence If on, the fence contents are rotated. The option menu sets the Fence (Selection) Mode.
 Elements may be selected individually, or multiple elements selected to rotate in a selection set or by
using the fence. Where multiple elements are selected, they are rotated about their own center
points.
8.2.5 Mirror Element
The Mirror Element tool mirrors an element about one of three axes. Rather than manipulating the original
element, enabling the Make Copy toggle creates a second occurrence of the element.
To mirror an element(s)
2. Select the Mirror tool.

If Mirror About is set to Horizontal or Vertical, the element(s) are mirrored.
If Mirror About is set to Line, this data point defines one point on the mirroring line.
4. If Mirror About is set to Line, enter another data point to define another point on the mirroring line.
The element(s) are mirrored. You can go back to step 3 to mirror the element(s) again.

If on, in Extended Information section of tool settings, the selected element(s) is

rotated about its center point instead of a selected point. Cells and text
elements are rotated about their origins.
About Element
Center
Elements may be selected individually, or you can select multiple elements to
rotate in a selection set or using a fence. Where multiple elements are selected
they all will be rotated about their own center points.
If on, the element(s) are copied and the copy(s) are rotated; the original(s) are
Copies
not manipulated. The adjacent field sets the number of rotated copies to create.
If on, the fence contents are rotated. The option menu sets the Fence
Use Fence
(Selection) Mode.
 Elements may be selected individually, or multiple elements selected to rotate in a selection set or by
using the fence. Where multiple elements are selected, they are rotated about their own center
points.
8.2.5 Mirror Element
The Mirror Element tool mirrors an element about one of three axes. Rather than manipulating the original
element, enabling the Make Copy toggle creates a second occurrence of the element.
To mirror an element(s)
2. Select the Mirror tool.

If Mirror About is set to Horizontal or Vertical, the element(s) are mirrored.
If Mirror About is set to Line, this data point defines one point on the mirroring line.
4. If Mirror About is set to Line, enter another data point to define another point on the mirroring line.
The element(s) are mirrored. You can go back to step 3 to mirror the element(s) again.

Tool Settings for Mirror Element:

Sets direction in which element(s) are mirrored:
Mirror About • Horizontal — about horizontal axis.

• Vertical — about vertical axis.
• Line — about line defined by two data points.
About Element If the checkbox is populated, the selected element(s) is mirrored about its center point
Center instead of a selected point.
If on, the element(s) are copied and the copy(s) are mirrored; the original(s) are not
Make Copy
manipulated.
Mirror Text If on, text is mirrored.
Mirror Multi-line
If on, multi-line profile offsets are mirrored.
Offsets
If on, the fence contents are mirrored. The option menu sets the Fence (Selection)
Use Fence
Mode.

8.2.6 Construct Array
Construct Array copies an element as many times as desired to create an array of elements. Polar arrays and
rectangular arrays are supported by this tool.
To create a rectangular array
1. Select or fence the element(s). The element(s) become the lower left items of the array.
2. Select the Construct Array tool.
3. In the Tool Settings window, set Array Type to Rectangular.
4. (Optional) As needed, adjust other settings.
5. Accept the array.
To create a polar array
2. Select the Construct Array tool.
3. In the Tool Settings window, set Array Type to Polar.
4. Enter a data point to define the array's center.
Tool Settings for Construct Array:


Set the type of array that is constructed; different tool settings are available depending on
how this is set.
Method
• Rectangular — Construct a Rectangular array
• Polar — Construct a Polar (circular) array
• Along Path — Construct an array along a path element.
(Rectangular array type) Aligns the imaginary orthogonal grid on which the copies are
Active Angle
placed.
Rows (Rectangular array type) Defines the number of rows in the array.
Columns (Rectangular array type) Defines the number of columns in the array.
Row Spacing (Rectangular array type) Defines the space between rows.
Column Spacing (Rectangular array type) Defines the space between columns.
(Polar array type) Sets the number of items or copies of the fence contents in the array,
Items
including the original.
(Polar array type) Sets the angle between items.
Delta Angle
• If positive, copies are placed counterclockwise.
• If negative, copies are placed clockwise.
(Polar array type) If on, the element(s) are rotated about the center of the array.
Rotate Items
(Along Path array type) If on, the element(s) are rotated to maintain their relative
orientation to the path element.
(Along Path array type) Sets the way that the array is created.
• Number — Defines the number of items in the array, via the Copies setting.
Mode • Distance — Defines the distance between items in the array, via the Distance
setting.
• Both — Defines the number of items in the array and the distance between each
item, via the Copies and Distance settings respectively.
If on, the fence contents are copied into an array. The option menu sets the Fence
Use Fence
(Selection) Mode.

8.2.7 Align Edges
The Align Edges tool is used to align an element or group of elements to the edge of a secondary element.
To align elements to another element
1. Select or fence the elements to align.
2. Select the Align Edges tool.
3. Identify the base element to which to align the selected elements.

The selected elements are aligned to the edge of the base element.
4. Accept the alignment to the base element.
Tool Settings for Align Edges:

Sets the manner by which to align:
• Top
• Bottom
Align • Left
• Right
• Horiz(ontal) Center
• Vert(ical) Center
• Both Centers
If on, the element(s) are copied and the copy(s) are aligned to the identified base element;
Make Copy
the original(s) are not manipulated.
If the checkbox is populated, the fence contents are aligned. The fence option menu sets
Use Fence

8.2.8 Stretch Element
The Stretch Element tool is used to stretch fence contents, which are defined by a fence. The fence can be an
existing fence, or you can define a new rectangular (only) fence with this tool.
The Stretch Element tool operates on elements as follows:
• A vertex of a line, line string, multi-line, or shape is moved if it is inside the fence. A vertex outside the
fence is not moved.
• An endpoint of an arc is moved if it is inside the fence. An arc endpoint outside the fence is not moved.
• An ellipse, circle, or cell is moved if it is completely inside the fence.
• One or more poles (control points) of a B-spline surface, that are located inside the fence, are moved.
To stretch segments of elements that overlap a fence
1. Select the Stretch Element tool.
2. Enter a data point to define one corner of the fence.
3. Enter a data point to define the diagonally opposite corner of the fence.
4. Enter a data point to define the origin point.
5. Enter a data point to repositoin the fence and the affected elements and/or vertices.
Tool Settings for Stretch Element:
Use Fence (Fence present only) If on, the current active fence is used.
Stretch Cells If on, cells that overlap the fence are stretched.

8.2.9 Move/Copy Parallel
The Move/Copy Parallel tool relocates a selected element to a new position by modifying the element in a path
parallel to the original. If the Make Copy checkbox is populated in the Tool Settings Window, the tool creates a
duplicate of the existing element in a position parallel to the original element.
After identifying the element to move or copy, the direction of placement can be determined with the cursor. The
Distance to move or copy can be entered into the Tool Settings Window.
To move or copy an element parallel to the original
1. Select the Move/Copy Parallel tool.

Tool Settings for Move/Copy Parallel tool:

Determines the method by which the gap created by moving two connected elements to a
parallel location is filled.
• Miter - Extends or shortens connecting segments while maintaining the angle of
Mode their connections.
• Round - Fills the gap with a rounded arc between the two moved elements.
• Original - Fills the gap in the same manner as the MicroStation implementation of
this tool; the resulting element is the same type as the original element.
Distance If on, sets the distance to move.
This icon is used to define the distance to move, graphically using two data points. When
Define Distance
the distance is, the Distance setting is turned on automatically and the defined distance
Icon
value is displayed in its field.
Keep Original If on, the original elements are not manipulated.
Use Active If on, the moved or copied element takes on the active attributes.
Attributes If off, the moved or copied element retains the attributes of the existing element.

8.2.10 Move to Contact
The Move to Contact tool is used in either 2D or 3D to move one or more elements in a defined direction until
they make contact with another element. If no element is in the path, then the element is not moved.
To move an element to contact an existing element
1. Select the Move to Contact tool.
2. Identify the element to move.
3. Enter a data point to define the movement direction from the identification point.
Tool Settings for Move Contact tool:
Use Fence (Active Fence present only) If on, the contents of the fence are manipulated.

8.3 Modify Element Tools

The tools in the Modify tool box are used to modify the geometry of an element; usually by adding or deleting
geometry or vertex points.
To access these tools, select the Modify tool box from the Main tool box using one of the following methods
shown below.

Modify Tool Box:
from the menu.
One of the most useful tools. Can be used to modify many

Modify Element
types of geometry.
Partial Delete Used to delete part of an element.
Break Element By Point Used to break a linear element at a defined point.
Used to extend or shorten a line or an end segment of a line

Extend Line
string or multi-line.
Used to extend or shorten two open elements to their

Trim to Intersection
intersection.
Used to extend or shorten an open element, or multiple open

Trim to Element elements simultaneously, to their intersection with another
element.
Used to trim, extend, or trim and extend elements one at a

Trim Multiple time, or multiple elements simultaneously, to their
intersection with one or more other elements.
IntelliTrim Used to simultaneously trim, extend or cut multiple elements.
Insert a vertex in a line, line string, multi-line, shape, or B-

Insert Vertex
spline control polygon.
Delete a vertex from a line string, multi-line, shape, or B-spline

Delete Vertex
control polygon.
Used to construct a circular fillet (arc) between two elements

Construct Circular Fillet (lines, line strings, circular arcs, circles, or shapes), two
segments of a line string, or two sides of a shape.
Construct Chamfer Used to construct a chamfer between two lines.

8.3.1 Modify Element
The Modify Element tool is used to do the following:
• Move a vertex or segment of a line, line string, multi-line, curve, B-spline control polygon, shape, complex
chain, or complex shape.
• Scale a block about the opposite vertex.
• Modify rounded segments of complex chains and complex shapes created with the Place SmartLine tool
while preserving their tangency.
• Change rounded segments of complex chains and complex shapes to sharp and vice-versa.
• Scale a circular arc while maintaining its sweep angle.
• Change a circle's radius or the length of one axis of an ellipse.
• Move dimension text or modify the extension line length of a dimension element.
Elements with multiple segments are line strings, shapes, and complex chains, including complex shapes placed
with the Place SmartLine tool. When used with AccuDraw, the Modify Element tool not only modifies vertices and
segments, but also changes a vertex's type (Sharp, Rounded or Chamfered).
To modify an element
1. Select the Modify Element tool.
2. Identify the element close to the vertex, segment, or axis to modify.
3. Enter a data point to make the modification.
Tool Settings for Modify Element:
Settings for the Modify Element tool vary, depending on the type of element you are modifying and whether you
select a segment or a vertex of the element.


(Vertex selected only) Displays the type of vertex selected and lets you modify the vertex
type.
• Sharp — Sets the vertex to a point.

Vertex Type
• Rounded — Sets the vertex to rounded and lets you define the Rounding Radius
value.
• Chamfered — Sets the vertex to chamfered and lets you define the Chamfer Offset
value.
Rounding
(Vertex Type set to Rounded) Sets the arc radius for a rounded vertex.
Radius
(Vertex Type set to Chamfered) Sets the two (equal) distances from the vertex to the end
Chamfer Offset
points of the chamfer.
(Vertex of an orthogonal shape selected only). If on, the sides adjoining the vertex remain
orthogonal as the vertex is moved.
Orthogonal
If off, the sides adjoining the vertex do not remain orthogonal as the vertex is moved.
If on (the default), modifications to vertices and segments of SmartLines take into account
Enable the adjoining elements. For example, lines that are tangential to a rounded vertex, remain
SmartLine tangential.
modifications
If off, vertices and segments of SmartLines are modified individually.
If on (the default), segments of SmartLines may be selected, as well as the vertices.

Enable segment
selection
If off, only vertices may be modified.
If on, attempts to reduce the number of component elements in a complex chain or shape.
For example, a number of individual lines that have been chained together, may be
Minimize
converted to a line string.
number of
linear elements
If off, does not attempt to reduce the number of component elements in a complex chain or
shape.
Convert If on, when a rounded or chamfered vertex is selected, it is converted to a segment (arc or
selected round linear segment) so that it can be modified as such. This applies only to the selected round or
or chamfer to chamfer, not to the whole chain or shape. After modification, the component will not be
segment treated as a round or chamfer again.
Defines the type of vertex to use.
Vertex Settings • From Element — Uses the element's own settings.

• Last Used — Uses the type of vertex that was last used when modifying a
SmartLine element.

8.3.2 Partial Delete
The Partial Delete tool is used to delete parts of, but not the entire element. It follows these two rules when used.
• A closed element is turned into an open element (i.e., an ellipse or circle becomes an arc, a shape
becomes a line string, a closed B-spline curve becomes an open B-spline curve, etc.).
• If an interior portion of an open element (line, line string, multi-line, curve, or arc) is partially deleted,
the element is divided into two elements of the same type.
To delete part of an element
1. Select the Delete Part of Element tool.
2. Identify the element at one end of the part to delete.
3. For an open element, enter a data point to define the other end of the part to delete.
Or
For a closed element, enter a data point to define the direction in which to delete. Then enter another
data point to define the other end of the part to delete.

8.3.3 Break Element
The Break Element tool is used to break a linear element at a defined point.
To break an element at a defined point
1. Select the Break Element tool.

2. Identify the element at the point where the break is required.
3. Accept to place the break point.
8.3.4 Extend Line
The Extend Line tool is used to extend or shorten linear elements.
To extend or shorten a line by entering a data point
1. Select the Extend tool.
2. Identify the line near the endpoint to modify.
3. If Distance is on, accept the modification.

Or
If Distance is off; enter a data point to define the new endpoint.
Tool Settings for Extend Line:

If on, sets the distance.
Distance • A negative distance shortens the line.
• A positive distance extends the line.
(Applies for Distance off only) If on, the extension, or shortening, of the line is relative to the
nearest endpoint to the identification point.
From End
If off, the extension, or shortening, of the line is relative to the origin point of the line, no
matter where it is identified.

8.3.5 Trim to Intersection
The Trim to Intersection tool is used to extend or shorten two elements of any element type to their intersection.
When an element is extended, the end nearest the point where it was identified is moved, and the other end
remains unchanged. When an element is shortened, the part of the element that is identified is kept.
To extend two elements to their intersection
1. Select the Extend to Intersection tool.
2. Identify the first element.
4. Accept the modification.
8.3.6 Trim to Element
The Trim to Element tool is used to extend or shorten a single line, line string, or arc to its intersection with
another element. When an element is extended, the end nearest the point where it was identified is moved, and
the other end remains unchanged. When an element is shortened, the part of the element that is identified is
kept.
To extend an element to its intersection with another element
1. Select the Extend to Element tool.
2. Identify the element to extend or shorten.
3. Identify the element to which the first element will be extended or shortened.
4. Accept the modification.

To extend an element to its intersection with another element (cutting element selected first)
2. Turn on the Select cutting element first check box.
3. Select the cutting element.
4. Select an element to extend or shorten.

The second element is instantly extended or shortened to its intersection with the cutting element.
To extend multiple elements to their intersection with another element
2. In the Tool Settings window, turn on Select cutting element first.
3. Select the cutting element.
4. Select an element to extend or shorten.

or
Drag a selection line across multiple elements to extend or shorten.
or
Press <Ctrl> and select multiple elements to extend or shorten. Element selection stops when you enter a
data point.
As soon as you select the element(s) to extend or shorten, they are instantly extended or shortened to
their intersection with the cutting element.
Tool Settings for Trim to Element:

Select cutting If on, the element you select first will be used as the cutting element, and the element(s)
element first you select second will be the element that is extended or shortened. The default is off.

8.3.7 Trim Multiple
The Trim Multiple tool is used to trim, or extend elements to their intersection with one or more cutting elements.
The cutting element and the element that is trimmed and/or extended can be lines, line strings, arcs, curves, B-
spline curves, shapes, ellipses, complex chains or complex shapes.
To trim and/or extend one or more elements
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the cutting element(s).
2. Select the Trim Multiple tool.
3. In the Tool Settings window, set Mode to Trim, Extend, or Trim and Extend.
4. Identify an element to trim and/or extend.

or
Drag a selection line across multiple elements to trim and/or extend.
As soon as you identify the element(s) to trim and/or extend, they are instantly trimmed and/or extended
(depending on the mode selected) to their intersection with the cutting element(s).
5. Reset to finish.
Tool Settings for Trim Multiple

If selected, the identified elements that intersect with the cutting element(s) will be
Trim
trimmed.
If selected, the identified elements that intersect with the cutting element(s) will be
Trim and Extend trimmed, and the identified elements that can be extended to intersect with the cutting
element(s) will be extended.
If selected, the identified elements that can be extended to intersect with the cutting
Extend
element(s) will be extended.

8.3.8 IntelliTrim Element
The IntelliTrim Element tool is used to simultaneously trim, extend or cut multiple elements.
The cutting elements or elements to which other elements can be extended are lines, line strings, ellipses, arcs,
curves, shapes, complex strings, complex shapes, text nodes, and cell headers. Elements that can be cut or
trimmed are lines, line strings, curves, arcs, ellipses, shapes, B-spline curves, complex strings, and complex shapes.
The only elements that can be extended are lines, line strings, complex chains that end with a line or line string and
b-spline curves.
 If an element cannot be either extended or trimmed, it is deleted when there is a cutting element
directly between the closest guide point and the element; otherwise, the element is not modified.
To trim (or extend) multiple elements
1. Select the elements to trim or the cutting elements.
2. Select the IntelliTrim tool.

If the tool setting Selection Set is set to Elements to Trim, the selected elements are highlighted.
If Selection Set is set to Cutting Elements, the selected elements are highlighted and dashed.
3. If the selected elements are the elements to trim, identify each cutting element.
Or
If the selected elements are the cutting elements, identify each element to trim. All potential cutting
points are shown as small dots.
4. When done identifying elements, Reset.

The proposed results of the operation are displayed. The trimmable elements remain highlighted to
indicate the tentative nature of the display.
5. If the results are satisfactory, Reset to accept them. Otherwise, continue with step 7.
6. For each element whose trim or extension result is not as you desire, enter a data point on the element
on or near the part of the element you wish to keep. When entering these guide points, you need not be
concerned about “inside” and “outside” (because the cutting elements do not have to be connected or
closed).
For each element to trim the series of entered guide points is evaluated and the part of the element that
is closest to the closest guide point is kept. Every time the element crosses a cutting element, it is cut.
7. When done modifying the results, Reset.

Tools Settings for IntelliTrim:

Operation:
• Trim – Trims elements.
Quick Mode • Extend – Extends elements.
• Cut – Cuts elements. The user does not actually see where the element was cut
until it is selected.)
Operation:
Toggling between Trim and Extend in Advanced Mode causes all intersections and extension
points to be recalculated and displayed.
Advanced Mode
• Trim – Trims elements.
• Extend – Extends elements.
• Cut – This option is not available when Advanced Mode is selected.
Select Elements
If selected, each element that is identified is designated as an element to trim (or extend).
to Trim
Select Cutting
If selected, each element that is identified is designated as a cutting element.
Elements
8.3.9 Insert Vertex
The Insert Vertex tool inserts additional vertices within a line, line string or other complex elements. The Insert
Vertex tool can be used to change a point element into a line or a line element into a line string.
 A shape or line string can have 5000 vertices.
To insert a vertex in a line, line string, multi-line, shape, or Bspline control polygon
1. Select the Insert Vertex tool.
2. Identify the segment on which to add the vertex.
3. Enter a data point to position the new vertex.

8.3.10 Delete Vertex
The Delete Vertex tool works very much like the Insert Vertex tool, except in reverse. It is used to remove vertices
from line strings and other complex elements.
To delete a vertex or an extension line
1. Select the Delete Vertex tool.
2. Identify the vertex or extension line.
8.3.11 Construct Circular Fillet
The Construct Circular Fillet tool is used to insert a curve or fillet between two intersecting elements.
To construct a circular fillet
1. Select the Construct Circular Fillet tool.
2. Identify the first element or segment.

If Truncate is set to First, this element or segment is truncated.
3. Identify the second element or segment.
4. Accept the fillet and truncation(s), if any.
Tool Settings for Construct Circular Fillet:

Radius Sets the fillet's radius.
Sets which side(s) are truncated (trimmed).
• None - Neither element or segment is truncated.

Truncate • Both - Both elements or segments are truncated at their point of tangency with the
fillet.
• First - The first element or segment identified is truncated at its point of tangency
with the fillet.
8.3.12 Construct Chamfer
The Construct Chamfer tool is used to construct a chamfer between two lines. The original lines are trimmed and
a third line element forms the chamfer. It can also be used to chamfer adjacent segments of a line string or shape.
An additional vertex is inserted and the common vertex is adjusted to form the chamfer.
To construct a chamfer
1. Select the Construct Chamfer tool.
2. Identify the first line or segment.
3. Identify the second line or segment.

If the first data point identifies a line element, the second data point must also identify a line element. If
the first data point identifies a segment of a line string or shape, the second data point must identify an
adjacent segment of the same element.
4. Accept the chamfer.
Tool Settings for Construct Chamfer
Distance 1 Applies to the first element or segment identified.
Distance 2 Applies to the second element or segment identified.

8.4 Arc Modification Tools

The last three tools on the Circles tool box are arc modification tools. These tools can be used to modify an arc’s
radius, sweep angle, and axes.
Even though most of the modification tools are located on the Main tool box the Arc Modification tools are located
with the rest of the drawing tools in the Task Navigation tool box. To access these tools, select the Circles tool box
from the Task Navigation tool box using one of the following methods shown below.
Circles Tool Box:
Used to modify the radius, sweep angle, and center of a

Modify Arc Radius
circular arc. The endpoints do not move.
Used to extend or shorten the length (sweep angle) of an

Modify Arc Angle
arc.
Modify Arc Axis Used to lengthen or shorten an axis of an arc.

8.4.1 Modify Arc Radius
Used to modify the radius, sweep angle, and center of a circular arc. The endpoints do not move.
To modify an arc's radius
1. Select the Modify Arc Radius tool.

2. Identify the arc.
3. Enter a data point to redefine the radius, sweep angle, and center.
8.4.2 Modify Arc Angle
Used to extend or shorten the length (sweep angle) of an arc.
To modify an arc's sweep angle
1. Select the Modify Arc Angle tool.

2. Identify the arc close to the end to modify.
3. Enter a data point to lengthen or shorten the arc.
8.4.3 Modify Arc Axis
Used to lengthen or shorten an axis of an arc.
To modify an arc's axis
1. Select the Modify Arc Axis tool.

2. Identify the arc near the axis to modify.
3. Enter a data point to redefine the axis.

8.5 Change Attributes

The tools in the Change Attributes tool box are used to change an element(s) to the active element attribute
settings or to change the active element attribute settings so they match the attributes of an element in the
design. To access these tools, select the Change Attributes tool box from the Main tool box using one of the
Change Attributes Tool Box:

Used to change an element(s) level, color, line style, line
Change Element Attributes
weight, or class.
Used to change a closed element(s) to the active area (Solid or

Change to Active Area
Hole).
Change Element Fill Type Used to change a closed element(s) to the Active Fill Type.
Used to Interactively modify the line style attributes of an

Modify Line Style Attributes
element with a custom line style.
Used to change a multi-line's attributes to the active multi-line

Change Multi-line
definition.
Used to change the active element attribute settings so they

Match Element Attributes
match the attributes of an element in the design.
Used to change all active element attribute settings, including
those specific to particular element types, so they match the
SmartMatch attributes of an element in the design. When a cell is
matched, the active scale factors and Active Cell are also
matched.

8.5.1 Change Element Attributes
Used to change selected attributes of an element(s).
The Change Element Attributes tool is efficient for changing the level of an element to a level that is currently
turned off (the effect of “sending” an element to another level) without changing the active attributes. Also, since
it allows you to match and change attributes using the same tool, Change Element Attributes is very useful when
you are doing repetitive changes to many different elements (like going though an entire drawing cleaning up line
weights).
To change an element's attributes (those that are set to on)
1. Select the Change Element Attributes tool.

2. Turn on Use Active Attributes to change an element's attributes to match the active element attribute
settings.
Or
Turn off Use Active Attributes to change an element's attributes without using or affecting the active
element attribute settings.

4. Accept the change.
To match the active attributes to an element and use these settings to change the attributes of other elements

2. Identify the element to match.
3. Turn on the attributes you want to change in the next element(s) selected.
To change the attributes of one element to match those of another, without affecting the active attributes

2. Turn off Use Active Attributes.
3. Identify the element to match.
4. Turn on the attributes you want to change in the next element(s) selected.

Tools Settings for Change Element Attributes:

If on, the active attributes are affected when you change the attribute settings.
Use Active
Attributes If off (the default), the active attributes are not affected when you change the attribute
settings.
Used to match the element attributes of the element that you select, and then use these
settings to change the attributes of the next element(s) that you select.
If Use Active Attributes is on when you click the eyedropper, the active attributes will change
Eyedropper
to match the element that you select.
Icon
If Use Active Attributes is off when you click the eyedropper, only the settings in the tool
settings window change to match the element that you select. The active attributes do not
change.
Level If on, level is included when changing or matching settings.
Color If on, color is included when changing or matching settings.
If on, line style (and any active line style modifiers) is included when changing or matching
Style
settings.
Weight If on, line weight is included when changing or matching settings.
Transparency If on, element transparency is included when changing or matching settings.
Priority (2D only) If on, element priority, is included when changing or matching settings.
Class If on, element class is included when changing or matching settings.

Use Fence If on, the selected attributes of the fence contents are changed.

If on, the element(s) are copied and the attributes of the copy(s) are changed; the attributes
of the original(s) are not changed.
Make Copy
Turn on this setting in conjunction with the Level setting to copy an element from one level to
another or from a reference level to a master file level.
If on, the attributes for the entire element are changed. Take, for example, where you want
Change Entire to change the color for a text style to green, where the existing text color is red and the
Element underline color blue. If Change Entire Element is off, only the text will change color. If
Change Entire Element is on, both the text and the underline will change to the new color.
8.5.2 Change to Active Area
The Change to Active Area tool is used to change the area attribute of a closed element(s) to the Active Area.
To change an element to the active area
1. Select the Change Element to Active Area tool.
2. Identify the closed element.
Tool Settings for Change to Active Area:

Sets the Active Area.
Area • Solid - element's Area attribute is changed to Solid.
• Hole - element's Area attribute is changed to Hole.

8.5.3 Change to Active Fill Type
The Change to Active Fill Type tool is used to change a closed element to the Active Fill Type.
To change an element to the Active Fill Type
1. Select the Change Element to Active Fill Type tool.
2. Identify the closed element.
Tool Settings for Change to Active Fill Type:

Active Fill Type:
• None (no fill)
Fill Type
• Outlined.
Sets color with which the element(s) are filled. To define the Fill Color, use the controls on
the Active Color, True Color, Color Book, or Gradient Fill tab.
• If Fill Type is Opaque, the element(s) are filled with the Active Color, which is also
Fill Color
the color of the element's outline.
• If Fill Type is Outlined, the element(s) can be filled with a color that is different
from the Active Color.
 If the Fill Option is not turned on in the View Attributes dialog box, then the fill will not appear even if it
has been set using this tool.

8.5.4 Modify Line Style Attributes
The Modify Line Style Attributes tool is used to modify the line style attributes of an element with a custom line
style. You can enter a value for the attribute, or modify it graphically. The icon bar contains options for setting the
type of custom line style attribute to modify.
To modify a line style attribute graphically
1. Select the Modify Line Style Attributes tool.
2. Select the icon that corresponds to the attribute to modify.
4. Move the pointer to adjust the setting.
Tool Settings for Modify Line Style Attributes:
Width The starting, or Origin, width and the End width of an element.
Start Width The starting, or Origin, width of an element.
End Width The End width of an element.
Scale The scale factor applied to strokes.
Dash Scale The scale factor applied to variable length dash strokes.

Gap Scale The scale factor applied to variable length gap strokes.
The Shift distance by which the stroke pattern is shifted relative to the beginning of
Shift
an element or its segments.
(Shift icon selected only) Specifies the shift distance by which the stroke pattern is
shifted relative to the beginning of an element or its segments.
Shift
If Absolute is on, this value represents the shift distance value. If Absolute is off, this
value represents the amount to modify the existing shift distance value.
Use Fence If on, the custom line style attributes of elements inside the fence are modified.
8.5.5 Change Multi-line
Used to change a multi-line's attributes to the active multi-line definition.
To change a multi-line to the active multi-line definition
1. Select the Change Multi-line to Active Definition tool.
2. Identify the multi-line.
Tool Settings for Change Multi-line

8.5.6 Match Element Attributes
The Match Element Attributes tool is used to change the active element attribute settings so they match the
attributes of an element in the design.
To match an element's level and symbology attributes

(Those that are on in the Tool Settings window)
1. Select the Match Element Attributes tool.
3. Accept the new active element attributes.
Tool Settings for Match Element Attributes:
Level Active Level
Color Active Color
Style Active Line Style
Weight Active Line Weight
Transparency Active Element Transparency
Priority (2D only) Active Element Priority
 This tool will only match the settings that are checked in the tool settings window.

8.5.7 SmartMatch
The SmartMatch tool is used to change all active element attribute settings, including those specific to particular
element types, so they match the attributes of an element in the design. When a cell is matched, the active scale
factors and Active Cell are also matched.
To match an element's attributes
1. Select the Match All Element Settings tool.
3. Accept the new active settings.
Tool Settings for SmartMatch
Match Multi-line Caps If on, multi-line caps settings are matched as well.
 To change the color, line style, line weight, or level of an element(s) to the active element attributes,
use the Change Element Attributes tool.

Table of Contents:
9.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................... 3
9.2 USING FENCES................................................................................................................. 3
9.2.1 PLACE FENCE................................................................................................................. 4
9.2.2 MODIFY FENCE .............................................................................................................. 7
9.2.3 MANIPULATE FENCE CONTENTS ......................................................................................... 8
9.2.3 DELETE FENCE CONTENTS ................................................................................................. 9
9.2.4 DROP FENCE CONTENTS ................................................................................................... 9
9.2.5 COPY/MOVE FENCE CONTENTS ....................................................................................... 10
9.3 ELEMENT SELECTION TOOL............................................................................................ 11
9.4 SELECT BY ATTRIBUTES.................................................................................................. 19
9.5 GROUPING ELEMENTS ................................................................................................... 20
9.5.1 NAMED GROUPS .......................................................................................................... 20
9.6 COMPLEX ELEMENTS ..................................................................................................... 22
9.6.1 GROUPS TOOL BOX ...................................................................................................... 22
9.6.1.1 Drop Element ..........................................................................................................................................24
9.6.1.2 Create Complex Chain .............................................................................................................................26
9.6.1.3 Create Complex Shape ............................................................................................................................28
9.6.1.4 Create Region..........................................................................................................................................30
9.6.1.5 Add to Graphic Group .............................................................................................................................33
9.6.1.6 Drop from Graphic Group .......................................................................................................................36
9.6.1.7 Group Holes ............................................................................................................................................37


9.1 Introduction
To this point, any modifications and manipulations have been performed on single elements. When working with
actual drawings, this is often not practical. A more common task is to modify or manipulate a group of elements.
For instance, all direction arrows may need to be erased, or an area of the drawing may need to be moved or
copied to a new location.
MicroStation has several tools that allow multiple elements to be selected. The next several topics cover various
ways of selecting multiple objects in MicroStation.
9.2 Using Fences

A Fence is used to create a temporary grouping of objects. The group is defined by placing a fence object in the
design file. Once the fence has been placed, the group can be manipulated in a variety of ways.
In addition to grouping objects, a fence can be used to define an area to be plotted, or to clip a file that has been
referenced to the design file.
The Fence tool box contains a tool for placing fences along with several tools for manipulating or deleting fenced
elements. To access these tools, select the Fence tool box from the Main tool box using one of the following

Fence Tool Box
Place Fence Used to place the fence.
Modify Fence Used to move the fence or modify one of its vertices.
Used to move, copy, rotate, mirror, scale, or stretch the fence

Manipulate Fence Contents
contents.
Delete Fence Contents Used to delete the fence contents.
Used to drop the contents of a fence from a complex state to a

Drop Fence Contents
simple state. Dropping elements is covered in a later chapter.
Copy/Move Fence Contents

Used to Copy/Move the fence contents to a new DGN file.
to File
9.2.1 Place Fence
The Place Fence tool is used to place the fence. On placement, the fence, whether a fence block, shape or circle, is
displayed on screen as a closed shape with the color used to highlight identified elements. While the fence is
placed, a fence mode icon displays in the Status Bar.
To place a fence
1. Select the Place Fence tool.

If a fence already exists, it is removed.
2. In the Tool Settings window, choose the type of fence that you wish to place.
3. Click and drag the pointer from the first corner to the diagonally opposite corner
Or
Enter a Data point to define one corner and then enter another Data point to define the diagonally
opposite corner.

To create a named fence
2. In the Tool Settings window, set the Fence Type and Fence Mode.
3. Place a fence.
4. In the Tool Settings, click the Expand arrow.
5. Click the Create Named Fence from Active Fence icon.

An untitled named fence is added to the named fence list.
6. In the named fence list, enter a name new named fence.
7. In the Description column, right-click and enter a description.
To make a named fence the active fence
2. In the Tool Settings, click the Expand arrow.
3. In the list, select a named fence.
4. Click the Activate Named Fence icon.
Tool Settings for Place Fence:


When the Fence Type is:
• Block, Shape, or Circle — Sets the geometric characteristics of a fence for graphical
placement.
• Element — Lets you create a fence by selecting an element. Elements that can be
used for a fence include closed planar elements (shapes, circles, ellipses, complex
shapes, grouped holes), any solid (other than spheres or feature solids) or closed
extrusion, or cylinders. If a planar element is used in a 3D file, then the volume is
applied by sweeping the planar region through the entire model.
• From View — Sets a fence to include the contents of the selected view.
• From File — Sets a fence to include the contents of a DGN file. An option menu
Fence Type lets you choose from:
o Active — elements in the active model from a selected view.
o All — elements in the active model and its references, from a selected
view.
o Choose — elements from a selected reference (or the active model),

which you identify by identifying an element from the required
model/reference.
• From Flood — Sets a fence to include the (minimum) area enclosed by a set of
elements.
Sets the Fence (Selection) Mode that, in conjunction with the fence placement, defines the
Fence Mode
fence contents for manipulation.
Clicking the Expand arrow expands the tool settings to reveal the Named Fence tools.
• Activate Named Fence — Makes the named fence (selected in the named fence
list) the active fence.
• Delete Named Fence — Deletes the named fence selected in the named fence list.
Named fence
• Create Named Fence from Active Fence — Creates a named fence
tools
• Named fence list — Lists all named fences in the model.
Double-click in the Name or Description column to modify this information for a

named fence. Use the Display column to toggle on and off the display of a named
fence.
 Selecting Place Fence automatically disables AccuDraw if it was not already disabled.

9.2.2 Modify Fence
The Modify Fence tool allows the user to make changes to the actual fence itself after it is placed. There are two
modes available to choose from, Vertex or Position.
To move the fence without replacing it
1. Select the Modify Fence tool.

2. Set the tool setting Modify Mode to Position.
3. Enter a data point to define the origin for the move.
4. Enter a data point to define the new fence position. This data point precisely positions the origin.
5. Reset to accept the move.
Or
Repeat step 4.
To modify a vertex of the fence
1. Select the Modify Fence tool.

2. Set the tool setting Modify Mode to Vertex.
3. Identify the vertex to move.
4. Enter a data point to define the new vertex position.
5. Reset to accept the modification.
Or
Repeat step 4.
Tool Settings for Modify Fence:
When the Modify Mode is:

Modify Mode
• Vertex, and individual vertex can be manipulated.
• Position, the entire fence can be moved to a new location.
Sets the Fence (Selection) Mode that, in conjunction with the fence placement, defines the
Fence Mode
fence contents for manipulation.

9.2.3 Manipulate Fence Contents
The Manipulate Fence Contents tool provides the means to change the contents of the fence based on the
provided operations. These are typical of the options available in the Manipulate tool box.
The method of manipulation is determined by the tool setting Operation. With the exception of Stretch, each
Method works identically to a tool in the Manipulate tool box with the tool setting Use Fence on.
The method of manipulation is determined by the tool setting Operation. With the exception of Stretch, each
Method works identically to a tool in the Manipulate toolbox with the tool setting Use Fence on.
To stretch segments of elements that overlap the fence
1. Select the Manipulate Fence Contents tool.
2. Set Operation to Stretch.

The Stretch option ignores the Fence (Selection) Mode. The mode has no effect while the Stretch option is
in use.
3. Enter a data point inside the fence to define the origin.
4. Enter a data point to reposition the fence and the affected vertices.
Tool Settings Manipulate Fence Contents:
Stretch Cells If on, cells that overlap the fence are stretched.
With Operation set to Stretch, Manipulate Fence Contents ignores the Fence (Selection) Mode and operates on
elements as follows:
• A vertex of a line, line string, multi-line or shape is moved if it is inside the fence. A vertex outside the
fence is not moved.
• An endpoint of an arc is moved if it is inside the fence. An arc endpoint outside the fence is not moved.
• An ellipse, circle, or cell is moved if it is completely inside the fence.

9.2.3 Delete Fence Contents
The Delete Fence Contents tool can be used to delete the fence contents, which are defined by a fence and the
Fence (Selection) Mode.
To delete the fence contents
1. Select the Delete Fence Contents tool.
Tool Settings for Delete Fence Contents:
9.2.4 Drop Fence Contents
The Drop Fence Contents tool has the same modes for control as Delete Fence; the Drop Fence Contents tool will
allow the user to drop complex status of multiple elements. This returns complex elements to individual
components that can be manipulated singularly.
To drop the complex status of the fence contents
1. Select the Drop Complex Status of Fence Contents tool.
2. Accept the drop.
Tool Settings for Drop Fence Contents:

9.2.5 Copy/Move Fence Contents
The Copy/Move Fence Contents tool is used to copy or move the contents of the active fence to a new DGN file.
To copy the fence contents to a new file
1. Select the Copy/Move Fence Contents to New File tool.

2. Enter two data points to define the fence block.
3. Set Processing Mode to Copy.
4. Adjust other settings as required.
5. Accept to complete the copy.
Tool Settings for Copy/Move Fence Contents:

Displays the name of the file to which the fence contents will be copied/moved. By default,
Output File the file is given a name in the format filename_model. You can select a different file name
by clicking the Define Output File icon.
Opens the Save Fence Contents As dialog, which lets you select a destination folder and file
name to which the contents will be copied/moved.
Define Output
file (icon)
If an existing file is chosen, its current contents will be deleted. An Alert box will warn you of
this before you accept the operation.
Defines how the fence contents will be processed.
Processing • Copy — Fence contents will be copied to the new file. The original elements will
Mode remain in the active model.
• Move — Fence contents will be deleted from the active model and moved to the
new file.
Fence Mode Determines which elements are included in the fence contents.
Switch to
If on, after processing the fence, the current file is closed and the Output File is opened.
generated file

9.3 Element Selection Tool

While the fence is a very useful tool, it does have its drawbacks and limitations. A fence does not really select
objects; it actually selects an area and object. This can be confusing if you move the fence multiple times. A fence
cannot be used to select multiple items that are not in the same area, such as all spot elevations in a drawing.
The Element Selection Tool exists to fill this gap. The tool in this tool box selects elements, not areas. Once the
elements are selected, another tool is activated to manipulate or modify the elements. For instance, the user
could select elements, and the select the Delete Element tool to delete them, or the Move Element tool to move
them. The set of selected elements is called the selection set.
To access the Element Selection tool, select the tool from the Main tool box like shown below.
Element Selection Tool:
Selects element(s) by clicking on them or drawing a window

Element Selection
around them. Very useful tool.

While the Element Selection tool is selected, the pointer becomes an arrowhead with an aperture encircling the
tip. The aperture denotes the design plane area in which MicroStation searches for elements or allows the user to
create selection sets. The aperture size or Locate Tolerance is a user preference that can be adjusted in the
Preferences dialog, Input Category.
In the Show Extended Settings for the Element Selection tool, tabs let you select elements by one or more
attributes. Not all the attributes are displayed by default. To see all the tabs Right-Click on the tab buttons like
shown below and select Show All or toggle on what you attribute you want. Alternatively, when you select
elements graphically, the active set of attributes displays as a highlighted group in each tab's list box.

The upper portion of the dialog box contains two rows of icons that allow the user to choose the Method and
Mode of creating or editing a selection set.
Method
Mode
Sets the selection method. The method works in conjunction with the Mode setting.
• Individual — Lets you select individual elements graphically. To select additional
elements:
o (when mode is set to New) Hold the <Ctrl> key, then click on the elements.
o (when mode is set to Add) Click on the elements.
o (when mode is set to New or Add) Click in the view window, then drag to
select elements with a dynamic rectangle.
If you double-click an existing text element with the Element Selection pointer, the
Edit Text tool activates and the Text Editor window opens.
If you double-click a blank area of a view, the selection mode toggles between
Block and Individual.
Method
• Block — When set to inside selection, all elements inside the block are selected.
When set to overlap selection, all elements inside or overlapping the block are
selected.
• Shape — When set to inside selection, all elements inside the shape are selected.
When set to overlap selection, all elements inside or overlapping the shape are
selected.
• Circle — When set to inside selection, all elements inside the circle are selected.
When set to overlap selection, all elements inside or overlapping the circle are
selected.
• Line — Lets you select elements by defining a line that intersects them.

Sets the objective of using the tool. The Mode works in conjunction with the Method
setting.
• New — Clears the current selection set and starts a new selection set.
• Add — Adds elements to the selection set.
• Subtract — Removes elements from the selection set.

Mode
• Invert — Toggles the selection status of an element (selects deselected elements
and deselects selected elements).
• Clear/Select All — Deselects all selected elements if element handles are not
visible. If handles are visible and selected (orange), selecting the Clear mode
deselects the handles (blue). Selects all elements if no elements are currently
selected.
If on, handles are not displayed for selected elements.
With the Individual method plus New mode, element handles are displayed by default if you
select a single element or multiple elements using <Ctrl-click>. Element handles are not
displayed when you select multiple elements by dragging a rectangle or with another
selection method (Block, Shape, Circle, or Line).
Disable Handles
If on, the Block/Shape/Circle/Line selection methods and the Add/Subtract/Invert/Clear

selection modes apply to selecting handles rather than elements. (To use this icon, Disable
Handles must be off.)
Select Handles

Clicking the Show Extended Settings arrow expands the tool settings window to reveal the
Attribute tabs.
• Level — Lets you select the required levels from a list of levels in the model.
• Color — Lets you select the required colors from a list (0–254 plus By Level).
• Line Style — Lets you select the required line styles from a list (standard line styles
plus custom line styles, plus By Level).
• Line Weight — Lets you select the required line weights from a list (0–31 plus By
Attribute Tabs Level).
• Element Type — Lets you select the required element types from a list.
• Element Class — Lets you select the required element classes from a list.
• Element Template — Lets you select the required element template from a list.
• Text Styles — You can select the required text style from a list.
• Dimension Styles — You can select the required dimension style from a list.
• Multi-line Styles — You can select the required multi-line style from a list.
• Transparency — You can select the required transparency from a list.
• Display Priority — You can select the display priority from a list.
Attribute tabs in the Element Selection settings window allow the user to select elements by one or more
attributes. Alternatively, when elements are selected graphically, the active set of attributes displays as a
highlighted group at the top of each tab list box.
Elements can be added to the set in each tab by clicking additional (un-highlighted) attributes. If an element exists
with that attribute, the attribute will be included in the set. Similarly, to remove an attribute from the set, click a
highlighted attribute. Switching tabs continues the process of adding or eliminating other attributes for the
selection set. When a number of attributes are selected, press [Ctrl] + [Data Point] and a highlighted attribute and
all other highlighted attributes are deselected.
 While the Element Selection tool is selected, you can use the tool pointer in conjunction with the Reset
pop-up menu to operate on the element at the pointer location or on the selected elements.

To select a single element
2. In the tool settings window, select the following icons: Method - Individual, and Mode - New.
3. Click the element you want to select.

The selected element is bracketed with handles.
To select one or more elements with the Individual method
2. In the tool settings window, select these icons: Method - Individual, and Mode - New.
3. Drag around the area containing the elements you want to select. As you drag, a dynamic rectangle
outlines the area.
4. (Optional) While dragging, use the Shift key to toggle between the inside (solid line style) and overlap
(dashed line style) selection methods.
5. Release the Data button.

All elements that are inside (or overlapping) the rectangle are selected.
To select additional elements with the Individual method
2. In the tool settings window, select these icons: Method - Individual, and Mode - New.
3. Hold the <Ctrl> key, and click on the elements to select.
To select all elements in the active model
1. From the Reset pop-up menu, choose Select All.

or
Choose Edit > Select All (or press <ctrl-A>).
or
In the status bar, click the element selection indicator field, and choose Select All from the pop-up menu.
 Elements in references cannot be selected with this method.

To select elements inside or overlapping a rectangular area
2. In the tool settings window, select the following icons: Method - Block, and Mode - Add (+).
3. Enter a data point to define the first corner of the block. Use a left-right direction for inside selection and
a right-left direction for overlap selection.
4. (Optional) Tap the <Shift> key while dragging to invert the current inside/overlap direction.
5. Move the pointer until the dynamically displayed block contains or overlaps the elements you want to
select.
6. Enter a second data point to close the block.
To select elements based on their attributes
2. In the tool settings window, click the Show Extended Settings icon.
3. Choose the desired attribute tab as the selection criterion.
4. In the attribute list box, click the attributes to be included in the selection criterion.
If elements exist with these attributes in the design file, the attributes are highlighted and displayed in the
list box and the elements are selected. If you select an attribute that does not coincide with an element
in the design file, the attribute is not highlighted.

To select additional elements or deselect some selected elements based on their attributes
2. In the tool settings window, select the following icons: Method - Block, and Mode - Add (+).
3. Enter a data point to define the first corner of the block. Use a left-right direction for inside selection and
a right-left direction for overlap selection.
4. (Optional) Tap the <Shift> key while defining points to invert the current inside/overlap direction.
5. Move the pointer until the dynamically displayed block contains or overlaps the elements you want to
select or deselect.
6. Enter a second data point to close the block.

Elements that meet the criterion within the block are selected.
7. In the tool settings window, click the Show Extended Settings icon.
8. Choose the desired attribute tab.

The attributes that exist within the selection set (block) are highlighted and displayed in the list box.
9. To deselect elements with specific attributes from the selection set, click the highlighted attribute.
The attribute is no longer highlighted and the elements with that attribute are unselected.
To deselect an element
2. In the tool settings window, select the following icons: Method - Individual, and Mode - New.
3. <Ctrl-click> the element to deselect.
To deselect all elements
2. In the tool settings window, select Mode — Clear.

9.4 Select By Attributes

The Element Selection tool allows the user to select information in the drawing by choosing it on the screen.
These tools are used to make most of the selections in a drawing. There are times, however, when selections may
need to be made from specified criteria instead of a simple graphic selection. The Select By Attributes dialog
allows the user to define search criteria and then elements meeting that criteria are selected.
The Select By Attributes dialog box searches the entire drawing and is very useful for selecting items scattered
throughout a drawing.
The Select By Attributes dialog is activated by selecting Edit > Select By Attributes from the Main Menu Bar. To
create search criteria, click the information listed in the combo boxes to create the search.

9.5 Grouping Elements

Graphic groups are a quick method for Grouping Elements in MicroStation. Without “breaking up” the grouping,
you can add, remove, or manipulate individual member elements. Whether your actions change the whole
graphic group or only part of it depends upon whether you turn Graphic Group Lock on or off. With Graphic Group
Lock “on”, all elements in the graphic group are manipulated. With Graphic Group Lock “off” only the selected
element is manipulated. For greater flexibility still, you can create named groups, which let you give a name to
each grouping of elements.
9.5.1 Named Groups
No matter what method is used in creating a selection set, the selection is only temporary. To create a persistent
selection, graphic groups must be used.
A graphic group is a named collection of objects. A design file can contain an unlimited number of graphic groups.
The groups only exits within their host design file and cannot be exported to other design files.
Once a graphic group is created, it can be manipulated like a single piece of geometry.
Graphic groups are created in the Named Groups dialog, which is accessed by selecting Utilities > Named Groups
from the Main Menu Bar.
 The Graphic Group Lock must be turned on for graphic groups to be selected as a single entity.

Named Groups dialog box tools:
Creates a named group in the dialog box. The new group will
New Named Group
have a default name that the user may change.
Displays the Element Properties for all elements in the chosen

Show Named Group
graphic group.
Add Elements Allows the user to add elements to the chosen group.
Remove Elements Allows the user to remove elements from the chose group.
Add Named Group to Forces the named group selected to become a child of another
Parent group.
Remove Group from Parent Removes the group from being a child of another group.
Delete the group name from the Named Groups dialog. This
Delete Group
does not delete the elements that are in the group.
Select Elements in Group Selects all elements in the graphic group.
Display Set Sets the contents of the selected group as the DisplaySet.
Show Hierarchy Shows the hierarchy window.

9.6 Complex Elements

Complex Elements are created when a series of primitive elements (lines, line strings, arcs, or curves) are joined
together to form a single element. If the joined elements form an open shape, the new single element is called a
complex chain. If the joined elements form a closed shape, the new single element is called a complex shape.
There are many advantages to using complex elements over primitive elements. For example, if a roadway
centerline has been created using lines and arcs, each item would have to be copied parallel individually. This
would result in many mouse clicks. If the centerline were made into a complex chain before being copied, a single
parallel copy operation would copy the entire centerline with one mouse click.
A complex object is always created on the Active Level. The resulting complex chain takes on the active element
attributes regardless of the attributes of the component elements.
A complex object is an element like any other, and all of the standard manipulation and modification tools apply.
Once a series of primitive objects have been converted to a complex object, they may be broken up in to single
objects again with the Drop Element tool.
9.6.1 Groups Tool Box
The Groups tool box has tools for creating a graphic group and adding and removing elements to or from a graphic
group. To access these tools, select the Groups tool box from the Main tool box using one of the following

Groups tools:
from the menu.
Break up a complex element(s) or an element(s) of a special

Drop Element type into simpler components. Tool settings are used to specify
the element types on which the tool operates.
Create a complex chain (open complex element). element that

Create Complex Chain
is formed from a series of open elements.
Create a complex shape (closed complex element) from

Create Complex Shape
individual open elements.
Create a complex shape from the union, intersection, or

Create Region
difference between closed elements or by “flood fill.”
Add elements to an existing graphic group or Combine two or

Add to Graphic Group
more graphic groups into one graphic group.
Remove (drop) an element(s) from a graphic group or Break up

Drop from Graphic Group
a graphic group into individual elements.
Select a solid element and the hole or holes to be associated

Group Holes
with the solid.

9.6.1.1 Drop Element
The Drop Element tool is used to break up an element(s) into simpler components. Tool settings are used to
specify the element types on which the tool operates.
To break up an element into its components
1. Select the element(s).
2. Select the Drop Element tool.
3. Turn on the appropriate tool settings to specify the element type(s) on which to operate.
4. Accept the settings and initiate the drop.

Only the selected elements of the specified type(s) are dropped. The tool has no effect on selected
elements of other types. If none of the selected elements is of the specified type(s), the message “Nothing
to drop” displays in the status bar.
 Drop Element cannot be used to drop elements more than one level at a time. For example, if you
turn on Complex and Line Strings/Shapes and operate on a complex shape that contains two line
strings, the complex shape is dropped but the component line strings are not. That is, the operation
results in two line strings.

Tool Settings for Drop Element:

If on, complex elements (cell, complex chain, complex shape, text node, surface, or solid)
Complex
are dropped into their components.
If on, dimension element(s) are dropped into lines, line strings, ellipses, arcs, and text.
Dimensions • To Geometry — Drops down lines, line strings, ellipses, arcs, and text.
• To Segment — Drops down individual dimension segments.
Line
If on, line strings and shapes are converted to series of individual line elements.
Strings/Shapes
Multi-lines If on, multi-line elements are converted to sets of line strings, lines, and/or arcs.
If on, the associated option menu lets you drop shared cells:
Shared Cells • To Geometry — They are dropped into their components.
• To Normal Cell — They are converted to unshared cells.
If on, text characters in text elements are converted to the individual elements that are used
Text
to draw the characters — lines, line strings, arcs, ellipses, and shapes.
Application
If on, used to drop light weight geometry.
Elements

9.6.1.2 Create Complex Chain
The Create Complex Chain tool is used to create a complex chain — an open complex element that is formed from
a series of open elements (lines, line strings, arcs, curves, and open B-spline curves ) that can be manipulated as if
it were a single primitive element. The resulting complex chain takes on the active element attributes regardless
of the attributes of the component elements.
To create a complex chain manually
1. Select the Create Complex Chain tool.
2. Set Method to Manual.
3. Identify the first element to include in the chain.
4. Continue to identify elements to add to the chain.

If they are not already connected, the elements are connected as they are identified.
5. Reset to complete the complex chain.
To create a complex chain automatically
1. Select the Create Complex Chain tool.
2. Set Method to Automatic.
4. Accept to automatically include other elements that are within the Max Gap distance. If a fork is found,
where more than one element is within the Max Gap distance, the message “FORK – Accept or reset to
See Alternate” displays in the status bar.
5. Enter a data point to accept the highlighted element

or
Reset to highlight an alternate element. Continue to reset until the desired element highlights.
6. Accept to complete the complex chain. Creation of the chain ends automatically if there are no elements
within the Max. Gap.

Tool Settings for Create Complex Chain:
Sets how elements are added to the complex chain:

• Manual — Each element is manually identified.
• Automatic — After the first element is identified, and accepted, if endpoints of
Method additional open element(s) are within the Max. Gap distance of each other, they
are included automatically. Where there is a choice of two or more elements (at
the endpoint of an element) then the process lets you choose to either Accept the
highlighted element, or Reset to see the alternative(s).
The greatest allowable distance between elements when the Method is Automatic.
Max(imum) Gap
If zero, only elements that connect (have a common endpoint) can be added.
Simplify If on, connected lines are added as line strings. If you identify only connected lines, the tool
geometry produces a primitive line string element rather than a complex chain.
 It is best to create complex chains from elements that share common endpoints.
 To convert a complex chain back to its individual components, use the Drop Element tool.

9.6.1.3 Create Complex Shape
Complex shapes are a series of individual elements where the beginning and ending element meet to form a
closed shape.
Although using the Max Gap or the Manual option fills in gaps between elements when creating complex
elements, it is recommended that elements be joined before creating complex elements.
To create a complex shape manually
1. Select the Create Complex Shape tool.
2. Set Method to Manual.
4. Continue to identify elements to add to the shape.

The elements are connected as they are identified, unless they already are connected.
5. If the first and last elements connect, accept the shape.

If the first and last elements do not connect, Reset to close the shape and create a line element
between their endpoints.
To create a complex shape automatically
1. Select the Create Complex Shape tool.
2. Set Method to Automatic.
4. Accept to automatically include other elements that are within the Max Gap distance.
If the elements do not have a common endpoint, they are connected. If a fork is found; that is, if more
than one element is within the Max. Gap, the message “FORK — Accept or Reset to See Alternate”
displays in the status bar.
5. Enter a data point to accept the highlighted element.

Or
Reset to highlight an alternate element. Continue to Reset until the desired element highlights.
 Although using the Max Gap or the Manual option will fill in gaps between elements when creating
complex elements, it is recommended that elements are already joined before creating complex
elements.

Tool Settings for Create Complex Shape:
Sets how elements are added to the complex chain:

• Manual — Each element is manually identified.
• Automatic — After the first element is identified, and accepted, if endpoints of
Method additional open element(s) are within the Max. Gap distance of each other, they
are included automatically. Where there is a choice of two or more elements (at
the endpoint of an element) then the process lets you choose to either Accept the
highlighted element, or Reset to see the alternative(s).
The largest distance allowed between consecutive elements, if Method is Automatic.

Max(imum) Gap
If zero, only elements that connect (have a common endpoint) can be added.
Simplify If on, connected lines are added to the boundary as line strings. If you identify only
geometry connected lines, the tool produces a primitive shape element rather than a complex shape.
Sets the type of shape created.

Area • Solid — The shape created is solid (can be hatched/patterned).
• Hole — The shape created is a hole (cannot be hatched/patterned).
Sets the active Fill Type.
• None — No fill
Fill Type
• Opaque — Filled with Active Color
• Outlined — Filled with Fill Color (outline of shape takes the Active Color)
Complex shape is filled with this color and optional gradient if the Fill Type is Outlined;
Fill Color
otherwise disabled (dimmed).

9.6.1.4 Create Region
The Create Region tool has many options and is a more complex tool than the Create Complex Chain or Create
Complex Shape tools. The concepts behind some of its settings have to be understood before the tool can be
used.
Regions can be formed from the Union, Difference, or Intersection of closed elements. The concept behind this is
Boolean math. The user should not be concerned with understanding Boolean math, just the concepts illustrated
in the figures below.
 Create Region also uses a flood option which is the most common way to create regions and is also
the easiest to use.

To construct a complex shape from the intersection or union of elements
1. Select the Create Region tool.
2. In the Tool Settings window, click the Intersection or Union icon.
3. Identify one element.
4. Identify second element.
5. Accept to create the region.
To construct a complex shape from the difference between elements
2. Click the Difference icon.
3. Identify the base element (the element to be subtracted from).
4. Identify the element to be subtracted.
To construct a complex shape by “flood”
2. Click the Flood icon.
3. Set Fill Type and Fill Color as required.
4. Click the Ignore Interior Shapes, Locate Interior Shapes, or Identify Alternate Shapes, icon to define how
any interior shapes are to be treated.
5. (Optional) Click the Locate Interior Text icon if you want the region shape to avoid text and dimensional
text.
6. (Optional) Click the (Optional) Dynamic Area Locate icon to dynamically display the proposed region as
you pass the pointer over the elements.
7. Enter a data point in the area enclosed by the bounding elements.
8. Accept the complex shape.

Tool Settings for Create Region:
Region edges bound the area enclosed by elements that either touch one another or whose
Flood icon endpoints fall within the maximum gap value. Selection sets can be used to select the
elements required to enclose the flood area.
Union icon Region edges bound the union of two or more closed, planar elements.
Intersection icon Region edges bound the intersection of two or more closed, planar elements.
Difference icon Region edges bound the difference of two or more closed, planar elements.
Sets the Active Fill Type.

• None — If on, the complex shape is not filled.
Fill Type
• Opaque — If on, the complex shape is filled with the Active Color.
• Outlined — If on, the complex shape is filled with the Fill Color.
This option is only available when Fill Type is set to Opaque or Outlined. The complex shape
is filled with this color, if Fill Type is set to Outlined. When Fill Type is set to Opaque, Fill
Fill Color
Color displays the Active Color, which can also be set from this location. When Fill Type is
set to None, this option is disabled (dimmed).
Keep Original If the checkbox is populated, the original elements remain in the design.
If on, the region boundary retains association with the elements used to create it. If one of
Associative
the original elements is modified, then the boundary element updates to reflect the
Region Boundary
modification.
Ignore Interior (Flood icon selected only) If selected, interior shapes are ignored when the region boundary
Shapes icon is calculated.
Locate Interior (Flood icon selected only) If selected, closed elements inside the selected area are included
Shapes icon as part of the new complex shape.

Identify
Alternating (Flood icon selected only) If selected, alternating areas are flooded where shapes are nested
Interior Shapes inside one another.
icon
Locate Interior (Flood icon selected only) If on, any text or dimensional text inside or overlapping the
Text icon selected area is avoided.
Dynamic Area (Flood icon selected only) If on, the area to be included in the region displays dynamically as
Locate icon you move the screen pointer over the view.
(Flood icon selected only) Sets the largest distance allowed between consecutive elements.
Max(imum) Gap
If zero, only elements that connect can be added.
(Flood icon selected only) Sets the margin to be left around any text or dimensional text that
Text Margin
is included in the selected area.
9.6.1.5 Add to Graphic Group
The Add to Graphic Group tool is used to add elements to a graphic group or create a named group.
You can use selection sets to select multiple elements to include in a named group or graphic group.
To create a graphic group or add elements to a graphic group
1. Select the Add to Graphic Group tool.

If the element is not in a graphic group, a new graphic group is created.
If the element is in a graphic group, all elements subsequently identified are added to that graphic group.
3. Identify another element(s) to add to the graphic group.
4. Accept the graphic group.
Using a selection set to add elements to a graphic group
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the required elements.
3. Accept the graphic group.

To create a named group
2. Click the Create New Named Group icon.

The Create Named Group dialog box opens.
3. Enter a name and, optionally, a description for the named group.
4. (Optional) If required, turn on Select all members when any member selected.
(With this setting on and when Graphic Group lock is on, all members will be selected when any member
is selected with the Element Selection tool. This applies regardless of the members' propagation settings.
5. Click OK.
To add elements to a Named Group
2. Turn on Named Group.
3. From the Named Group drop-down list, select the Named Group.
4. Set the Member Type to the required setting.
5. Identify the element(s) to be added.
6. Accept.

Tool Settings for Add to Graphic Group:
(Existing named groups present in model only) If on, lets you select from the drop-down list
Named Group
of existing named groups present in the model.
Create New
Named Group Opens the Create Named Group dialog, which lets you create a new named group.
icon
Open Named
Opens the Named Groups dialog, which lets you create and modify named groups and their
Group Dialog
hierarchies.
icon
Lets you define the way that other members of a named group are affected when a member
of the named group is manipulated or selected.
For each Member Type option, three Change Propagation settings control the behavior of
members in a named group. They define when a member can propagate changes To other
members, can have changes propagated From other members, and can propagate changes
To other groups.
In each case, the Change Propagation options are Group Lock (effective only when Graphic
Group Lock is on), Never (propagation never occurs), or Always (propagation always occurs).
Member Type Another setting, Selectable, which can be toggled on/off in the Named Groups dialog, can
override the above settings when members are chosen with the Element Selection tool. If
Selectable is on, then all members of the named group will be selected. If it is off, the above
change propagation rules apply.
• Active — Change Propagation is set to Group Lock for To other members and From
other members, and to Never for To other groups.
• Passive — Change Propagation is set to Never for To other members, to Group Lock
for From other members, and to Never for To other groups.
• Custom — When selected, the tool settings dialog expands to provide option
menus that let you set the Change Propagation as required for the three options:
To other members, From other members, To other groups.

9.6.1.6 Drop from Graphic Group
The Drop from Graphic Group tool is used to remove elements from a graphic group or a named group or break up
the graphic group into its components.
You can use selection sets to select multiple elements to drop from the graphic group.
To remove an element(s) from a graphic group
1. In the Settings menu's Locks submenu , turn off Graphic Group.

2. Select the Drop from Graphic Group tool.
3. Identify the element(s) to be removed from the graphic group.
4. Accept the drop.
To use a selection set to remove elements from a graphic group
1. Use the Element Selection tool, or the Power Selector tool to select the required elements.
3. Accept to drop the selected elements.
To break up an entire graphic group
1. In the Settings menu's Locks submenu , turn on Graphic Group.

3. Identify a member of the graphic group.
4. Accept the drop.
Tool Settings for Drop from Graphic Group:
Drop From If on, lets you drop elements from named groups. If off, elements can be dropped from
Named Groups graphic groups only.

9.6.1.7 Group Holes
The Group Holes tool is used to identify a solid element and the hole elements to be associated with the solid.
The solid and its associated hole(s) can be shapes, ellipses, and/or complex shapes that are in the same plane.
Holes are not patterned and appear “transparent” in rendered views.
To group a solid and a hole(s)
1. Select the Group Holes tool.
2. Identify the solid element.
3. Identify the hole element(s) to associate with the solid.
4. Accept the last element.
5. Reset.
The solid and holes are consolidated into a group (orphan cell). The area attribute (solid or hole) of each
element is set appropriately. The holes immediately follow the solid in the group definition.
Tool Settings - None.

Chapter 10 – Text
Table of Contents:
10.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 3
10.2 TEXT ATTRIBUTES .......................................................................................................... 3
10.2.1 FONT ........................................................................................................................ 4
10.2.2 TEXT HEIGHT AND WIDTH............................................................................................... 5
10.2.3 TEXT STYLE ................................................................................................................. 6
10.2.3.1 Text Styles Dialog Box .............................................................................................................................8
10.2.4 JUSTIFICATION ............................................................................................................. 9
10.2.5 LINE SPACING ............................................................................................................ 10
10.2.6 INTER-CHARACTER SPACING .......................................................................................... 10
10.3 TEXT PLACEMENT METHODS ....................................................................................... 11
10.3.1 ACTIVE ANGLE ........................................................................................................... 12
10.4 TEXT TOOL BOX ........................................................................................................... 13
10.4.1 PLACE TEXT .............................................................................................................. 15
10.4.2 PLACE NOTE ............................................................................................................. 18
10.4.3 EDIT TEXT................................................................................................................. 20
10.4.4 SPELL CHECKER .......................................................................................................... 22
10.4.5 DISPLAY TEXT ATTRIBUTES ............................................................................................ 24
10.4.6 MATCH TEXT ATTRIBUTES ............................................................................................ 25
10.4.7 CHANGE TEXT ATTRIBUTES............................................................................................ 26
10.4.8 PLACE TEXT NODE ...................................................................................................... 28
10.4.9 COPY AND INCREMENT TEXT.......................................................................................... 29
10.4.10 COPY ENTER DATA FIELD ............................................................................................ 30
10.4.11 COPY/INCREMENT ENTER DATA FIELD ........................................................................... 32
10.4.12 FILL IN SINGLE ENTER DATA FIELD ................................................................................. 32
10.4.13 AUTO FILL IN ENTER DATA FIELDS ................................................................................. 33
10.5 TEXT EDITOR WINDOW ............................................................................................... 34
10.5.1 ENTER DATA FIELDS .................................................................................................... 35
10.6 FIND AND REPLACE TEXT ............................................................................................. 36
10.7 FIELDS ......................................................................................................................... 37

Chapter 10 – Text

Chapter 10 – Text
10.1 Introduction
To this point, all of the tools covered have been to place, manipulate, or modify geometry in a drawing. This
chapter will help you understand how to place annotations such as text in MicroStation, to comply with the CADD
Standards, using many of the text tools.
MicroStation has a variety of tools with which you can annotate the geometry in your designs. You can place
single or multiline text.
 It is advisable to separate annotations from design. Annotations are normally placed in the Sheet models.
Using this approach will enable you to leverage models to structure your project data. You will be able to
reuse designs in other drawings in whole or in part while avoiding conflicts in annotation or presentation
options.
10.2 Text Attributes

Before using any Text tools or placing any text in a design file, it is a good idea to understand what Text Attributes
are and how to use them properly in the design file. Since Text elements are unique they have two distinct sets of
attributes that need to be set before placing text in a design file such as:
1) Element attributes such as level, color, and weight.
2) Text attributes such as font, text size, justification, etc.
Selecting the appropriate Element attributes is useful in identifying the text easily or being able to turn off/on the
text level in the file when desired.
Text attributes can be set in the tool settings window at the time of placement or can be set using a Text Style. A
Text Style is a named collection of text parameters that is created by an administrator.
 Text elements can be placed with or without a Text Style, but text elements placed with a text style are
automatically updated if the style is modified.

Chapter 10 – Text
When a text placement tool is activated the Tool Settings Window appears that contains most of the basic settings
for text placement as shown below.
These settings in the Tool Settings Window are Text attributes which need to be set prior to placing any text in the
design file, therefore, it is highly recommended to use Text Styles. The Text attributes Height, Width, Font, Line
Spacing, etc are automatically set if a Text Style is selected. However, there are times when you need to set some
text attributes that are different from the Text Style.
The following sections describe the Text Attributes used in MicroStation when selecting a text placement tool.
10.2.1 Font
Font Attributes are used to define the typeface of text elements that are stored in external files that are
referenced by MicroStation. This helps with the management of fonts and helps to keep design file size
reasonable.
MicroStation supports three types of fonts: True Type, RSC (MicroStation Resource Font) and SHX (AutoCAD
Fonts). ODOT CADD standards only use the RSC Fonts on plans.
MicroStation resource fonts used for creating text are stored in font libraries called MicroStation resource (.rsc)
files and each font is assigned a number, but only one font by a given number can be used at a time during a
MicroStation session. MicroStation fonts allow you to use special characters and symbols which unlike True Type
fonts do not.
ODOT has defined a MicroStation Resource Font file or called a Font Library, ODOT_Fonts.rsc which contains the
following fonts:
FONT 30 - Straight, proportional characters with uppercase, lowercase, and fractions

FONT 31 - Slanted, proportional characters with uppercase, lowercase, and fractions.
FONT 57 - Straight, proportional characters with the Greek alphabet in upper and lowercase.
FONT 70 - Block filled.

Chapter 10 – Text
Fonts 30 and 31 contain special symbols and characters used on ODOT plans. These are shown in the CADD
Manual, Appendix B Fonts for reference at the following web site:
http://www.dot.state.oh.us/Divisions/Engineering/CaddMapping/CADD/CADD%20Manual/AppendixB.PDF
 It is important to use these fonts so that the final plotted version matches the electronic version of the file.
Only the fonts provided by ODOT (30, 31, 57, and 70) are acceptable for use on ODOT plans. True Type
fonts shall not be used on ODOT plans.
The MicroStation configuration variable MS_SYMBRSC is used to specify the font library so you can use and read
the correct fonts in the design file.
 When MicroStation cannot find the requested font on the system, it uses the appropriate default font
specified by a configuration variable.
10.2.2 Text Height and Width
Text Size includes the Text Height and Width Attributes which can be different values that determine the overall
size of the text. The big question is “what should these values be?” For most users, these values are dictated by
client or company standards.
ODOT has defined standard text sizes to ensure uniform legibility on all plan sheets. Standard text size refers to
the size of the text on the finished plot, not the text size in the design file. The correct design file text size is
dependent upon the intended plot scale. ODOT standard text sizes for the finished plot scale are shown in the
following table:
Text Type Plotted Text Size

Normal 0.14”
Subtitle 0.17”
Title 0.20”
Main Title 0.25”
To calculate text size used in a MicroStation design file for various scaled plan sheets use this method:
Text Size x Plotting Scale = Design File Text Size
Example: 0.14 inch x 20 feet/inch = 2.8 feet
 Text sizes smaller than the Normal text size (0.14”) are not acceptable.
 Text Size can be influenced by the use of the Model Annotation Scale. When the Annotation Scale Lock is
on all newly created text is automatically scaled by the Model Annotation Scale factor, which is specified in
the Model Properties dialog box.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.2.3 Text Style
A Text Style attribute is a pre-defined named group of text parameters, for example font, text size (width and
height), line spacing, etc. Text styles enable text to be placed in a model in a consistent and automated manner.
Text Styles are usually created at a scale of 1 to 1 for plotting. Then you enable the Annotation Scale lock as shown
below when placing the text in a file so that it appears the correct size. You do not have to worry about calculating
the size of the text.
ODOT provides text styles, which are defined in a MicroStation DGN Library, ODOT_Styles.dgnlib, which is located
in the i:\ODOTstd\V8istd\dgnlib\ directory. This file is attached for use by the MicroStation configuration variable
MS_DGNLIB.

Chapter 10 – Text
The following text styles have been configured using the Standard ODOT text sizes, fonts, and line spacing for use
on ODOT plans:
Style Name *Text Size *Line Spacing Font

Font 70-Main Title 0.25 0.50 70
Font 70-Title 0.20 0.50 70
Font 70-Sub Title 0.17 0.50 70
Slanted-Normal FX Spacing 0.14 0.50 31
Slanted-Normal LS=0.50 0.14 0.50 31
Slanted-Sub Title 0.17 0.50 31
Slanted-Title 0.20 0.50 31
Straight-Normal FX Spacing 0.14 0.50 30
Straight-Normal LS=0.50 0.14 0.50 30
Straight-Sub Title 0.17 0.50 30
Straight-Title 0.20 0.50 30
*Text size and Line Spacing units are “inches”.
The active text style can be selected in MicroStation prior to placing text. Select the Text Style from the list of all
available text styles like shown below:

Chapter 10 – Text
10.2.3.1 Text Styles Dialog Box
The Text Styles dialog box contains a list of all the text styles that exist in the design file, and the settings for each
text style. When a new file is created using ODOT’s CADD Standards all appropriate text styles are loaded into the
design files. However, there are times when you need to modify some text parameters that are different from the
Text Style.
The Text Styles dialog can be accessed two different ways; by selecting Element > Text Styles from the Main Menu
Bar or the magnifying glass icon on the Place Text Tool Settings Window when a text placement command is active
as shown below.
The grey book icon indicates that the style is a library style that has not been copied locally.
A green check mark appears next to the text style when it has been copied locally, and still
matches the library text style.
The blue delta icon appears next to a text style if it has been copied locally, but no longer
matches the library copy.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.2.4 Justification
A Text Justification attribute is the way by text is placed in the design file. As with most other elements, text is
positioned in the model with a data point, which in this case, is referred to as the origin, or insertion point. The
text displays around this point based on the justification of the text.
Users can set the way by which text is placed using the Justification option menu in the Tool Settings Window.
Some examples of text justification options shown below are: Left Top, Center Center, Right Bottom.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.2.5 Line Spacing
Text Line Spacing attribute refers to the distance between individual lines of text in multi-line text. This value also
specifies the distance text is placed away from an element when the placement Method is set to Above, Below, or
Along. Line spacing is commonly set to ½ of the text height.
The Text Line Spacing is relative to the Text Height. In the previous versions of MicroStation these distances were
an absolute value in master units. If the text height changed dramatically, the spacing could become
inappropriate. Now, if the text height changes the spacing adjusts relative to the change in the text height. The
Text Line Spacing is a factor of the Text Height.
 In general, for ODOT plans text line spacing should be one-half the text height. The spacing between lines
on summary, sub-summary, general note sheets and charts is generally equal to the minimum text size. If
needed it is permissible to use Text Line Spacing equal to the minimum text size.
For ODOT plans the general Line Spacing is set at 0.50” as the scale factor to have the line spacing half the text
height. If needed other Line Spacing factors are available for ODOT’s Text Styles. The following are the Line
Spacing factors:
Normal Text Size LS=0.50: 0.14” x Line Spacing 0.50” = a Line Spacing of 0.07”
Sub-Title Text Size: 0.17” x Line Spacing 0.50” = a Line Spacing of 0.085”
Title Text Size: 0.20” x Line Spacing 0.50” = a Line Spacing of 0.10”
Main Title Text Size: 0.25” x Line Spacing 0.50” = a Line Spacing of 0.125”
10.2.6 Inter-Character Spacing
The Inter-Character Spacing attribute sets the spacing between text characters. All characters have an inherent
spacing to provide a gap between them. Inter-character Spacing allows the user to increase or decrease this
distance to create special effects. Most users do not adjust this value very often, but the ability to make the
adjustment may become valuable when placing text along elements.
Users can set the way by which text is placed using the Inter-Character Spacing option menu in the Tool Settings
Window.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.3 Text Placement Methods

There are several different Methods to placing text in the model. Users can set the way by which text is placed
using the Method option menu in the Tool Settings Window.
Method Description
Places text by defining the location of the text origin, which is the justification
By Origin
point (Left Top, for example) and at the Active Angle.
Places a single line of text to fit between two data points.
Fitted
The text is rotated and sized according to the spacing and angle between the
two points.
Similar to the By Origin method, except the text will not rotate when you rotate
View Independent
your view.
Similar to the Fitted method, except the text will not rotate when you rotate
Fitted VI (View Independent)
your view.
Places text above a selected element.
The text is automatically rotated to the angle of the element you identify. The
Above Element
position of the text, relative to the selected element data point, is determined
by the Justification setting. The spacing between the text and element is
determined by the Line Spacing setting.
Places text below a selected element.
Below Element The text is automatically rotated to the angle of the element you identify. The
spacing and positioning of text is determined in the same manner as the Above
Element method.
Places text on a selected element automatically removing the portion of the
On Element element and places the text inside the portion removed. The text is
automatically rotated to the angle of the element you identified.
Places text along an element above or below and aligns with the contour of the
element.
Along Element
Each character is placed as a single text element that is a component of a
graphic group.
Places text within a rectangular element. The rectangular element is placed
during the command. Justification is always orientated to the upper left vertex
Word Wrap
of the rectangular element. If a word is entered that exceeds the limit of the
box, that word drops to the next line.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.3.1 Active Angle
The Active Angle value can be set in the Place Text Tool Settings Window, and is essential when placing text. The
Active Angle setting affects many tools as it specifies the angle, in degrees at which elements are placed in the
design file.
Text placed, when using Method By Origin or View Independent, in a drawing is aligned with this active angle.
This allows text placement at any angle as shown below. When the value of the Active Angle is set to 0, text
appears horizontal across the screen.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.4 Text Tool Box

The Text tool box is one of the largest tool boxes available in MicroStation. It contains the most commonly used
tools for creating and editing text. To access these tools, select the Text tool box from the Task Navigation Tool
Box using one of the following methods shown below.

Chapter 10 – Text
 It is highly recommended to use the default text editor window which is the Word Processor style
window, so the text tools work properly.
Text Tool Box:
Place Text Used to place text and to fill an empty text node.
Place Note Used to place a note with a leader on a drawing.
Edit Text Used to edit existing text elements.
Spell Checker Used to check the spelling of existing text elements.
Display Text Attributes Used to display the attributes of text elements.
Used to set the active text settings the same as the

Match Text Attributes
corresponding attributes of text in the design.
Change Text Attributes Used to change the attributes of existing text elements.
Place Text Node Places a text node in a drawing.
Used to copy a text element and increment it by a user defined

Copy and Increment Text
value.
Used to copy the contents of one Enter Data Field to another

Copy Enter Data Field
Enter Data Field.
Copy and Increment Enter Used to copy an Enter Data Field and increment it by a user
Data Field defined value.
Fill in Single Enter Data Field Used to fill in a single Enter Data Field.
Auto Fill in Enter Data Fields Used to fill in all enter data field in the design file.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.4.1 Place Text
The Place Text tool is the most common tool for placing text in the design file.
To place text at the Active Angle and active text settings
1. Select the Place Text tool.

The Text Editor window opens if it is not already open.
2. Set Method to By Origin or View Independent.
3. Choose the desired text style.
4. In the Text Editor window, type the text.

As you move the pointer, the text displays dynamically.
5. Enter a data point to position the origin of the text element.
6. Return to step 5 to place another instance of the same text.

Or
Return to step 4 to place other text.
To place fitted text

2. Set Method to Fitted or Fitted V(iew) I(ndependent).
4. Enter a data point to define the left end of the fitted text.
5. Enter a data point to position the right end of the text and define the height, width, and rotation angle.
6. Return to step 4 to place another instance of the same text.

Or
Return to step 3 to place other text.

Chapter 10 – Text
To place text above or below an element

2. Set Method to Above Element or Below Element.
4. Identify the line segment. The data point positions the left-to-right origin of the text element.
5. Accept the text.
To place text along an element

2. Set Method to Along Element.
4. Enter a data point along the element to position the origin.

The text displays both above and below the element. If the text is too long to fit along the element with
the current Interchar(acter) Spacing, it is truncated.
5. Enter a data point to position the text either above or below the element.
To Place Word Wrap text

2. Set Method to Word Wrap
3. Choose two points to define the boundaries of the word wrap
5. Left mouse click on the screen to accept.

Chapter 10 – Text
Tool Settings for the Place Text:

Magnifying Glass
Opens the Text Styles dialog which is used to create and modify text styles.
icon
Reset Style Removes text style override(s) and resets the style to its previously saved version.
Sets the Annotation Scale Lock. When this lock is on, the annotation scale is applied to any
text that is placed in the model.
Annotation Scale
Lock icon
The annotation scale is set in the Model Properties dialog. It defines the scale for text and
dimensioning in the model.
• If on, applies style changes to all text in the Text Editor window. For example, if
you key in text in the Text Editor, then click the Bold icon, all text becomes bold.
Apply changes to
all text • If off, applies style changes to selected text in the Text Editor window, or to new
text. For example, if you key in text in the Text Editor, then click the Bold icon, only
selected text becomes bold. Any new text will also be bold.
When on, forces subsequently entered text to be attached to empty text nodes. If an empty
node is not available, no text is placed.
Text Node Lock
Note: Text Nodes are like place holders for multi-line text that are used to place
text later in the design file. The Text attributes are pre set so when you place the
text it assumes the attributes of the text node.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.4.2 Place Note
The Place Note tool is used to place lines of text with a leader line and arrow, or a callout without a leader.
To place a note
1. Select the Place Note tool.

2. Select the Place Text mode icon.

If there is no text in the Text Editor window, only the leader line and arrow are placed.
4. Enter a data point to position the terminator arrowhead.

If Location (Dimension Styles dialog) is set to Automatic or Semi-Automatic, this data point indicates the
location of the end of the leader line and text, and ends the note.
If Location is set to Manual, you can enter more data points to define additional vertices of the leader
line. Reset to end the note.
To place a callout
1. Select the Place Note tool.

2. Select the Place Callout mode icon.

The callout text is now on the pointer.
4. Enter a data point to place the callout.

Chapter 10 – Text
Tool Settings for Place Note:

Sets the tool mode to Place Note. Used to place lines of text with a leader line and arrow, as
Place Note
a dimension element.
Sets the tool mode to Place Callout. Used to place lines of text with a callout, as a dimension
Place Callout
element.
Dimension Style Sets the current dimension style from a list of all available dimension styles.
Sets the rotation of the text relative to the leader line: Horizontal, Vertical, or In Line.
Text Rotation
The default is value is set by the dimension style (Text category).
Sets the type of frame (if any) — None, Line, Box, Rotated Box, Circle, Capsule, Hexagon,
Rotated Hexagon, Triangle, Pentagon, or Octagonal.
Text Frame
The default is value is set by the dimension style (Text category).
Annotation Scale text that is placed in the model.
Lock icon The annotation scale is set in the Model Properties dialog. It defines the scale for text and
• If on, applies style changes to all text in the Text Editor window. For example, if you
key in text in the Text Editor, then click the Bold icon, all text becomes bold.
Apply changes to
• If off, applies style changes to selected text in the Text Editor window, or to new
all text
text. For example, if you key in text in the Text Editor, then click the Bold icon, only
selected text becomes bold. Any new text will also be bold.

Chapter 10 – Text
Determines whether the leader line can be placed with multiple segments. If set to Manual,
you can place multiple segments. If set to Automatic, you can only place one segment of a
Location
leader line.
The default setting is set by the dimension style (Placement category).
Leader Type Sets the type of leader: Line or Curve.
Controls how the note is placed:
• Terminator — If selected, the first data point that you enter places the end of the
terminator, and the last data point places the text.
Start At • Text — If selected, the first data point that you enter places the text, and the last
data point places the end of the terminator. You can place multiple leaders on a
single piece of text by holding the <Ctrl> key down. Each data point you select
(after the first data point), places an additional leader on the text.
Horizontal
Sets the leader attachment side: Auto, Left or Right.
Attachment
If on, uses an in-line leader. The in-line leader is an extra segment of the leader that aligned
In-line Leader with the text.
Turning this off and setting Start At to Text enables a note to placed without a leader.
• If on, snapping to the element being dimensioned causes an association point to be
created.
Association
• If off, no associations are created.
Association is active only when the Association lock is on.
10.4.3 Edit Text
The Edit Text tool is used to edit text in a text, text node, or dimension element to replace, add, or delete
characters. Text Justification is preserved if the text is lengthened or shortened.
To edit text
1. Select the Edit Text tool.
2. Identify the text.

The Text Editor window opens, with the text already highlighted.
3. In the Text Editor window, make the desired changes to the text. To start a new text line while typing in
the edit field, press <Enter>.
4. To accept the changes, enter a data point in a view.

Or
Press <Ctrl><Enter>.
Or
Identify another text element in the design.

Chapter 10 – Text
 Double-clicking a text element with the Element Selection tool pointer activates the Edit Text tool and
opens the Text Editor window.
 A single-line text element is changed to a text node if a line is added to it.

 Dragging the handle of a selected text element with the Element Selection tool pointer modifies the text:
• To change the aspect ratio of the area in which the text resides, drag a corner handle. This may
cause the text to rewrap; the text need not have been placed using the Word Wrap method for
rewrapping to occur.
• To scale the text, drag either the top, bottom, left, or right handle.
Tool Settings for Edit Text:

Magnifying Glass (Text Editor Style preference set to Word Processor) Opens the Text Styles dialog which is
icon used to create and modify text styles.
Reset Style Removes text style override(s) and resets the style to its previously saved version.
If on, applies style changes to all text in the Text Editor window. For example, if you key in
text in the Text Editor, then click the Bold icon, all text becomes bold.
Apply changes to
all text If off, applies style changes to selected text in the Text Editor window, or to new text. For
example, if you key in text in the Text Editor, then click the Bold icon, only selected text
becomes bold. Any new text will also be bold.
Annotation Scale
Lock icon

Chapter 10 – Text
10.4.4 Spell Checker
The Spell Checker tool is used to review text, text nodes, tags, dimensions, notes and symbols for spelling errors.
For every unrecognized word, Spell Checker offers a list of suggestions. You can choose to change the flagged
word with one of the suggested words, or to leave it as is by clicking the Ignore button. If you want Spell Checker
to automatically ignore certain words that it normally might flag, such as a product´s name or an abbreviation, you
can add them to a special user dictionary.
To search for and correct spelling errors in an entire file
1. Select the Spell Checker tool.

Identify element or accept to scan whole file displays in the status bar.
2. Click on an empty area in the design file to scan the entire file.
If there are no misspelled or unrecognized words in the selected text, the status bar displays the message,
“Spelling Check Complete.” If there are misspelled or unrecognized words, the erroneous text zooms in
and the Spell Checker dialog opens with the flagged word highlighted in the Not in dictionary field, and
the first word from the Suggestions list box displayed in the Change to field.
3. If you are satisfied with the word in the Change to field, click Change.
Or
Make another selection from the Suggestions list box and click Change.
Or
Type a new word in the Change to field and click Change.
The text from the Change to field replaces the highlighted text, and the search advances to the next
unrecognized word in the Not in dictionary field. After the last flagged word is modified, replaced or
skipped, the Spell Checker dialog closes, and any changes made to the selected text are updated in the
design file.

Chapter 10 – Text
To search for and correct spelling errors in a text element, text node, dimension or note
1. Select the Spell Checker tool.
2. Identify a text element, text node, dimension or note.
3. Accept the selected text.

If there are no misspelled or unrecognized words in the selected text, the status bar displays the message,
“Spelling Check Complete.” If there are misspelled or unrecognized words in the selected text, the Spell
Checker dialog box opens with the flagged word highlighted in the Not in dictionary field, and the first
word from the Suggestions list box displayed in the Change to field.
4. If you are satisfied with the word in the Change to field, click Change.
Or
Make another selection from the Suggestions list box and click Change.
Or
Type a new word in the Change to field and click Change.
The text from the Change to field replaces the highlighted text, and the search advances to the next
unrecognized word in the Not in dictionary field. After the last flagged word is modified, replaced or
skipped, the Spell Checker dialog box closes, and any changes made to the selected text are updated in
the design file.
Tool Settings for Spell Checker:

If on, the fence contents are checked for spelling errors. The option menu sets the Fence
Use Fence
(Selection) Mode.
The Spell Checker dialog box is used to review text element, text node, dimension or note for spelling errors. Spell
Checker searches the selected text elements and flags any words that do not have a match in its dictionary. You
can review individually selected text elements and/or selection sets within the fence contents.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.4.5 Display Text Attributes
The Display Text Attributes tool is used to display the attributes of a text or multi-line text node element.
To display attributes of a text element
1. Select the Display Text Attributes tool.
2. Identify the text or text node element.
Type These display in the status bar
Text Height (TH), Width (TW), Level (LV), and Font name (FT).
Node number (NN), Line Length (LL), Line Spacing (LS), Level (LV), and Font
Text node
name (FT).
3. If the element is a text node, identify it again to display the text Height, Width, Level, and Font name.
 Text attribute information can also be displayed by choosing Information from the Element menu.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.4.6 Match Text Attributes
The Match Text Attributes tool is used to set the active text settings (such as Justification, Font, Line Spacing Type,
Underline, Slant Angle, and Inter Character Spacing) the same as the corresponding attributes of text in the design.
To match the active text settings to the attributes of a text element
1. In the Text toolbox, select the Match Text Attributes tool.
2. Identify the previously placed text element.
3. Accept the match.
4. Identify a previously placed text element with a data point.
5. To accept the match, enter another data point.
Tool Settings - None

Chapter 10 – Text
10.4.7 Change Text Attributes
The Match Text Attributes tool is used to change selected text-specific element attributes of a text or tag
element(s). Tool settings controls are used to specify the new attribute settings. The controls are similar to those in
the Text Styles dialog (Element > Text Styles) and, as do the controls in the Text Styles dialog, change the active
text attributes.
To change a text or tag element's attributes (those that are set to On)
1. Select the Change Text Attributes tool.
2. Identify the text or tag element.
Tool Settings for Change Text Attributes:
Text Style Sets the current text style from a list of all available text styles.
Browse icon Opens the Text Styles dialog which is used to create and modify text styles.
Use Fence If on, the selected attributes of the fence contents are changed.

Chapter 10 – Text
Font If on, sets and changes element(s) to active Font.
Height If on, sets and changes element(s) to active Text Height.
Width If on, sets and changes element(s) to active Text Width.
Line Spacing If on, sets and changes element(s) to active Line Spacing.
Line Space Type If on, sets the type of vertical spacing between lines of text.
Interchar(acter)
If on, sets and changes element(s) to active Intercharacter Spacing setting.
Spacing
Slant If on, sets and changes element(s) to active Slant setting.
If on, sets and changes element(s) to active Underline setting — choose Enable (on) or
Underline
Disable (off).
If on, sets and changes element(s) to active Vertical Text setting — choose Enable (on) or
Vertical
Disable (off).
If on, determines the effect of rotating the view on the orientation of the text:
View
Dependent — Rotating the view will rotate the text.
Independent — Text will stay at the same orientation regardless of the view rotation.
Justification If on, sets and changes element(s) to active Text Justification.
If on, lets you use the Annotation Scale lock icon to, change, add, or remove, Annotation
Annotation Scale
Scale for all the text.
(Annotation Scale setting enabled only) If on, adds annotation scale to all the text.
Annotation Scale If off, removes annotation scale from all the text.
lock icon

Chapter 10 – Text
10.4.8 Place Text Node
The Place Text Node tool is used to place empty text nodes in a design to be filled with text later using the Place
Text tool or to be linked with a database row using the Attach Displayable Attributes tool. The text node is placed
with the active text node attributes. When text is attached to the text node, the text editor initializes with the
settings of the text node and it assumes the attributes of the text node, unless text attributes are explicitly
changed before placing text into the text node.
To place a text node
1. Select the Place Text Node tool.
2. Enter a data point to position the text node origin.
Tool Settings for Place Text Node:

View
If on, text appears at the same orientation regardless of the view rotation.
Independent
Sets the angle, in degrees, at which text is placed, when the Place Text tool's Method is By
Active Angle
Origin or View Independent.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.4.9 Copy and Increment Text
The Copy and Increment Text tool is used to copy and increment a text element that contains numbers.
To Copy and Increment Text
1. Select the Copy and Increment Text tool.
2. Identify the text element to copy and increment.
3. Enter a data point to position the copied and incremented text.
4. Continue entering data points to place other copied and incremented text.
Tool Settings for Copy and Increment Text:
The amount by which the numeric part of the text element is increased (can be any integer
Tag Increment
between -32768 and 32767, inclusive). Can also be set by keying in TI=<value>.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.4.10 Copy Enter Data Field
The Copy Enter Data Field tool is used to copy the contents of one enter data field to another. If the source field is
longer than the destination field, the copied text is truncated. The target field justification (left, center, or right)
determines the text positioning within the field.
To copy an enter data field
1. Select the Copy Enter Data Field tool.
2. Identify the source enter data field.

A rectangle displays around the enter data field.
3. Identify the destination enter data field.
4. Reset to stop copying the enter data field.

Or
Return to step 3 to continue to make more copies of the same enter data field.
 Enter Data Fields can be seen as placeholders for text. An Enter Data Field is created by typing an
underscore character “_” into the Text Editor window. Each underscore is a placeholder for a single
character.
 Enter Data Fields may be used in title blocks as a placeholder for the date or designer’s name. They
are also, often used in conjunction with cells.

Chapter 10 – Text
 Data field underscore symbols are controlled by the View Attributes dialog by toggling on or off the
Data Fields option.
• The display of both Text and Enter Data Fields can be controlled through the View Attributes
dialog box as shown below.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.4.11 Copy/Increment Enter Data Field
The Copy/Increment Enter Data Field tool is used to copy and increment the contents of an enter data field that
contains numbers into another enter data field.
To copy and increment an enter data field
1. Select the Copy and Increment Enter Data Field tool.
2. Identify the enter data field to copy and increment.
3. Identify the enter data field(s) in which to place the incremented copy(s).
Tool Settings for Copy/Increment Text:
The amount by which the numeric part of the text element is increased (can be any integer
Tag Increment
between -32768 and 32767, inclusive). Can also be set by keying in TI=<value>.
10.4.12 Fill In Single Enter Data Field
The Fill In Single Enter Data Field tool is used to fill in or change an enter data field. The field's justification (left,
center, or right) determines the text position in the field.
To fill in an enter data field
1. Select the Fill In Single Enter Data Field tool.
2. Identify the enter data field. A rectangle is drawn around the enter data field and the field contents
display.
3. In the Text Editor window, key in the new contents for the enter data field.
4. Press <Enter> and the previous field contents are replaced.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.4.13 Auto Fill In Enter Data Fields
The Auto Fill In Enter Data Fields tool is used to fill in all empty enter data fields in a view. The field justification
(left, center, or right) determines the text positioning within the field.
To automatically fill in enter data fields
1. Select the Automatic Fill In Enter Data Fields tool.
2. Select the desired view.

The first blank enter data field is located and a rectangle displays around it.
3. In the Text Editor window, key in the new contents for the enter data field.
4. Left mouse click in the drawing window to accept the text and go to the next enter data field.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.5 Text Editor Window

Whenever a text placement tool is activated, the Text Editor – Word Processor dialog box appears. This dialog box
is used to compose and format text before it is placed on the drawing. Single line or paragraph text can be created
in the Text Editor dialog box.
The Text Editor - Word Processor window contains the following options in the tool bar that can be used to affect
the appearance of text.
• Font – sets the font for the text in the editing dialog box.
• Bold – is not available with the MicroStation RSC Fonts. This option is only available with True Type
Fonts.
• Italics - is not available with the MicroStation RSC Fonts. This option is only available with True Type
Fonts.
• Underline – underlines the text in the editing dialog box.
• Spelling – opens the Spell Checker dialog box which is used to spell check the text in the editor.
• Stacked Fraction – is not available with the MicroStation RSC Fonts. This causes numeric characters
in the text window that are separated by a slash to be placed in the model as single characters with
the numerator over the denominator. There is Stacked Fraction Top Align, Center Align and Bottom
Align. ODOT already provides stacked fractions in the font library.
• Color – sets the color of the text in the editor dialog box.
• Insert Symbol – opens the symbols dialog box which is used to insert symbols and create custom
symbol list.
• Insert Field – opens the Field Type dialog box which is used to select the type of field being created.
• Superscript – places the text as superscript.
• Subscript – places the text as subscript.

Chapter 10 – Text
Tab ruler
Defines tabs stops in text and allows you to place text with tabs, first line and paragraph indents. Right-clicking on
the Tab ruler allows you to save, retrieve and delete an indent or tab scheme.
• Choosing Indents and Tabs opens the Indents and Tabs Settings dialog.
• Choosing Tab Schemes opens the Tab Schemes dialog.
• Choosing Save Scheme opens the Save Scheme dialog.
Pop-up Menu
The right-click, pop-up menu contains items that are used to copy, move, delete, and select text, search the
contents of the editor, and insert fields derived from properties.
• Cut - Cuts the selected text.

• Copy - Copies the selected text.
• Paste - Pastes the text on the Clipboard to the location of the insertion point in the editor.
• Delete - Deletes the selected text.
• Select All - Selects all text.
• Clear - Clears the selected text.
• Find - Choosing Find from the right-click, pop-up menu, opens the Find dialog.
• Change Case
o Upper Case — converts text to all upper case.
o Lower Case — converts text to all lower case.
• Insert Enter Data Field - Opens the Edit Enter Data Field dialog for creating an enter data field when in
either placement or edit mode.
• Insert Field - Opens the Field Type dialog for editing the selected field.
 The word processor will also open if you double click on a text string with the Element Selection tool.
 Text can be copied and pasted from other applications into the Word Processor and all formatting will be
retained.
10.5.1 Enter Data Fields
Enter data fields are empty text place holders that are positioned in the file, but filled with text characters later.
Each enter data field is placed with a full set of text attributes that will be applied to the text characters upon entry
into the data field.
The default character used to represent a data field is a underbar (_) and each underbar is a placeholder for a
single character of text. Select Place Text, enter any text you want and then an underbar for each enter data filed
you want or Right Click in the Text Editor – Window Processor window and select Insert Enter Data Field. This
brings up a the Edit Enter Data Field dialog box which allows to enter the Length and Justification.
Enter data fields will display as underbars unless the Data Fields option is disabled in the View Attributes dialog.
When this toggle is disabled, the enter data fields will not display but can still be used with the text data field tools.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.6 Find and Replace Text

The Find/Replace Text enables you to search for all, or portions of, a specific text string in either a DGN or DWG
file. Once the text is found, it can be replaced with a different string. You can replace single instances, those
within a fence, or all instances.
You can replace some or all instances of a given string with a replacement string, as well as append or prepend the
replacement string while retaining the original string.
The find text function works in the active model and all of its references, while the replace function works only in
the active model.
The Find/Replace Text functionality supports dimensions, text, text nodes and notes.
The Find/Replace Text tool is activated by selecting Edit > Find/Replace Text from the Main Menu Bar.
When a search is finished, a dialog notifies you that the search is complete and gives you the option to restore the
view to its state at the time of the first find operation.

Chapter 10 – Text
10.7 Fields
As you place or edit text you can insert Fields in the text whose content is derived from object properties.
Properties of the following types of objects can be used as sources for field content:
• elements
• models
• files
A field can appear anywhere within a piece of text and can span multiple words or lines within multiple line text.
In addition to inserting fields in text, you can also insert placeholder fields in a cell or cell model. A placeholder
field is a field that is waiting for a target. When the target is provided, it can re-evaluate and display its property
value. In the absence of the target, the field simply displays its field name. The target may be provided by means
of a link.
For example, you might create a monument cell that contains a Place Holder Cell Properties field (origin). In the
cell model the field displays the field name origin. When the cell is placed in another model and the fields are
updated, the field displays the origin of the cell.
Placeholder fields are primarily of three types.

• Fields pointing to the properties of a parent cell
• Fields pointing to the properties of a parent Digital Signature cell
• Fields pointing to the properties of a link target attached to a parent cell
 In order to distinguish fields from text that is entered directly, fields have gray background. Its display can
be toggled in the Preferences dialog.
You can place fields that update when elements are modified. Use the field type element properties to create
these types of fields. You then identify the element you want to use so that the applicable properties can be
determined. Select from them to create the field.

Chapter 11 – Cells
Table of Contents:
11.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 3
11.2 CELL LIBRARIES.............................................................................................................. 3
11.2.1 CELL LIBRARY DIALOG BOX ............................................................................................. 4
11.3 TYPES OF CELLS ............................................................................................................. 7
11.4 CELL LIBRARY CONSIDERATIONS .................................................................................... 8
11.4.1 WORKING UNITS.......................................................................................................... 8
11.4.2 CELL ORGANIZATION ..................................................................................................... 8
11.4.3 CELL NAMING.............................................................................................................. 8
11.4.4 2D AND 3D CELLS ........................................................................................................ 8
11.5 HOW TO USE CELLS ....................................................................................................... 9
11.6 CELLS TOOL BOX............................................................................................................ 9
11.6.1 PLACE ACTIVE CELL ..................................................................................................... 11
11.6.2 PLACE ACTIVE CELL MATRIX .......................................................................................... 14
11.6.3 SELECT AND PLACE CELL ............................................................................................... 15
11.6.4 PLACE CELL ORIGIN ..................................................................................................... 17
11.6.5 IDENTIFY CELL............................................................................................................ 17
11.6.6 PLACE ACTIVE LINE TERMINATOR ................................................................................... 18
11.6.7 REPLACE CELLS .......................................................................................................... 19
11.6.8 PLACE CELL INDEX ...................................................................................................... 22
11.7 CREATING CELLS .......................................................................................................... 24
11.8 ANNOTATION CELLS .................................................................................................... 25
11.8.1 TYPES OF CELLS ODOT USES AS ANNOTATION CELLS ............................................................ 25
11.9 BREAKING UP/DROPPING CELLS .................................................................................. 26


11.1 Introduction
A Cell is a complex element composed of a group of primary elements or other complex elements that are used
regularly in your design files. Rather than redraw them each time you can save them in a cell library to recall for
repeated use.
Cells are stored in a DGN file called a cell library, which can contain many cells. You can think of a cell library as a
container of several separate models you use in a one or more design files. Cell Libraries are exactly like DGN files.
Any DGN file can be attached as a cell library and any cell library can be opened as a DGN file.
 Cell Libraries are given the extension of .cel to distinguish them as a cell library.
Cells are used for these reasons:
• To save time drawing patterns and repeated details

• To make it easy to update details throughout a design file
• To provide uniformity
11.2 Cell Libraries

In MicroStation there is no difference between a cell library and a design file other than the file extension “.cel”.
This extension is used to indicate that the file is to be used as a cell library. A model definition in a design file is
equivalent to a cell definition in a cell library.
ODOT has created a series of standard cell libraries to be used in the creation of ODOT drawings. These libraries
are located in the directory i:\ODOTstd\V8istd\cell. The following cell libraries are available to facilitate the
drawing of commonly used symbols and sheet borders as described below:
• ODOT_Bridge.cel Commonly used cells for Bridge plans.

• ODOT_Drainage.cel Cells for standard drainage structures.
• ODOT_Geotech.cel Cells used for Geotechnical Information.
• ODOT_Geotech_1996.cel Cells used for the Specifications for Subsurface Investigation.
• ODOT_RW.cel Commonly used cells for Right-of-Way plans.
• ODOT_Sheets.cel Cells for standard plan sheet borders.
• ODOT_Symbols.cel Cells representing standard plan symbols.
A set of Sign cell libraries have also been developed to include standard signs from the Office of Traffic
Engineering, Sign Design Manual. The sign cells are placed using the custom application, ODOT_Signs.mvba.
These sign cell libraries are located in the following directory i:\ODOTstd\V8istd\cell\Signs.

11.2.1 Cell Library Dialog Box
The Cell Library Dialog box contains tools for attaching and detaching cell libraries. It is also used to select cells for
placement into a drawing. The name and path of the attached cell library, if one is attached, are displayed in the
title bar. Most cell creation and placement-related functions can be performed from the Cell Library dialog box.
To Open the Cell Library dialog box select Element > Cells from the Main Menu bar or select the Cells icon from the
Primary tool bar as shown below.

Cell Dialog Box Tools:
The File drop-down menu in the Cell Library dialog box contains options for creating new cell libraries, attaching
existing cell libraries, and detaching cell libraries.
• File > New - Opens the Create Cell Library dialog box, which is used to create a cell library and attach it to
the open DGN file.
• File > Attach File - Opens the Attach Cell Library dialog box, which is used to attach an existing cell library
to the open DGN file. Only one cell library may be attached at a time. If a file is already attached, and the
user elects to attach another one, the first library is automatically detached before the next one is
attached.
• File > Attach Folder - Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box, which is used to attach a folder containing
cell libraries to the open DGN file.
• File > Detach - Detaches the attached cell library.
• File > Compress - Compresses the open cell library. Compression reorganizes the cell DGN file to occupy
the minimum disk space.
• File > Upgrade Files to V8 - Opens the Upgrade Files to V8 Format dialog box, used for selecting cell
libraries to be upgraded from pre-V8 format to V8/XM format.

Cell List Box - Displays a list of cells in the cell library.
• Edit Used to edit the cell’s name and description.

• Delete Deletes a cell from the cell library.
• Create Used to create a new cell in the attached cell library.
• Share Create a shared cell definition of the active cell.
Active Cells - Before a cell can be placed, it must be activated. The cell Placement tools use the Active Cells
definition.
• Placement - Sets the selected cell as the Active Cell for placement.
• Point - Sets the selected cell as the Active Cell for the Point tool.
• Terminator - Sets the selected cell as the Active Cell for the Place Active Line
Terminator tool.
• Pattern - Sets the selected cell as the Active Cell for the Place Pattern tool.

• Use Shared Cells - If on, cells are placed as shared cells. If off, cells are placed as normal cells. A Shared
cell shares information with other occurrences of the same cell in a design file. An advantage of using
shared cells is that all occurrences of the cell in the design file can be updated at one time. Shared cells
help minimize the file size by sharing information instead of having each cell contain a complete set of
information as is the case with normal cells.
• Display All Cells In Path - If Use Shared Cells is off, cells are displayed in the following order: first, normal
cells from cell libraries listed in MS_CELLLIST configuration variables, then normal cells listed in directory
specified by the MS_BLOCKLIST configuration variable.
If Use Shared Cells is on, cells are displayed in the following order: shared cells in the open file, shared
cells in the attached cell library, cells in the cell libraries listed in MS_CELLLIST, and cells in the directory
listed in MS_BLOCKLIST.
• Display - Controls how the selected cell is displayed in the box on the right side of the Cell Library dialog
box.
11.3 Types of Cells

MicroStation allows you to create two types of cells Graphic and Point.
• Graphic Cells
The symbology (level, color, line style and line weight) of a graphic cell is determined when it is created.
They are stored with symbology settings and are always placed with their original attributes. A graphic
cell rotates when a view is rotated. Additionally, the user can snap to any element in the cell once it is
placed.
 Graphic Cells can be produced on the Default Level using specific symbology, such as, color, line style,
and line weight. A benefit to graphic cells being created on the Default level is the new symbols act
similar to point cells when placed in the design file they inherit the Active Level, but not the symbology
(color, line style, line weight). It is important to note, that the graphic cell does not inherit the Active
Symbology (i.e. color, weight, line style) like a “Point Cell”, unless the graphic cell was drawn on the
default level with the attributes set to “ByLevel”.
• Point Cells
A point cell takes on the symbology active in a design at the time it is placed. For example, if color 6 is the
active color when the cell is placed, the cell takes on color 6, as well as the currently active level, line style
and line weight. A point cell is view-independent (it will not rotate with the view) and includes only one
point that can be snapped to, the cell’s origin.

11.4 Cell Library Considerations

As with cells, there are certain considerations related to cell libraries that can make their access and use more
efficient. The following sections outline some general rules and recommendations used in the creation and
management of Cell Libraries.
11.4.1 Working Units
ODOT has standard Working Units already set up in the seed files used to create new design files. Deviation from
these working units is not permitted. In order to maintain uniformity and consistency among the different design
files throughout a project all cells are created using the standard working units.
11.4.2 Cell Organization
To make access and use of cells more efficient, ODOT has organized some of the cell libraries by their different
disciplines. Rather than placing all cells in a single cell library, it is easier to create and maintain the cells for
specific disciplines in different cell libraries.
11.4.3 Cell Naming
The maximum number of characters in a cell name is limited to 511. Alphabetic, numeric, and special characters
are valid. In older versions of MicroStation when a lot of cells were originally created there used to be a limit of six
(6) characters for the cell name which didn’t give the cell a very descriptive cell name.
Now that MicroStation allows more characters for a cell name and description ODOT is taking advantage of this
feature. However, the cell names are still limited with a certain amount of characters if possible in the cell name
so the cell name is not too long to read in the cell library dialog box or for a user to key-in.
11.4.4 2D and 3D Cells
The MicroStation file format lets you store both 3D cells and 2D cells in the same library. You can also place 3D
cells into a 2D file.

11.5 How to Use Cells

Users insert cells in a drawing in much the same way as other MicroStation elements. The size (scale) and rotation
angle are specified at the time of insertion. To place a cell into a drawing:
• Attach a Cell Library

• Select a Cell
• Make the Cell Active
• Select a Cell Placement Tool
• Adjust the Scale and Rotation of the Cell as needed
• Identify a Location for the Cell
11.6 Cells Tool Box

The Cells tool box contains tools to place cells and manipulate cells. It also contains cell definition tools and cell
replacement tools. To access these tools, select the Cells tool box from the Task Navigation tool box using one of

Cells Tool Box
from the menu.
Place Active Cell Used to place the Active Cell in a drawing.
Used to place multiple instances of the Active Cell in a

drawing. The cells are placed in a user defined array. This is the
Place Active Cell Matrix
equivalent of placing a cell and immediately using the
Construct Array tool.
Used to select a cell and place instances of that cell into the
Select and Place Cell
drawing file.
Used to place a cell origin point that is used as the insertion

Define Cell Origin
point when creating a cell.
Used to show the name of the selected cell in the message

Identify Cell
area of the status bar.
Place Active Line Used to place the cell designated as a terminator at the end of
Terminator a line or arc.
Used to replace one cell with another or to update cells that

Replace Cells
have change in the cell library.
Place Cell Index Used to create and place a cell index.

11.6.1 Place Active Cell
The Place Active Cell tool is used to place the Active Cell.
To place the Active Cell
1. Select the Place Active Cell tool.
2. Enter a data point to position the cell origin.

If Interactive is off, the cell is placed.
3. If Interactive is on and Rotate and Scale is selected, enter two more data points to define the scale and
the rotation angle.
Or
If Interactive is on and Rotate Only is selected, enter another data point to define the rotation angle.
Or
If Interactive is on and Scale Only is selected, enter another data point to define the scale.
4. Reset to finish.
Or
Return to step 2 to place another instance of the cell.
Tool Settings for Place Active Cell:

Active Cell Can be keyed-in here or set in the Cell Library dialog box (Element menu > Cells).
Browse Cells Opens the Cell Library dialog to let you select an active cell.
Sets the angle by which the cell is rotated, if Interactive is off, or if Interactive is on and Scale
Active Angle
Only is selected.
X Scale Horizontal scale factor (along x-axis).
Y Scale Vertical scale factor (along y-axis).
(Applies only to cells that have Can be placed as an annotation cell enabled in their Model
Annotation Properties.) If on, the current annotation scale is applied to the cell. Later, if the annotation
Scale Lock scale is modified, you are given the option of having the new scale applied to previously
placed annotation cells.
If on, cells that were created in a model with different units from those of the active model
True Scale
are scaled to adjust them to the units of the active model.
If the active cell is a graphic cell and Relative is:
• On — the Number of the level(s) on which elements in the graphic cell resided when
the cell was created determine the level(s) on which the graphic cell is placed, as
follows:
o The graphic cell is placed on a level(s) relative to the Active Level's number.
For example, consider a graphic cell that was created with elements on
levels with the numbers 5, 7, and 8. If the Active Level's number is 1, the
cell is placed on levels with the numbers 1, 3, and 4. If the Active Level's
number is 45, the cell is placed on levels with the numbers 45, 47, and 48.
o However, if the graphic cell has elements on any level whose number is not
an attribute of a level in the DGN file, the placement operation fails.
Relative
• Off — the Name of the level(s) on which elements in the graphic cell resided when
follows:
o If the graphic cell has elements a level with the same name exists in the
DGN file, the elements in the graphic cell on that level are placed on the
corresponding level in the DGN file, even if the level settings are not the
same.
o If a level with the same name does not exist in the DGN file, the level is
copied from the cell library into the DGN file. However, any elements in the
graphic cell on the Default level in the cell library are placed on the Active
Level.

If on, when you place a cell you can mirror it about the horizontal axis, about the vertical
Mirror axis, or about both the horizontal and vertical axes by selecting one of these options from
the list box.
If on, the cell's scale, rotation angle, or both scale and rotation are defined graphically by
data points.
• Rotate and Scale — If on, both the scale and rotation angle are defined graphically
by data points.
Interactive
• Rotate Only — If on, the rotation angle is defined by placing a data point. The scale
is defined in the X Scale, Y Scale, and Z Scale text boxes.
• Scale Only — If on, the scale is defined by placing a data point. The rotation angle is
defined in the Active Angle text box.
If on, 3D cells can be flattened, or projected, on to one of the standard view projections —
Flatten Top, Front, Right, Isometric, Bottom, Back, Left, Right Isometric — which is selected from the
option menu. Lets you place a view of a 3D cell into a 2D model.
If on, applies the active scale to multi-line offsets. If off, the active scale is not applied. This
Scale Multi-line
setting does not affect multi-line offsets in shared cells; elements in shared cells always
Offsets
scale. This setting is also available in the Scale tool.
If on, applies the active scale to dimension values. If off, the active scale is not applied. This
Scale Dimension
setting does not affect dimension values in shared cells; elements in shared cells always
Values
scale. This setting is also available in the Scale tool.
If on, applies the active scale to elements that are scaled by annotation scale. If off, the
Scale
active scale is not applied. This setting does not affect annotations in shared cells; elements
Annotations
in shared cells always scale. This setting is also available in the Scale tool.
Association If on, lets you associate cells to elements in the model.

11.6.2 Place Active Cell Matrix
The Place Active Cell Matrix tool is used to place a matrix of the Active Cell. The cells are placed at the Active
Angle and Active Scale on the same level(s) as in the cell definition, unless it is a point cell. Point cell components
are placed on the Active Level.
To Place a matrix of the Active Cell
1. Select the Place Active Cell Matrix tool.
2. Enter a data point to position the cell matrix. The origin of the cell in the lower left corner of the matrix is
placed at this point.
Tool Settings for Place Active Cell Matrix:

Sets the Active Cell, which can be keyed-in here or set by clicking the Placement button in
Active Cell
the Cell Library dialog (Element > Cells).
Browse Cells Opens the Cell Libraries dialog for purposes of placement of a different active cell.
Rows Sets the number of rows.
Columns Sets the number of columns.
Row Spacing Sets the space, in working units, between rows.
Column Spacing Sets the space, in working units, between columns.

11.6.3 Select and Place Cell
The Select and Place Cell tool is used to identify a cell in the DGN file and place an additional instance(s) of that
cell.
To Select and Place a Cell
1. Select the Select and Place Cell tool.
2. Identify the cell.

If the cell is shared and Use Shared Cells is on, it becomes the Active Cell.
If the cell is unshared, the cell library in which that cell is stored must be attached or in the cell library list.
3. Enter a data point to place an instance of the cell.
4. Reset to finish.
Or
Return to step 3 to place another instance of the cell.
Tool Settings for Select and Place Cell:
Active Angle Sets the angle by which the cell is rotated.
X Scale Sets horizontal scale factor (along x-axis).
Y Scale Sets vertical scale factor (along y-axis).

If Active Cell is a graphic cell and Relative is:
• On — the Number of the level(s) on which elements in the graphic cell resided when
follows:
o The graphic cell is placed on a level(s) relative to the Active Level's number.
For example, consider a graphic cell that was created with elements on
levels with the numbers 5, 7, and 8. If the Active Level's number is 1, the
cell is placed on levels with the numbers 1, 3, and 4. If the Active Level's
number is 45, the cell is placed on levels with the numbers 45, 47, and 48.
o However, if the graphic cell has elements on any level whose number is not
an attribute of a level in the DGN file, the placement operation fails.
Relative
• Off — the Name of the level(s) on which elements in the graphic cell resided when
follows:
o If the graphic cell has elements a level with the same name exists in the
DGN file, the elements in the graphic cell on that level are placed on the
corresponding level in the DGN file, even if the level settings are not the
same.
o If a level with the same name does not exist in the DGN file, the level is
copied from the cell library into the DGN file. However, any elements in the
graphic cell on the Default level in the cell library are placed on the Active
Level.

11.6.4 Place Cell Origin
The Place Cell Origin tool is used to define the cell origin (the point about which the cell is placed). When you
create a cell, you define the cell origin and cell type.
To define a cell origin
1. Select the Define Cell Origin tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the cell origin.

A “+” displays at this point.
The origin stays active and displays until the next time the Define Cell Origin tool is selected.
3. Reset to accept the cell origin.

Or
Return to step 2.
11.6.5 Identify Cell
The Identify Cell tool is used to display the name and level of a cell in the design.
To display a cell's name and level
1. Select the Identify Cell tool.
2. Identify the cell.

The cell's name and level(s) are displayed in the status bar.
3. Accept the cell.

11.6.6 Place Active Line Terminator
The Place Active Line Terminator tool is used to place the Active Line Terminator cell on a line, line string, arc, or
complex chain, primarily to place arrowheads.
To place the Active Line Terminator
1. Select the Place Active Line Terminator tool.
2. Identify the element near the endpoint where the terminator is to be placed.
3. Accept the line terminator
Tool Settings for Place Active Line Terminator:
Terminator Sets Active Line Terminator, which can also be set in the Cell Library dialog (Element > Cells).
Opens the Cell Libraries dialog for purposes of selecting a different active cell as a line
Browse Cells
terminator.
Scale Sets Active Line Terminator scale.

11.6.7 Replace Cells
The Replace Cells tool is used to replace single or multiple cells in a model, or to update cells in a model, with cells
of the same name from the active cell library.
To update cells from the active cell library
1. Select the Replace Cells tool.

2. In the Tool Settings window, set Method to Update.
3. Identify the cell to update.
4. Accept the cell.
If the identified cell is shared, all instances of the cell in the design are replaced with the cell of the same
name from the active cell library.
If the identified cell is unshared, only the identified cell is replaced with the cell of the same name from
the active cell library.
To replace cells individually or globally

2. In the Tool Settings window, set Method to Replace.
3. Identify the cell to replace.
4. Identify the replacement cell.
5. Accept.
If Mode is set to Single, the identified cell is replaced.
If Mode is set to Global, an alert box opens to confirm the replacement of all of the cells having the same
name as the identified cell.
To replace individual or multiple cells inside the fence
1. Place the fence around the cells to replace.

4. In the Tool Settings window, turn on Use Fence and choose the Inside option.
6. Accept.

To individually replace cells containing user data
3. In the Tool Settings window, set Mode to Single.
4. In the Tool Settings window, turn on Replace Attributes.
5. Identify the cell to replace.
7. Accept.
The old cell, including its user data, is replaced with the new cell and its user data.
Tool Settings for Replace Cells:

Sets the method for replacing or updating cells.
• Update — Replaces the identified cell with the cell of the same name from the
active cell library.
• Replace — Replaces single or multiple cells by:
Method
o (Use Active Cell off) — identifying the cell and then identifying its
replacement cell.
o (Use Active Cell on) — identifying the cell and accepting to replace it with
the Active Cell.

(with Method set to Replace) Sets the method by which cells are replaced.
Mode • Single — Lets you replace individual cells.
• Global — Replaces all cells of the same name with the replacement cell.
Use Fence If on, sets the method by which fence contents are manipulated.
(With Method set to Replace) If on, selected cells are replaced with the Active Cell that is
Use Active Cell
displayed in the text field.
Browse Cell(s) Opens the Cell Library dialog to let you select an active cell.
If on, cells that were created in a model with different units from those of the active model
True Scale
are scaled to adjust them to the units of the active model.
Replace Tags If on, tags on the current cell are replaced with those on the new cell.
Replace User If on, all user attributes (such as database links) associated with a cell are replaced by those
Attributes of the new cell.
If on, lowest levels for both cells will be matched, while all other levels will be relative to the
Relative Levels
lowest.
 The Replace Cells tool cannot be used to replace groups (unnamed cells, also known as orphan cells).

11.6.8 Place Cell Index
The Place Cell Index tool is used to create and place a cell index. A cell index contains all of the models in the
active DGN file that are marked as “Can be placed as cell.” The cell index is stored in the active model and each
cell is attached as a reference. After a cell has been placed you can edit it.
If models are added or deleted from the DGN file after a cell index has been created, the cell index is not updated
automatically to include the additions and deletions. You must recreate the cell index to include those changes. If
a model's scale changes significantly, you may need to recreate the cell index so that the model scales properly
within the grid.
Cell indexes are meant to be placed in 2D models. However, if you create a cell index in a 3D model, it will always
be aligned with the top view, and not with the view plane. 3D models in a cell index are rotated to an isometric
view.
This tool's settings are saved in the model when you create the cell index.
To create and place a cell index
1. Select the Place Cell Index tool.
2. Enter a box size.
3. Enter the number of cells per row.
4. Select Grid Lines, Names, Descriptions, Insertion Points, and/or Enable Screen Menus.
5. Enter a data point to position the upper left corner of the cell index.

Tool Settings for Place Cell Index:
Box Size (in The size of the box in which each cell appears. The box size is based on the active text style.
characters) The default is 20.
Cells per Row The number of cells per row in the cell index. The default is 10.
Grid Lines If on, grid lines appear around the cells.
If on, the cells' names appear below each cell. There is no limit to the cell name's length. If
Names
a name is longer than the box size, it will overlap the name in the cell to the right of it.
If on, the cells' descriptions appear below each cell. There is no limit to the cell description's
Descriptions
length. The description will wrap around and shrink to fit within the box size.
Insertion Points If on, displays the cell's origin in each cell.
Enable Screen
(Available only if Grid Lines is on.) If on, creates the cell index as a clickable screen menu.
Menus

11.7 Creating Cells

Once a cell library has been created, new cells may be placed into it. Creating cells is a multi-step process that uses
several different tools.
Cell Creation Tools:
Element Selection
Used to select the elements that will make up the cell.
Tool
Place Cell Origin Found in the Cells tool box. Used to define an origin or insertion
Tool point for the cell.
Found in the Cell Library Dialog box. Invoke the cell create
Create Button command. This button will not activate until the elements are
selected and the cell origin has been established.
To Create a Cell
1. Select the elements that are to be made into a cell using the Element Selection tool.
2. Place an origin for the cell using the Place Cell Origin tool.
3. In the Cell Library dialog box, select the Create button.
4. The Create Cell dialog box appears.
5. Enter a name and description for the cell, and choose the desired type of cell.
6. Click the Create button in the Create New Cell dialog box.
7. The new cell is now added to the cell library.
 Cells may also be created by opening the cell library like a design file in MicroStation and creating a
new Model. Any elements placed in the new model become a cell as long as the Model Cell Property
“Can be placed as a cell” is toggled on. The origin point for the new cell will be the global origin point
of xyz = 0, 0, 0.

11.8 Annotation Cells

When you change the active model's Annotation Scale factor, annotation cells in the model are automatically
scaled by the new factor.
The Place Active Cell tool is used to place annotation cells. The tool's settings window has an Annotation Scale
Lock icon similar to the one for the Place Text tool and dimensioning tools. When you set the Active Cell to a cell
that can be placed as an annotation cell, this icon should be enabled as shown below.
The icon's tool tip tells you the active model's annotation scale factor and the off/on state of the Annotation Scale
Lock. If this lock is on, the model's Annotation Scale factor will be applied to the cell you are placing. To turn on
the Annotation Scale Lock, click the icon.
When the settings “Can be placed as a cell” and “Can be placed as an annotation cell” are enabled in a model's
properties, the model may be placed as an annotation cell.
11.8.1 Types of cells ODOT uses as Annotation Cells
The following are two types of cells contained in ODOTs Cell Libraries:
• “Cosmetic” cells - “Can be placed as an annotation cell”.
Cosmetic cells represent the location of an object, such as a mail box or power pole, but not the actual
dimensions of the object. These cells must be placed at the same scale that will be used as the plotting
scale for the completed plan. For these items, the ability to place these cells using the Annotation Scale
Lock has been enabled in the cell library by toggling on the Can be placed as annotation cell option.
• “Physical” cells – “Cannot be placed as an annotation cell”.
Physical cells represent the actual true dimensions of an object, such as a catch basin or pavement
marking. These cells are intended to be placed at a scale of 1 regardless of the plotting scale of the
completed plan. For these items, the ability to place the cells using the Annotation Scale Lock has been
disabled in the cell definition.
 The ANNOTATIONSCALE ADD and ANNOTATIONSCALE REMOVE key-ins are used to add and remove
annotation scales to and from existing annotation cells, dimensions, text elements, text nodes, notes,
detailing symbols, tags, and line styles.

11.9 Breaking Up/Dropping Cells

There are times when the user may need to modify a single occurrence of a cell. Normally, this cannot be done
unless the cell is exploded into its original component elements. This is the purpose of the Drop Element tool in
the Groups tool box. It is used to reduce a cell to the geometric components from which it was created.
To access the Drop Element tool, select the Groups tool box from the Main tool box using one of the following
The Drop Element tool settings also allow a shared cell to be dropped first to a normal cell, then to its original
geometric components.

Table of Contents:
12.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 3
12.2 PATTERNING TOOLS ...................................................................................................... 3
12.2.1 HATCH AREA: .............................................................................................................. 5
12.2.1.1 Methods of Patterning ............................................................................................................................7
12.2.2 CROSSHATCH AREA ..................................................................................................... 10
12.2.3 PATTERN AREA .......................................................................................................... 11
12.2.4 LINEAR PATTERN ........................................................................................................ 12
12.2.5 SHOW PATTERN ATTRIBUTES ......................................................................................... 13
12.2.6 MATCH PATTERN ATTRIBUTES ....................................................................................... 14
12.2.7 CHANGE PATTERN ...................................................................................................... 15
12.2.8 DELETE PATTERN ........................................................................................................ 16
12.3 CONTROLLING THE DISPLAY OF PATTERNS .................................................................. 17
12.4 CELLS USED FOR PATTERNING ..................................................................................... 18


12.1 Introduction
Patterning adds texture and material identity to design elements and helps express role and function. Whatever
the discipline, patterning plays an important role in clarifying drawings. For example, concrete material and maps
must define marsh lands and wooded areas. Some designs must identify the construction materials of mechanical
machine parts, such as brass or steel, constructions zones, concrete sidewalks, etc. Patterning tools accomplish
these goals and more.
12.2 Patterning Tools

Patterning is the repeated placement of a hatch line or cell through a closed area at a specified interval (spacing),
scale, and angle. You can place patterns on any designated level. Patterns are used to distinguish certain areas of
a drawing from other areas.
To access these tools, select the Patterns tool box from the Task Navigation Tool Box using one of the following

Patterns Tool Box:
Hatch Area Places hatch lines at a specified spacing and angle.
Crosshatch Area Places crossed hatch lines, which run in two directions.
Patterns an area by repeating a cell at defined

intervals. The values entered in the Scale, Row Spacing
Pattern Area and Column Spacing fields determine the number of
times the cell placement is repeated in the designated
area.
Draw a pattern along a linear element. This tool
maintains compatibility with existing applications and
designs with linear patterns. In most cases, however,
Linear Pattern
defining a Custom Line Style and using linear element
placement tools is more efficient, and for new
drawings.
Identifies the attributes of a previously placed pattern

element, including:
• The type of element receiving the pattern
• The type of elements contained in the pattern
• The pattern elements level
Show Pattern Attributes
• The type of pattern (cell or hatch)
• The name of the pattern cell
• The pattern angle and pattern scale
MicroStation displays this information in the Status
Bar.
Change the active patterning attributes to match those

Match Pattern Attributes
of a previously patterned element.
Change Pattern Changes existing patterns to the active pattern.
Deletes patterning while restoring the original element

Delete Pattern
components used to create the pattern.

12.2.1 Hatch Area:
The Hatch Area tool is used to hatch an area. Elements used to define the area to be hatched can be in the active
model, or in references. Where associative patterning is used, any modification to elements defining the hatched
area results in an equivalent update to the hatching. Icons in the tool settings let you select the method for
defining the area to be hatched.
To hatch an area enclosed by bounding elements
1. Select the Hatch Area tool.
2. Click the Flood icon in the tool settings.
3. (Optional) If you want the hatching to avoid closed elements, text or dimension text inside the selected
area, or you want to view the hatch area dynamically, click Show Extended Information (lower right in the
tool settings) and turn on Locate Interior Shapes, Locate Text, and/or Dynamic Area.
4. Enter a data point in the area enclosed by the bounding elements. (To minimize the time required, zoom
in to the area of interest or select the bounding elements.)
The area to be patterned displays dynamically.
If there are selected elements, only selected elements are considered as possible bounding elements. If
no elements are selected, all elements in the view in which the data point is entered are considered.
5. Accept the hatching.

The area is hatched. If Locate Interior Shapes and Locate Text is on, any inside closed element (regardless
of its Area attribute), text or dimension text is avoided. If Associative Pattern is on, the hatch lines are
associated to a complex shape created from the bounding elements and the inside elements.
To hatch the area inside a closed element
1. Select the element.
3. Click the Element icon in the tool settings.

Enter a data point to define a point through which a hatch line must pass.

To hatch the intersection or union of closed elements
2. Click the Intersection or Union icon in the tool settings.
3. Identify one element.
4. Identify another element.

The resulting area is highlighted.
5. (Optional) Use <Ctrl-data point> to select further elements.
6. Accept with a data point that defines a point through which a hatch line must pass
To hatch the difference between elements
2. Click the Difference icon in the tool settings.
3. Identify the element from which to subtract.
4. Identify an element to subtract from the element identified in the preceding step.
5. (Optional) Use <Ctrl-data point> to select further elements.
6. Accept the elements.
To hatch an area defined by data points
2. Click the Points icon in the tool settings.
3. Enter a data point to define each vertex of an imaginary shape that encloses the area.
The imaginary shape is dynamically displayed.
4. Reset to finish (and hatch the area).

12.2.1.1 Methods of Patterning
Tool Settings for Hatch, Crosshatch, and Pattern Area Tools:
The Hatch Area, Crosshatch Area, and Pattern Area all use a common set of tools to define the area to be
hatched. Below is a listing of all the tools:
Element icon
The interior of a shape, ellipse, or closed B-spline curve; or between components of a multi-
line.
The (minimum) area enclosed by a set of elements (something like the flood fill tool common
Flood icon
in painting programs). With method set to Flood, a Show Extended Information icon appears
in the lower right corner of the tool settings window. Clicking this icon expands the tool
settings to display further controls.
Edges bound the union of two or more closed planar elements.

Union icon
Where more than two elements are involved, use <Ctrl-data point> to select the extra
elements.
Intersection Edges bound the intersection of two or more closed planar elements.
icon
elements.
Edges bound the difference of two or more closed, planar elements.
Difference icon
elements.

Points icon
An area defined by a series of data points, each of which defines a vertex.
Fence icon
The area inside the fence.
Spacing Sets the interval between hatching lines.
Sets the angle at which hatching lines are drawn. By default, the angle is relative to the view
Angle being used. Where AccuDraw is active, however, the angle is relative to the AccuDraw
drawing plane.
Maximum distance between curved element and approximating line segments used to
Tolerance
pattern.
If on, hatching is associated with hatched geometry.
• If Method is set to Element, the hatching is associated with the hatched element
and is automatically updated when the hatched element is manipulated or
modified.
Associative
Pattern
• If Method is set to Intersection, Union, or Difference, a complex shape that bounds
the hatched area is created, and the hatching is associated with the complex shape.
The hatching and the complex shape are automatically updated when the original
element(s), used to create the complex shape, are modified or manipulated, only if
Associative Region Boundary is also on.
Associative Pattern on only) If on, hatching can be placed on a level other than the level of
Associative the hatched element. If the Method is Intersection, Union, Difference, or Flood, a complex
Region shape that bounds the hatched area is created, and the hatching is associated to the complex
Boundary shape. If you move or modify the original element(s), used to create the complex shape, the
complex shape is updated, along with the hatching.
Snappable If on, hatching lines can be snapped to. If off, hatching lines do not interfere with snapping
Pattern to other elements.
Ignore Interior
Shapes icon (Flood icon selected only) If selected, interior shapes are ignored when the region boundary
is calculated.
Locate Interior
Shapes icon (Flood icon selected only) If selected, all closed elements (regardless of their Area attributes)
inside the selected area are avoided when the area is hatched.
Identify
Alternating
Interior Shapes (Flood icon selected only) If selected, alternating areas are hatched where shapes are nested
icon inside one another.

Locate Interior
Text icon (Flood icon selected only) If selected, any text or dimension text inside or overlapping the
selected area is avoided when the area is hatched.
Dynamic Area
Locate icon (Flood icon selected only) If on, the area to be hatched displays dynamically as you move the
screen pointer over the shapes.
(Flood icon selected only) The maximum distance, in working units, between the endpoints
Max(imum) Gap
of enclosing elements.
(Flood icon selected only) Sets the size of the margin (in text height units) between hatching
Text Margin
lines and existing text elements in the area to hatch.
(Element icon selected only) When creating a non-associative pattern, gives you options for
how hole elements are treated. You can ignore hole elements or search for hole elements
on the same level as the element to pattern, or on all levels displayed in the view.
Search For • No — Ignores hole elements.

Holes
• Element Level — Searches for hole elements on the same level as the element to
hatch.
• View Levels — Searches for hole elements on all levels displayed in the view.
Use Element If on, hatching is created using the active color, line weight, and line style of the element
Symbology being patterned.
Points method only) Sets the active fill type for the closed shape defined by the points —
Fill Type
None (no fill), Opaque (filled with the active color), or Outlined.
(Points method only) Sets the color and optional gradient with which the elements are filled.
• If Fill Type is Opaque, the element(s) are filled with the active color, which is also
Fill Color the color of the element's outline.
• If Fill Type is Outlined, the element(s) can be filled with a color that is different from
the active color.

12.2.2 Crosshatch Area
The Crosshatch Area tool is used to crosshatch an area. Elements used to define the area to be crosshatched can
be in the active model, or in references. Where associative patterning is used, any modification to elements
defining the crosshatched area results in an equivalent update to the crosshatching.
The tool settings and procedures are the same as those for the Hatch Area tool, except that there are additional
fields to specify the Spacing and Angle of the crosshatch lines, in addition to those for the hatch lines. Icons in the
tool settings let you select the method for defining the area to be crosshatched.
To Crosshatch an area see the Hatch Area tool.
For details on the Tool Settings see Section 12.2.1.1 Methods of Patterning.

12.2.3 Pattern Area
The Pattern Area tool is used to pattern an area by tiling the active pattern cell. Elements used to define the area
to be patterned can be in the active file, or in references. Where associative patterning is used, any modification
to elements defining the patterned area results in an equivalent update to the patterning.
Icons in the tool settings let you select the method for defining the area to be patterned.
To pattern the area inside a closed element using a cell
1. Select the element.
2. Select the Pattern Area tool.
3. Click the Element icon in the tool settings.
4. From the Pattern Definition option menu, choose From Cell.
5. Click the Browse button.

The Cell Library dialog opens.
6. Attach a cell library, and select the cell to use for the pattern.
7. Click the Pattern button to make the cell the active pattern cell.
8. Enter a data point to place the origin of one of the pattern cell instances.
For details on the Tool Settings see Section 12.2.1.1 Methods of Patterning.

12.2.4 Linear Pattern
The Linear Pattern tool is used to draw or “tile” a pattern along an existing linear element. That is, to replace the
linear element with repetitions of the pattern cell.
To pattern a linear element
1. Select the Linear Pattern tool.
3. Enter a data point to indicate the pattern direction.
Tool Settings for Linear Pattern:

Sets the manner in which the active Pattern Cell is placed.
• Truncated — Place along the element at the Active Pattern Scale. If necessary, the
last instance is truncated.
• Complete — Placed along the element at a scale that is adjusted, if necessary, from
the Active Pattern Scale so that only complete instances are placed.
Cycle
• Single — Placed with one instance on each segment.
If a segment's length is less than 80% of the cycle length, the segment is patterned
with the first horizontal line in the pattern cell.
• Multiple — Place along an element at a scale that is adjusted, if necessary, from

the Active Pattern Scale so that every instance is complete along each segment. If a
segment's length is less than 80% of the cycle length, the segment is patterned
with the first horizontal line in the pattern cell.
The cell that is tiled to create the pattern. Can also be set with the Pattern button in the Cell
Pattern
Library dialog (Element > Cells).

Browse Opens the Cell Library dialog for the placement of a different active cell.
Scale The active Pattern Cell is scaled by this factor.
Tolerance Maximum distance between a curved element and the approximating line segments.
If on, the active pattern is scaled to adjust it to the units of the active model. The scaling
True Scale occurs only if the cell is shared and the units of the model in which the cell was created
differ from those of the active model.
12.2.5 Show Pattern Attributes
The Show Pattern Attributes tool is used to display the Pattern Angle and Pattern Scale attributes of a pattern
element.
To display the angle and scale of a pattern element
1. Select the Show Pattern Attributes tool.
2. Identify the pattern element.

The element highlights, and its type and level display in the status bar.
3. Accept the element.

The pattern angle and scale are displayed in the status bar.

12.2.6 Match Pattern Attributes
The Match Pattern Attributes tool is used to set the active pattern settings (Angle, Scale, and Spacing) to match
the attributes of a pattern element in the DGN file.
To match the active pattern settings to those of an existing pattern element
1. Select the Match Pattern Attributes tool.
2. Identify the pattern element.
3. Accept the pattern element.

The new active pattern settings are displayed in the status bar
Tool Settings for Match Pattern Attributes:
Match If on, the active level, color, line style, and line weight — as well as the active pattern
Symbology settings — are matched to the identified pattern element.

12.2.7 Change Pattern
The Change Pattern tool is used to change an existing pattern to:
• Match the current attributes and/or pattern parameters.

• Redefine the intersection point of the patterning.
• Re-flood the area.
To change an existing pattern to the current settings
1. Select the Change Pattern tool.
2. Identify the existing pattern.
3. Accept
Tool Settings for Change Pattern:
Attributes If on, the current pattern attributes are applied to the pattern.
Pattern
If on, the current pattern parameters are applied to the pattern.
Parameters
Intersection
If on, the pointer position defines the new intersection point of the pattern.
Point
Re-Flood If on, the selected region is re-flooded.

12.2.8 Delete Pattern
The Delete Pattern tool is used to delete patterning.
To delete patterning
1. Select the Delete Pattern tool.
2. Identify the patterning to delete or, in the case of associative patterning, the patterned element.

12.3 Controlling the display of Patterns

Elements either lines or cells in a pattern are designated as pattern elements. These pattern elements can be
toggled off in a view(s).
To turn the display of patterns on or off in one or more views
1. Open the View Attributes dialog box.
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the desired view.
3. Toggle Pattern/Bump Maps on or off.
4. Repeat steps 2–3 for additional views.

12.4 Cells used for Patterning

Pattern cells may contain any combination of elements, even text. Cells used for area patterning typically are
designed specifically for that purpose.
Pattern cells
There are some pattern cells contained in the ODOT_Symbols.cel and ODOT_Geotech.cel cell libraries.
The cell libraries “archpa.cel” and “geompa.cel,” in Bentley's "c:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Bentley\MicroStation V8i (SELECTseries)\WorkSpace\System\cell" directory, contain pattern cells that are
useful for various area patterning applications.
Guidelines for creating pattern cells
Additional pattern cells are created just as all other cells are. Here are some guidelines to follow and restrictions
to be aware of when creating area pattern cells:
• Area pattern cells should contain at least one full cycle of the pattern in both the horizontal and vertical
directions.
• The cell range is used to determine the pattern matrix size. If you want unused space at the pattern
boundary, place point elements (zero length lines) to expand the pattern range. Point elements are not
patterned.
• If the cell is created as a point cell, the pattern components are placed on the Active Level using the color
and line weight of the active symbology. The pattern will be on the same level as the element being
patterned. If the cell is created as a graphic cell, the pattern elements are placed with the same
symbology and on the same level as the element being patterned.
• The Pattern Area tool handles horizontal or vertical lines that span the entire pattern cell in a special
manner. Instead of placing many contiguous line segments to create the pattern, these lines are
extended through the entire pattern area. This results in a substantial increase in patterning speed and
also requires much less room in the DGN file.

Chapter 13 – Dimensioning
Table of Contents:
13.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 3
13.2 DIMENSION TOOLS........................................................................................................ 4
13.2.1 Dimension Element ....................................................................................................................................5
13.2.2 Dimension Linear .....................................................................................................................................11
13.2.3 Dimension Angular...................................................................................................................................14
13.2.4 Dimension Ordinates................................................................................................................................19
13.2.5 Change Dimension ...................................................................................................................................21
13.2.6 Match Dimension Attributes ....................................................................................................................22
13.2.7 Reassociate Dimension ............................................................................................................................23
13.3 OTHER DIMENSION TOOLS .......................................................................................... 24

13.3.1 Linear Dimensions Tool Box .....................................................................................................................24
13.3.2 Angular Dimensions Tool Box ..................................................................................................................25
13.3.3 Radial Dimensions Tool Box .....................................................................................................................25
13.3.4 Miscellaneous Dimensions Tool Box ........................................................................................................25
13.4 DIMENSION STYLES ..................................................................................................... 26

13.4.1 Dimension Styles Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................27
13.4.2 ODOT’s Dimension Styles .........................................................................................................................28
13.5 EDITING DIMENSIONS ................................................................................................. 30

13.5.1 Edit Text ...................................................................................................................................................30
13.5.2 Modify Element ........................................................................................................................................30
13.5.4 Insert Vertex .............................................................................................................................................31
13.5.5 Delete Vertex ...........................................................................................................................................31
13.6 CONTROLLING THE DISPLAY OF DIMENSIONS .............................................................. 32


13.1 Introduction
Dimensioning is a crucial step in the design process. A designer must clearly convey their intentions for their
design by dimensioning the elements contained in the construction documents. Dimensions are critical when it
comes to actually building work depicted in a design. Correct dimensioning can help avoid costly job site mistakes.
Proper use of MicroStation’s dimensioning capabilities helps avoid errors.
A dimension is an Annotation in a design showing a linear, angular, or radial measurement.
A dimension can be placed with the dimensioning tools as separate lines, line strings, and text or as one dimension
element. A dimension can have the following components:
• A dimension line
• Dimension text
• Extension lines
• Dimension line terminators
• A prefix or suffix (center, diameter, radius, etc.)
Advantages of dimension elements:
Dimension elements have the following advantages:
• A dimension element can be modified easily.

• A dimension element can be associated with the element or elements it dimensions. Such an associated
dimension updates automatically when any of the dimensioned elements are modified.
• Using dimension elements can significantly reduce the size of a design file that has many dimensions,
since a dimension element is usually smaller than the corresponding individual elements.
• When the Use Working Units (Units tab of the Dimension Styles dialog) option is on, if the working units in
a design file are changed, dimension elements will display dimensions based on the new working units.
 Dimensions can be used with elements in any design file, including reference files.

13.2 Dimension Tools

MicroStation offers a comprehensive set of dimension tools however this chapter will only cover the most
commonly used dimension tools. The tools in the Dimensioning task are used to perform general dimensioning.
To access these tools, select the Dimensioning tool box from the Task Navigation Tool Box using one of the

Dimensioning Tools:
Dimensions an element and creates all associations

Dimension Element
automatically, if Association is toggled on.
Dimensions a linear size (distance). Each dimension is

Dimension Linear computed from the endpoint of the previous one and placed in
line (chained).
Dimension Angular Dimensions an angle.
Dimension Ordinates Label distances along an axis from a common point of origin.
Change Dimension Changes a dimension to the active dimensioning attributes.
Sets the active dimension settings to the dimension attributes

Match Dimension Attributes
of a selected dimension element.
Recreates a linear or radial dimension's association to an

Reassociate Dimensions
element.
13.2.1 Dimension Element
The Dimension Element tool is used to dimension an element (line, line string, multi-line, shape, circular arc, or
circle). Associations can be made to these elements, as well as to components of complex elements and elements
that are part of a shared or unshared cell.
To dimension an element
1. Select the Element Dimensioning tool.
3. Select the desired dimensioning tool.

The tool settings change depending on the tool selected.
4. Enter a data point to define the extension line length and position the dimension.

To label the length and direction of a line
2. Identify the line. If Location is set to Automatic or if it is an association point, this point will position the
label origin.
3. Set the mode to Label Line.
4. If Location is set to Manual and the first data point was not an association point, enter a data point to
position the label origin.
 To reverse an element's direction, use the Change Element Direction tool in the Modify Curves toolbox.
 To get angle to display in bearing mode, switch the Angle Format Display option on the Units tab in
the Dimension Styles dialog.
To dimension a distance perpendicularly from an element (at a separately-identified point)
2. Enter a data point to identify the element from which a distance will be dimensioned.
The orientation of the y-axis of the dimension is perpendicular to the line on which the element lies.
3. Set the mode to Dimension Size Perpendicular to Points.
4. Enter a second data point to define the origin (the base of the first extension line).
This point can lie beyond the end of the element identified in step 2.
5. Enter a data point to define the base of the second extension line.
The dimension is placed with extension lines at each end.

To dimension the radius of a circle or arc
2. Identify the circle or arc.
3. Set the mode to Dimension Radius.
4. Enter a data point to position the dimension.
To dimension the diameter of a circle or arc with an extended leader
3. Set the mode to Dimension Diameter (Extended Leader).
4. Enter a data point to position the dimension.
To dimension diameter with the dimension placed parallel
3. Set the mode to Dimension Diameter Parallel.
4. Enter a data point to define the location and orientation of the dimension.
 You cannot edit text while placing dimensions with Element Dimensioning. To edit dimension text
that was placed with the Element Dimensioning tool, use the Edit Text tool in the Text task.

Tool Settings for Dimension Element:

Displays the active dimension style, which is set on the Dimension Styles dialog. The list box
lets you select other available dimension styles.
Style
If you change a tool setting from the default, the setting is highlighted in blue, and an
asterisk appears next to the Style name.
Magnifying
Opens the Dimension Styles dialog, which is used to control settings for dimensioning.
glass icon
Reset Style Restores the tool settings to the defaults set for this style on the Dimension Styles dialog.
Alignment Determines the axis along which the dimension is aligned.
Controls the location of dimension text:
• Automatic — Dimension text is automatically placed according to the Justification

setting (in the Dimension Styles dialog, Text tab).
Location
• Semi-Automatic — Dimension text is automatically placed according to the
Justification setting if the text fits between the extension lines. If the text does not
fit, you position the text in response to a prompt.
• Manual — You position dimension text in response to a prompt.
Dimension
Element If the selected element is a linear (non-circular) shape, clicking this icon sets the tool's mode
to Dimension Element.

Label Line If the selected element is a linear (non-circular) shape, clicking this icon sets the tool's mode
to Label Line. This mode is used to place a dimension showing the length and/or angle of a
line.
Dimension Size
Perpendicular If the selected element is a linear (non-circular) shape, clicking this icon sets the tool's mode
Line to Dimension Size Perpendicular to Points. This mode is used to dimension the linear
distance between two points.
Dimension
Radius If the selected element is a circle, ellipse, or b-spline, clicking this icon sets the tool's mode to
Dimension Radius.
Dimension
Diameter
(Extended If the selected element is a circle, ellipse, or b-spline, clicking this icon sets the tool's mode to
Leader) Dimension Diameter (Extended Leader).
Dimension
Diameter If the selected element is a circle, ellipse, or b-spline, clicking this icon sets the tool's mode to
Parallel Dimension Diameter Parallel. This mode is used to place a dimension parallel to the circle or
arc, and with tangent extension lines extending to the circle or arc.
If the mode is Label Line, sets what information (angle, length or both) and where
(above/below) the information must be placed for a line label.
• Length/Angle — The length is displayed above the line, and the angle is displayed
below the line.
• Angle/Length — The angle is displayed above the line, and the length is displayed
Label Line below the line.
• Length Above — The length is displayed above the line.
• Angle Above — The angle is displayed above the line.
• Length Below — The length is displayed below the line.
• Angle Below — The angle is displayed below the line.
• Length Angle Above — The angle and length are displayed above the line.
• Length Angle Below — The angle and length are displayed below the line.
Sets the Annotation Scale lock. When this lock is on, the annotation scale is applied to any
Annotation
Scale Lock icon

If the mode is relevant to a circle or arc, turning this on places crosshairs at the center of the
Center Mark
element.
If the mode is Dimension Element, Dimension Size Perpendicular to Points or Dimension

Start Extension
Diameter Parallel, sets the optional terminator for the beginning of dimension lines.
If the mode is Dimension Element, Dimension Size Perpendicular to Points or Dimension

End Extension
Diameter Parallel, sets the optional terminator for the end of dimension lines.
If the mode is Dimension Element or Dimension Size Perpendicular to Points, sets the
orientation of dimension text:
Text Alignment • Standard — All dimension text is placed along the dimension line.
• Vertical — All dimension text is placed vertical to the dimension line.
• Mixed — All dimension text is placed vertically only if it does not fit along the
dimension line.
If the mode is Dimension Element or Dimension Size Perpendicular to Points, controls the
framing of dimension text:
Text Frame • Box — Places dimension in a box. Sometimes used to designate a reference
dimension.
• Capsule — Places dimension in a capsule. Typically used to designate a dimension
for quality control.
Prefix Text
optional symbol for placement before dimension text.
Suffix Text
optional symbol for placement after dimension text.
If on, all possible associations are created automatically without the need to snap a tentative
point.
Association
If off, no associations are created.

13.2.2 Dimension Linear
The Dimension Linear tool is used to dimension the linear distance between two points (length).
To dimension the distance between two points
1. Select the Linear Dimensioning tool.
3. Enter a data point to define the endpoint of the dimension. As the cursor moves, the dynamic dimension
displays.
4. Enter a data point to define the length of the extension line (the offset distance from the origin to the
dimension line).
If Alignment is set to Drawing or View, this data point also defines the dimension axis.
To create a linear dimension by selecting multiple elements
2. Click on the Select Multiple Elements icon.
3. Set the mode to Linear Size.
4. Enter a data point to start the selection line over the elements to be dimensioned.
5. Enter a data point to end the selection line.
6. Press and hold down the <Ctrl> key.
7. Enter a data point to start the selection line over another set of elements.

Repeat step 6–8 for each additional element you wish to include in the linear dimension.
9. Enter a data point to place the dimensions.

To create a linear dimension by selecting multiple elements
2. Click the Select Multiple Elements icon.
3. Set the mode to Linear Size.
4. Enter a data point to start the selection line over the elements to be dimensioned.
6. Press and hold down the <Ctrl> key.
7. Enter a data point to start the selection line over another set of elements.

Repeat step 6–8 for each additional element you wish to include in the linear dimension.
9. Enter a data point to place the dimensions.
To create a stacked linear dimension from an origin
2. Set the mode to Linear Stacked.
3. Enter a data point to define the dimension origin.
4. Enter a data point to define the length of the extension line (the offset distance from the origin to the
dimension line).
If Alignment is set to Drawing or View, this data point also defines the dimension axis.
5. Enter a data point to define the endpoint of the dimension.
6. If Location is set to Manual, enter a data point to position the dimension text.
7. (Optional) To edit the dimension text, move the input focus to the Key-in window and press <Enter>.
The Dimension Text dialog opens if it is not already open, letting you edit the dimension text.
8. Go back to step 5 to dimension another location from the same origin.

or
Reset to place the dimension in the design.
9. (Optional) Go back to step 4 to dimension locations in a different direction (turn the corner), using the
previous data point as the origin.
Or
(Optional) Reset and go back to step 3 to start a new stacked location dimension from a different origin.

Tool Settings for Dimension Linear:
See Section 13.2.1 Dimension Element “Tool Settings for Dimension Element” for the other tool settings.
Dim Offset Sets a standard offset for the placement of a dimension.
If on, multiple elements can be selected for dimensioning by drawing a line through the
Select Multiple
elements. Enter data points for the start and end of the line. To continue dimensioning,
Elements
hold the <Ctrl> key, and enter data points for the start and end of the next segment of
the line. The <Ctrl> key lets you continue dimensioning without selecting intermediate
elements.
Linear Size Clicking this icon sets the tool's mode to Linear Size, which is used to dimension the linear
distance between two points (length). Each dimension (except the first) is computed
from the endpoint of the previous dimension. Dimensions are placed in line (chained).
Linear Stacked
Clicking this icon sets the tool's mode to Linear Stacked, which is used to dimension the
linear distance from an origin. The dimensions are stacked.
Linear Single
Clicking this icon sets the tool's mode to Linear Single, which is used to dimension the
linear distance from an origin. The dimensions are placed in line (chained).

13.2.3 Dimension Angular
The Dimension Angular tool is used to dimension angles.
To dimension an angle
1. Select the Angular Dimensioning tool.
2. Click the Angle Size icon.
3. Enter a data point to define the dimension start point. The dimension is measured in a counterclockwise
direction from this point.
4. Enter a data point to define the origin of the dimension.
6. Enter a data point to define the length of the extension line.
The Dimension Text dialog opens if it is not already open, letting you edit the dimension text.
8. Go back to step 5 to place another dimension using the same start point.
Or
Reset to complete the dimension.
To dimension an angle(s) from an origin
2. Set the mode to Angle Location.
4. Enter a data point to define a point on the axis.
6. Enter a data point to define the direction and length of the extension line.
The Dimension Text dialog box opens if it is not already open, letting you edit the dimension text.
Or

To dimension the angle between two lines
2. Click the Angle Between Lines icon
3. Select the first line.
4. Select the second line.
5. Enter a data point to place the dimension.

Or
Hold the <Ctrl> key and enter a data point to place the dimension in one of the quadrants formed by the
two lines.
To dimension the size of an arc
2. Set the mode to Arc Size.
5. Enter a data point to define the length of the extension line and the radius of the dimension arc.
Or

To dimension the angle between two lines
7. Click the Angle Between Lines icon
8. Select the first line.
9. Select the second line.
10. Enter a data point to place the dimension.

Or
Hold the <Ctrl> key and enter a data point to place the dimension in one of the quadrants formed by the
two lines.
To dimension the size of an arc
9. Set the mode to Arc Size.
Or

To dimension an arc from an origin
2. Set the mode to Arc Stacked.
Or

Tool Settings for Dimension Angular:

Angle Size
Clicking this icon sets the tool's mode to Angle Size. In this mode, each dimension (except the
first) is computed from the endpoint of the previous dimension.
Angle Location
Clicking this icon sets the tool's mode to Angle Location. In this mode, each dimension is
computed from the dimension origin.
Angle Between
Lines Clicking this icon sets the tool's mode to Angle Between Lines, which is used to dimension
the angle between two lines, two segments of a line string, or two sides of a shape.
Arc Size Clicking this icon sets the tool's mode to Arc Size, which is used to dimension a circle or
circular arc. Each dimension (except the first) is computed from the endpoint of the previous
dimension.
Arc Stacked Clicking this icon sets the tool's mode to Arc Stacked, which is used to dimension a circle or
circular arc. Each dimension is computed from the dimension origin. The dimensions are
stacked.
First Terminator Sets the optional terminator for the beginning of the first dimension line.
Arc Symbol If on, arc dimension text is placed with an arc length accent above.
If on, the mode is Dimension Arc Size and Angle Units are set to length, the dimension aligns
Chord Align
with the chord.

13.2.4 Dimension Ordinates
The Dimension Ordinates tool is used to label distances along an axis from an origin (datum) along the ordinate
axis (the line along which the distances are measured).
 Ordinate dimensions with jogged dimension lines cannot be displayed with previous versions of
MicroStation.
To place an ordinate dimension
1. Select the Ordinate Dimensioning tool.
3. Enter a second data point to define the ordinate axis.
4. Enter a third data point to define the length of the extension line. This places the “zero” dimension. If the
Datum Value field is active, the Datum Value is placed as the dimension.
5. Enter a data point to define the endpoint of the ordinate dimension. If Location is Automatic or Semi-
Automatic, the text is aligned with the text in the “zero” dimension.
6. If Location is set to Manual, enter a data point to define the length of the extension line and position the
text.
8. Reset to stop or go back to step 5 to dimension another ordinate from the same origin.

Tool Settings for Dimension Ordinates:
Datum Value Sets a base value of the origin when labeling distances along an axis.
Ordinate
Clicking this icon sets the tool's mode to Ordinate Unstacked, which is used to label distances
Untracked
along an axis from an origin (datum) along the ordinate axis (the line along which distances
are measured).
Clicking this icon sets the tool's mode to Ordinate Stacked, which is used to label distances
Ordinate along an axis from an origin (datum) along the ordinate axis (the line along which distances
Stacked are measured). The dimensions are stacked.
To use this mode effectively, the Stacked Dimensions setting (Dimension Styles dialog,
Advanced tab > Tool Specific > Ordinate) must be on.
Sets the tool's mode to Ordinate Free Location, which is used to label distances along an axis
from an origin (datum) along the ordinate axis (the line along which distances are measured).
Ordinate Free
When Location is set to Manual, this tool gives you maximum flexibility in placing the
Location
dimensions.
To use this mode effectively, the Stacked Dimensions setting (Dimension Styles dialog,
Advanced tab > Tool Specific > Ordinate) must be on.
Decrement in
If on, the value opposite to the direction of the ordinate will be in a decreasing value
Reverse
(including negative numbers).
Direction

13.2.5 Change Dimension
The Change Dimension tool is used to change a dimension element to the active dimension attributes, which can
be set as follows:
• In the Dimension Styles dialog box (Geometry and Text tabs).
• By selecting a Dimension Style in the Change Dimension tool settings.
To change a dimension to the active dimension attributes
1. Click the Change Dimension tool.
2. Identify the dimension.
3. Accept the changes.
Alternative Method — To change a dimension by changing the dimension style
1. Click the Change Dimension tool.
2. Select the dimension.
3. In the Change Dimension tool settings, use the option menu to choose a different dimension style.
4. Accept the changes.
To change only some of a dimension's attributes
1. Select the dimension element(s).
2. In the Change Attributes tool box, select the Match All Element Settings (SmartMatch) tool.
3. Adjust the dimension settings as desired.
4. Use the Change Dimension tool to apply the changed settings to the selected dimension element(s).

Tool Settings for Change Dimension:

Displays the active dimension style, which is set on the Dimension Styles dialog. The option
Style
menu lets you select other available dimension styles.
Dimension
Opens the Dimension Styles dialog, which lets you create and define dimension styles.
Styles icon
Annotation
Scale lock icon
13.2.6 Match Dimension Attributes
The Match Dimension Attributes tool is used to set the active dimension settings to the dimension attributes of a
dimension element.
 To change a dimension to the active dimension attributes, use the Change Dimension tool in the
Dimensions toolbox.
To match dimension settings
1. Select the Match Dimension Settings tool.
2. Identify the dimension element.
3. Accept the new active dimension settings.

13.2.7 Reassociate Dimension
The Reassociate Dimension tool is used to reassociate a linear or radial dimension to an element.
You can reassociate dimensions to elements individually, or by using a fence and selection set. The intended
elements must appear in the view window for the reassociation of their dimensions to occur.
To identify dimensions that have lost their association, Display Broken Associations with Different Symbology, in
the Operation category of the Preferences dialog box (Utilities > Preferences…) is on by default. With this setting
on, any dimensions that lose their associativity are emphasized with a thick, dashed line.
This tool supports linear and radial dimensions (line, line string, multi-line, shape, circular arc, or circle). It does not
support ordinate dimensions or angle dimensions. To reassociate an ordinate dimension to an element, for
example, use the Modify Element tool.
To recreate a dimension's associativity individually
1. Select the Reassociate Dimension tool.
2. Identify the dimension to reassociate.

The dimension highlights, as well as the element to which the dimension was associated.
3. Enter a data point to accept the reassociation.

The dimension is reassociated with its element, and the thick, dashed lines representing the broken
dimension are restored to the active line weight.
Tool Settings for Reassociate Dimension:
Use Fence If on, reassociates dimensions within the fence contents that have lost their associativity.

13.3 Other Dimension Tools

While the most commonly used tools are located in the Dimensioning tool box located in the Task Navigation tool
box, MicroStation contains many other tools. These tools are located in the Tool Boxes, Dimension Tools as shown
below. The Dimensioning Tools is only accessible through the Tool Boxes dialog box. Select Tools > Tool Boxes
from the Main Menu bar, in the Tool Boxes dialog box toggle on Dimension Tools like shown below. Or select
Tools > Dimensions > (select Linear Dimensions or Angular Dimensions or Radial Dimensions or Misc
Dimensions).
The Dimension Tools tool box contains tool boxes related to certain types of dimensioning.
13.3.1 Linear Dimensions Tool Box
The Linear Dimensions Tool Box contains tools for placing specialized types of linear dimensions.

13.3.2 Angular Dimensions Tool Box
The Angular Dimensions tool box contains tools for placing specialized angular dimensions.
13.3.3 Radial Dimensions Tool Box
The Radial Dimensions tool box contains tools for placing Radial Dimensions.
13.3.4 Miscellaneous Dimensions Tool Box
The Miscellaneous Dimensions tool box contains tools for editing dimensions, as well as some additional
dimension placement tools. These tools perform dimensioning that is not specific to linear, angular, or radial
dimensioning.
 Because of the depth of functionality contained in the Dimensioning tool box, these tools will rarely
need to be used.

13.4 Dimension Styles

A Dimension Style is a saved set of dimensioning settings. The Dimension Styles dialog box lets you manage
dimension styles.
The options are organized under tabs, and a preview area lets you quickly view style modifications. Dimension
styles can be stored in either the open DGN file or a DGN library.
You can define dimension styles and apply them to dimension elements during placement. Dimension styles can
be created, customized, and saved for easy recall. Changes made to a dimension style propagate to all dimension
previously set with the dimension style in the DGN file.
Dimension styles can be stored in DGN Library and used in a DGN file. Changes made to the dimension style (from
a dimension style library) within a DGN file are called overrides if the style is not saved. Dimensions placed with
overrides do not change if the style is changed and saved. To remove the override, the Change Dimension tool can
be used to match the Dimension Style.
The active dimension style is used by the Dimensioning tools.
Before placing dimensions in a drawing, the user may want to adjust the dimension settings. Settings control the
appearance of dimensions in a drawing. These settings can then be saved into styles.
There are many settings associated with dimensioning. Most of the dimension settings options reside in the
Dimension Settings dialog (Element > Dimension Styles). The Dimension Settings dialog includes several categories
of attributes that can be set. They are arranged based on the part of a dimension they affect. For instance, the
Dimension Lines category includes settings for the attributes of the dimension lines. These settings affect any
dimension that is created, regardless of which tool is used.

13.4.1 Dimension Styles Dialog Box
The Dimension Styles dialog box is used to create and modify dimension styles. Also sets the active dimension
style (or, if a style is not active, the active dimension settings). Opens when Element > Dimension Styles is chosen.
The title bar identifies the active dimension style.
When you change a dimension styles setting, the setting is highlighted in blue.
• Dimension Styles list - Style changes and updates operate on the selected styles. To select multiple
styles, use the Ctrl and Shift keys.
• Icons - Controls how dimension styles are created and managed.
• Geometry tab - The Geometry tab contains controls that affect the appearance of the dimension's
geometry.
• Units tab - The Units tab contains controls that affect the display format for units in dimension text.
• Text tab - The Text tab contains controls that affect the placement and appearance of dimension text.

• Symbology tab - The Symbology tab contains controls for dimension lines, extension lines, text, and
terminator symbology.
• Advanced tab - The Advanced tab contains all controls for dimension styles. Many of these controls are
also found on other Dimension Styles tabs.
• Preview pane - Displays how dimensions will look using the active settings in the active dimension style.
Right-click to display a menu that lets you turn on and off the Preview pane, as well as select the type of
dimensions to display: Linear, Angular, Radial, or Note.
 ODOT has created many dimensions styles that are available for use in drawing files. Dimension styles
will rarely have to be created or edited.
13.4.2 ODOT’s Dimension Styles
ODOT has created dimension styles defined in the ODOT Standard DGN Library, ODOT_Styles.dgnlib.
Similar to Text Styles, a MicroStation Dimension Style is a saved set of dimensioning parameters and can be set by
use of the Model Annotation Scale.
The following ODOT Dimension Styles have been defined:
Dimension Style Font *Text Size Description

Dec-0, Slanted Font 31 0.14 Decimal Feet, No decimal places
Dec-0, Straight Font 30 0.14 Decimal Feet, No decimal places
Dec-1, Slanted Font 31 0.14 Decimal Feet, 1 decimal place
Dec-1, Straight Font 30 0.14 Decimal Feet, 1 decimal place
Dec-2, Slanted Font 31 0.14 Decimal Feet, 2 decimal places
Dec-2, Straight Font 30 0.14 Decimal Feet, 2 decimal places
Dec-Multiline, Slanted Font 31 0.14 Decimal Feet, 0.01 accuracy
Dec-Multiline, Straight Font 30 0.14 Decimal Feet, 0.01 accuracy
Fract-Multiline, Slanted Font 31 0.14 Fractions, 1/16” accuracy
Fract, Slanted Font 31 0.14 Fractions, 1/16” accuracy
*Text size units are “inches”.

When a Dimension tool is selected, the dimension style can be selected for use as shown below:
To set the text size for dimensions, set the Model Annotation Scale in the Models properties dialog box. Then
before dimensions are placed, be sure to toggle on the Annotation Scale option as shown below.

13.5 Editing Dimensions

Dimensions can be edited in several different ways. The tools in the Modify tool box are used to modify the
dimension geometry, and the dimension text is edited with the Edit Text tool in the Text tool box.
13.5.1 Edit Text
To edit a dimension’s text
1. Select the Edit Text tool from the Text tool box.
2. Select the dimension text that requires editing and pick in space. The Text Editor appears. The “*” that is
in the Text Editor represents the dimension text.
3. To prefix the text, put text in front of it. To add a suffix, put text behind the asterisk.
4. To replace the text, remove the asterisk and type the desired text.
 You can delete the asterisk when editing dimension text. To restore the text that is automatically
generated from the geometry of the dimensioned element, edit the dimension's text again and insert
an asterisk.
 Text entered in the Text Editor window is not associative — it does not change when the dimension
element is modified.
13.5.2 Modify Element
To change the location of a dimension’s text and location lines
1. Select the Modify Element from the Modify tool box.
2. Select the dimension text or extension line that requires relocation.
3. Select the new location for the dimension text or extension line.

13.5.4 Insert Vertex
To insert an extension line into a dimension string
1. Select the Insert Vertex tool from the Modify tool box.
2. Select the dimension string to add the dimension to.
3. Select the location for the new extension line.
13.5.5 Delete Vertex
To delete an extension line from a dimension string
1. Select the Delete Vertex tool from the Modify tool box.
2. Select the extension line to delete.

13.6 Controlling the Display of Dimensions

The View Attributes dialog box is used to enable or disable the display of dimension elements on a per view basis.
The View Attribute Dimensions toggle controls whether the dimensions are displayed in a particular view or all
views.

Table of Contents:
14.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 3
14.2 TYPES OF CUSTOM LINE STYLES ..................................................................................... 3
14.2 USING CUSTOM LINE STYLES ......................................................................................... 4
14.2.1 LINE STYLES DIALOG BOX ............................................................................................... 6
14.3 MODEL-BASED LINE STYLE SCALE ................................................................................... 7
14.4 ODOT’S RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SCALING LINE STYLES ............................................. 12
BASEMAP: ........................................................................................................................... 12
GEOPAK PLACEMENT (EXISTING AND PROPOSED): ....................................................................... 14
SURVEY PROCESSING (EXISTING BASEMAP): ................................................................................. 16
SHEET FILES: ........................................................................................................................ 17


14.1 Introduction
Line styles are used to differentiate curvilinear elements in the design file and on the plotted sheet. There are
eight default line styles available in MicroStation using the values zero (0) through seven (7). These default line
styles are defined by MicroStation and cannot be redefined by the user. Custom Line Styles consist of user-defined
stroke patterns with embedded symbols or text, which are completely user definable. Custom line style definitions
are stored in line style libraries, which are called resource files (.rsc). ODOT has developed a set of Custom Line
Styles to be used for drawing various plan view graphic items requiring custom symbology.
ODOT’s custom line styles are defined in the resource file ODOT_Linestyles.rsc that is located in the
i:/ODOTstd/V8istd/symb/ directory. The MicroStation configuration variable MS_SYMBRSC is used to specify the
custom line style resource file. If the variable is not set correctly, the line styles will display as a solid line.
Standard line codes and custom line styles for plan graphics are specified in the CADD Information Table,
Appendix A in the CADD Engineering Manual.
 Users shall not create their own custom line styles for use on ODOT plan sheets.
14.2 Types of Custom Line Styles

ODOT CADD Standards contain two types of custom line style definitions:
1. “Cosmetic” line styles

Cosmetic line styles are used to represent the location of an item, but not the actual size or spacing of the
item. A fence line, shown below, is an example of a cosmetic custom line style.
• The location of the symbols along the custom line style does not represent the actual location of fence
posts, and are intended only to designate the line as a fence line.
• Cosmetic line styles are typically displayed in the design file at a scale corresponding to the intended
plotting scale of the final plans.

2. “Physical” line styles

Physical line styles are used to represent the location of an item, and the linear spacing of the components
of the item. A pavement marking lane line, shown below, which consists of consists of alternating 10’
dashes and 30’ gaps, is an example of a physical custom line style.
• Physical line styles are always placed in the design file at a scale of 1, regardless of the plotting scale.
• Physical line styles are designated as such in the line style designation and cannot be scaled using ODOT
CADD Standards.
When elements are drawn using a custom line style, the scale of the line style can be set by one of two methods:
1. Set the active Custom Line Style scale using the Level Manager.
2. Set the new Model Line Style Scale parameter.
14.2 Using Custom Line Styles

When placing elements in the design file using the ByLevel Symbology feature, the line style is already chosen for
you; however there are some levels that the user will need to select an optional line style that is available to show
different symbology in the design file. For example, the user is placing a Concrete Barrier in their file; there are
several different types of concrete barrier line styles available so the user will need to select the correct one. This
method keeps the overall number of levels manageable.
To view custom line styles present in the design file or to make one active, select Element > Line Styles > Custom
from the Main Menu Bar.

The Line Styles dialog box displays. This dialog box allows the user to review the line styles currently loaded or
select a line style in the MicroStation design file.
To select a line style Double-Click the name in the Names list or in the list box select the name and Click the large
button at the bottom of the dialog box, which shows the style.
Another way to view or select a line style is to select the Line Styles list from the Attributes tool bar as shown
below.
 If you want to preview the line styles turn on the preview window. If it is not turned on, Right-Click in
the gray area of the Attributes tool bar and toggle on Symbology Preview to display the preview
window.

14.2.1 Line Styles Dialog Box
The options available in the Line Styles dialog box are:
• Width - Sets the beginning and ending stroke lengths (in working units) for the Active Line Style. This
option is not available with the ODOT custom line styles.
• Scale factor - Sets the scale factor applied to all displayable characteristics (dash length and width, point
symbol size) of the Active Line Style.
• Shift - Sets the method by which each stroke pattern in the Active Line Style is shifted. If Distance or
Fraction is selected, a text field displays for setting the distance or fraction value.
 A suggested alternative to Shifting a custom line style in the design file:

1. Select the Modify Line Style Attributes tool from the Change Attributes tool box and select Shift in
the tool settings window like shown below:

The movement of the pointer shows the direction and extent of the change that will occur upon entry
of the next data point.

14.3 Model-based Line Style Scale

When working on a project you attach the Design models as references to the Sheet model at a 1:1 scale then
scale the drawing border to cover the required area in the design, all text and dimensioning must be scaled the
same amount, also. This is to ensure that when the scaled print is created that all Line Styles, text and
dimensioning elements are at the correct physical size.
To simplify this process, when you create a sheet in the Sheet model, you have the option of associating an
Annotation Scale to it.
Every model can have a global line style scale factor that is applied to every line style within the model. The scale
of line styles within a reference can be affected by the global line style scale of either the active model, the
referenced model, both, or neither.
A model's global line style scale factor can easily be set to be the same as the annotation scale factor.
MicroStation supports two methods for setting the Line Style Scale within the Model Properties dialog as shown
below.

Both options are used to set a multiplication scale factor that will be applied to the placement scale of custom line
styles. Each option is explained in detail below.
1. Global Line Style Scale
The Global Line Style Scale option is used to set a multiplication factor that will be applied to the custom
line styles. This applies to new elements as they are placed as well as elements previously placed in the
design file. In the example above, a multiplication factor of 20 has been entered.
2. Annotation Scale
The Annotation Scale option sets the custom line style multiplication factor to equal the Annotation Scale
value.
After setting the Line Style Scale, select OK on the Model Properties dialog to apply the scale factor. The custom
line style for any line previously placed in the file is automatically adjusted to reflect the value.
 Line styles that have been defined to represent the “physical” dimensions of an object cannot be
scaled (pavement marking lines for example). Therefore changing the Global Line Style Scale or the
Annotation Scale value will not impact elements placed using these line styles.
 Selecting the Annotation Scale option or setting the Global Line Style Scale value does not set the
value of the Scale factor on the Line Styles dialog box. This is a multiplication factor that is applied to
the placement scale to determine the scale for the display of the custom line style. The example below
further illustrates this concept:
If you open the Model Properties dialog (File > Models / Edit Model Properties)

Set the Line Style Scale to Global Line Style Scale with a value of 1.0 as shown below.
Select Element > Line Styles > Custom to access the Line Styles dialog shown below. Set the line style
Scale factor to 1.0.
Set the active level to RD_P_Fence.
Place a 500’ line using a custom line style. The Lines Style Scale is determined as follows:
Global Line Style Scale * Scale Factor = Display Scale

1*1=1

Now change the Model Properties to use a Global Line Style Scale value of 20.0. The display of the line
styles is scaled by a factor of 20.

20 * 1 = 20
The actual element line style scale value is still 1.0 even though the line style is displayed at 20 scale.
Select the Element Information command to review the properties of the line that you just placed in
the design file.
The element maintains a placement Line Style Scale value of 1, as shown below, but is displayed at a scale
of 20 according to the Model Properties.
 Important Note: Setting both the Model Properties Line Style Scale value and the Line Style Scale
factor value to 20 will result in line styles displaying for a 400 scale drawing.

20 * 20 = 400

 The custom line style display of Reference attachments can be affected by the Model’s Line Style Scale
parameter. When attaching references, the Global LineStyle Scale option is available on the
Reference Attachment Settings dialog to select how the line styles of References will be scaled.

14.4 ODOT’s Recommendations for Scaling Line Styles

For Both Roadway and Bridge Projects, basemap design files are used to draw existing and proposed plan view
information for the entire length of the project. All basemap information shall be drawn in the default “Design”
model using real world dimensions at a 1:1 scale. Custom Line Styles are to be placed in the basemap at a scale of
one (1) so the Model Properties “Line Style Scale” feature can be used.
When attaching the basemaps as References into the “Sheet” model, set the Model Properties Line Style Scale for
the appropriate sheet scale. Changing the Model Properties Line Style Scale value will cause the display of the line
styles to change according to the value selected. This will affect line styles drawn in the active file, as well as
referenced graphics, depending on the settings when the references were attached.
The recommendations listed below are suggestions based on the features available in MicroStation V8i.
Basemap:
Manual Placement (Existing and Proposed):
Place all Line Styles in the basemap design file at a scale of one (1.0).

When working in the basemap, use the following steps to set the Line Style Scale:
In the Model Properties dialog box, set the Line Style Scale using one of the following two (2) methods:
1. From the Line Style Scale drop-down menu, select Annotation Scale to set the line style scale factor
to match the Model Annotation Scale.
 This is the recommended procedure for all Roadway Design files.
2. From the Line Style Scale drop-down menu, select Global Line Style Scale to set the line style scale
factor to a value different than the Model Annotation Scale.

GEOPAK Placement (Existing and Proposed):
The GEOPAK Design and Computation Manager dialog box can be used to place line styles in the basemap
using the default Design mode.
The Design mode is used to plot COGO elements into MicroStation, with the desired symbology, by use of the
Draw Plan and Profile dialog box. It can also be used to set drafting standards used in conjunction with
MicroStation’s element placement commands, with the Place Influence option toggled on, as shown below:
When using the Design mode the following procedure is used to place Line Styles in the basemap:
Before you begin placing MicroStation elements in Design Mode, it is good practice to check the Design
Settings to ensure that the Custom Line Style Creation’s Scale
Factor value is set properly.
From the Design and Computation Manager dialog box,

select Settings > Design to access the Design Settings dialog
box shown at right.

The following options related to Line Style placement are available from or when using the Design Settings
dialog box:
Custom Line Style Creation

The default custom line style Scale Factor to be used
when drawing MicroStation elements is specified here.
For ODOT plans, this value should be set to one (1.0) as
shown right, to allow the Model Annotation Scale to
control the custom line style scale.
The Annotation Scale is set as follows for Custom Line Styles:
• Select the Models dialog box.
• From the Models dialog box, select Edit Model Properties to access the Model Properties dialog
box as shown below.
• From the Line Style Scale drop-down menu, set the Line Style Scale as desired.
In the example shown right, the

Annotation Scale is set to a value
of Engr 1:20 for a 20 scale plan
sheet. The Line Style Scale value
is set to match the Annotation
Scale.

Survey Processing (Existing Basemap):
The GEOPAK Project Preferences dialog box is used to control how the line styles in the basemap will be
drawn. To use the Model Properties “Line Style Scale” feature, the linear field data must be visualized at a
scale of one (1.0) as shown below:
The Plot Scale feature is used to control the size of the custom line styles used in the mapping of the survey
data. The base scale is defined for each feature code in the SMD file. The Plot Scale should normally be set to
a value of one (1.0) for all ODOT projects.
 For more detailed information on processing the survey data into MicroStation see the GEOPAK V8i Survey
Manual and the GEOPAK V8i Road 1 Manual.

Sheet Files:
In the “Sheet” model, set the Model Properties Line Style Scale for the appropriate sheet scale.
In the Model Properties dialog box, set the Line Style Scale using one of the following two (2) methods:
1. From the Line Style Scale drop-down menu, select Annotation Scale to set the line style scale factor
of the lines styles to match the Model Annotation Scale.
 This is the recommended procedure for all Roadway Design files.

2. From the Line Style Scale drop-down menu, select Global Line Style Scale to set the line style scale
factor to a value different than the Model Annotation Scale.

When attaching References in the “Sheet” model, set the Global LineStyle Scale to Master in the Reference
Attachment Settings dialog box. This will allow the master file to control the scaling of line styles in the active file
and all reference attachments.

Important Notes when Referencing:
• Be aware that if the Line Styles were placed in the basemap using a Scale factor other than a
Scale of 1. The referenced line styles are scaled by the Model Properties Line Style Scale set in
the new design file and will appear out of scale.
• If the survey data was mapped (visualized) in the basemap for a specific scale, such as 20, set the
option “Global Line Style Scale” to Reference in the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box
to match the Annotation Scale value set in the original reference file.
• If the Model Annotation Scale is already set in the design file, the Detail Scale in the Reference
Attachment Settings dialog box displays the Model Annotation Scale.

Table of Contents:
15.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 3
15.2 ELEMENT INFORMATION TOOL ..................................................................................... 3
15.2.1 QUICK INFORMATION DIALOG BOX ................................................................................... 6
15.3 DESIGN FILE SETTING..................................................................................................... 7
15.4 MEASUREMENT TOOLS ................................................................................................. 8
15.4.1 MEASURE DISTANCE ..................................................................................................... 9
15.4.2 MEASURE RADIUS ...................................................................................................... 13
15.4.3 MEASURE ANGLE BETWEEN LINES .................................................................................. 14
15.4.4 MEASURE LENGTH ...................................................................................................... 15
15.4.5 MEASURE AREA ......................................................................................................... 16
15.5 MESSAGE CENTER ....................................................................................................... 18


15.1 Introduction
Placing elements at precise sizes and locations requires a way to measure and analyze the results. This becomes
more important as the user learns construction techniques that involve the interaction of different elements and
tools. This chapter discusses the information and measuring tools, along with their settings.
15.2 Element Information Tool

The Element Information tool allows the user to review and edit the attributes, properties and geometry of
elements in the design files. The Element Information dialog box can be opened when using one of the methods
below:
• From the Reset pop-up menu select Element Information like shown at
right.
• In the Primary Tools tool box select the Element Information icon.
• From the Main Menu bar select Element > Information.

In using this tool, when an element is selected, the Element Information dialog box appears. This dialog box
allows the user to review or modify the attributes, properties and geometry of the selected element.

The selected element(s) is listed in the top frame. Depending on the type of element you select different
informational tabs appear in the bottom frame. Information displayed on each of these pertains to the element
whose list entry is selected in the top frame.
Not all the settings listed below display each time an element is selected with the Element Information tool.
You can hide and reveal the categories of properties as needed using the arrow icon at the right of each category
as shown below.
You can modify geometry properties of primitive elements, such as keypoint coordinates, orientation, and
dimensions, by clicking on a parameter and changing its value as shown below.

The properties displayed in the dialog box automatically update as you select and deselect different elements
using the Element Selection tool.
15.2.1 Quick Information Dialog Box
An alternative to using the Element Information dialog box to review and change the general properties of an
element, such as level and color, is to do the following:
Regardless of the selected tool, point to the element.
Press and hold down the <Alt> key
Press the Reset button on your graphical input device, typically the right mouse button.
Doing this opens the Quick Info dialog box, which is a more compact version of the Element Info dialog box.

15.3 Design File Setting

As mentioned previously, the data format in which a measured distance, area or radius displays in the design file is
set in the DGN File Settings dialog, which is accessed by selecting Settings > Design File from the Main Menu Bar.
The Working Units Category sets the accuracy of the resulting measurement and working unit format. The Format
choices for Linear Units are Master Units, Sub Units or Working Units. Accuracy sets the decimal accuracy. Up to
six decimal places are allowed.
Selecting Master Units causes the measured values to be displayed in master units only. With the Accuracy set to
one decimal place and Format set to Master Units, an element measuring one foot would be reported as 1.0’.
Selecting Sub Units for the Format displays master and sub unit values (1.0’.0”).
The Label option set in the Working Units Category of the DGN File Settings dialog box determines how
measurements are reported. For instance, if the letters FT for FEET are used as the label for Master Units, FT
displays in the Status Bar along with the measurement (1.0 FT). If the foot symbol (’) is selected instead, that label
appears (1.0’).
The Working Units are set form the seed file to the correct setting and users are required to keep all files in the
ODOT standard working units.
Linear Units - Sets the format, units, and accuracy for linear units in a model.

15.4 Measurement Tools

The Measurement tools let users make real world measurements based on drawing elements. The results of
measurements made with these tools are displayed in the Status Bar in the units that are set in Working Units and
the Format chosen for the Linear Units in the DGN File Settings dialog box.
MicroStation’s steps for measuring are similar to the steps for placing elements. First, choose the tool to be used
and then follow the prompts to choose the necessary elements or locations involved in the measurement.
Measurements are reported in the Status Bar or in the tool settings window.
To access these tools, select the Measure tool box from either the Main tool box or the Task Navigation tool box
using one of the following methods shown below.

Measure Tool Box:
Measure Distance Used to measure distances with a variety of methods.
Used to measure the radius and diameter values of arcs and

Measure Radius
circle.
Measure Angle Between

Used to measure the angle between two lines.
Lines
Measure Length Used to measure the total length of an element.
Measure Area Used to measure the area and perimeter of a shape or region.
Measure Volume Used to measure the volume of a 3D solid.
15.4.1 Measure Distance
The Measure Distance tool is used to measure the distance(s) along an element or Measure the cumulative
distance from a data point or Measure the perpendicular distance between an element and a data point or
Measure the minimum distance between two elements.
To measure the cumulative distance from an origin
1. Select the Measure Distance tool.

2. In the Tool Settings window, set Distance to Between Points.
3. Enter a data point to identify the origin (the point from which to measure).
4. Enter a second data point.
The distance between that point and the origin is displayed in the status bar.
5. Enter another data point(s). The cumulative distance from the origin is displayed.
Or
Reset to return to step 3.

To measure the distance along an element

2. In the Tool Settings window, set Distance to Along Element.
3. Identify the element at the origin (the point from which to measure).
4. Enter a data point to define a point along the element. The distance from the origin along the element is
displayed in the status bar.
If the element is closed, this data point defines the direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) in which
measurements are made.
5. Enter a data point(s). The distance along the element from the origin is displayed in the status bar.
Or
To measure perpendicular distance from an element
2. In the tool settings window, set Distance to Perpendicular.
3. Turn off Segment Only.

The perpendicular distance between the nearest part of the element and this point is displayed in the
Distance field. A temporary “line” is displayed as a visual aid but is not placed in the design.
6. Enter another data point(s) to define other perpendicular measurements.

Or

To measure perpendicular distance from a segment of an element
2. In the Tool Settings window, set Distance to Perpendicular.
3. Turn on Segment Only.
4. Identify the element at the segment that is to be used.

The perpendicular distance between the element and this point are displayed in the Distance field. A
temporary “line” is displayed as a visual aid but is not placed in the design. If the data point is not within
the limits of the selected segment, then the projection of the segment is used.
6. Enter another data point(s) to define other perpendicular measurements.

Or
If the element is a line string, shape, curve, complex chain, or complex shape, the distance is measured
perpendicular to the segment identified in step 3.
To measure the minimum distance between elements
2. In the Tool Settings window, set Distance to Minimum Between.
5. Accept the elements.

The minimum distance between the elements is displayed in the status bar. A temporary “line” is
displayed as a visual aid but is not placed in the design.

Tool Settings for Measure Distance:

Sets the method of distance measuring.
• Between Points — Measures the cumulative distance from an origin.
• Along Element — Measures along an element.

Distance
• Perpendicular — Measures the perpendicular distance between an element.
• Minimum Between — Measures the minimum distance between two elements.
• Maximum Between — Measures the maximum distance between two elements.

Sets how measurements for distances are calculated.
• True — Measures the true distances in 3D, taking into account the depth
component in the view.
Mode
• View — Measures distances between projections of the elements on to the view
plane (no allowance for the depth component).
• AccuDraw/ACS — Measures distances between projections of the elements on to

the AccuDraw drawing plane, or on to the active ACS.
Distance Displays the result of the last measurement.
Accumulated
(Distance set to Between Points only) Displays the total distance measured.
Distance
(Distance set to Perpendicular only) If on, the measurement is constrained to be
perpendicular to the selected segment of the element, or the projection of the segment.
Segment Only
If off, the perpendicular measurement is taken from the nearest segment of the selected
element.

15.4.2 Measure Radius
The Measure Radius tool is used to measure:
• The radius of a circle or circular arc.

• The radius of a cone or cylinder.
• The primary and secondary axes of an ellipse or elliptical arc.
• The radius of a circular segment or axes of an elliptical segment of a complex chain or complex shape.
To measure an element's radius
1. Select the Measure Radius tool.
2. Identify the element or segment.

The measurement is displayed in the status bar.
Tool Settings for Measure Radius
The Measure Radius settings dialog box displays the last measurement.

15.4.3 Measure Angle Between Lines
The Measure Angle Between Lines tool is used to measure the angle between two lines or segments of a line
string, shape, or multi-line. If the identified lines do not intersect, an intersection point is computed to serve as
the vertex of the measured angle.
To measure the angle between two lines
1. Select the Measure Angle Between Lines tool.
2. Identify the first line.
3. Identify the second line.
4. Accept the lines.

The angle measurement is displayed in the status bar.
Tool Settings for Measure Angle Between Lines

Sets how measurements for the angle are calculated. Options are:
• Global Z
About
• View Z
• AccuDraw Z
Angle Displays the result of the angle measured.

15.4.4 Measure Length
The Measure Length tool is used to measure the length of an element(s) and to analyze mass properties. For a
closed element or a surface, the length of the perimeter or wireframe geometry is measured.
To measure the length of an element(s)
1. Select the Measure Length tool.

The length displays in the status bar. If Mass Properties is on, the mass properties analysis is displayed in
the Mass Properties window.
Tool Settings for Measure Length:

When measuring curves, the maximum percentage of the distance between the true curve
Tolerance (%) and the approximation used to measure. A low Tolerance makes the measurement more
accurate but increases calculation time.
Mass Properties If on, the Mass Properties window displays the mass property analysis.
If on, a graphic crosshair that represents the center of mass for the measured element(s) is
Display Centroid
displayed.
Sets how measurements for the length are calculated.
• Global Z — Measures the true distances in 3D sheet and design models.

• View Z — Measures the projected length based on the view rotation. Not
Mode recommended for use in 3D design models.
• ACS Z — Measures about the active Auxiliary Coordinate System (ACS) or in the
ACS XY plane. Results are projected about the ACS Z or on the ACS XY plane.
• AccuDraw Z – Measures about the AccuDraw compass XY or about AccuDraw Z.
Results are projected about the AccuDraw Z or on the AccuDraw XY plane.
Length Displays the result of the last length measured.
Direction Displays the result of the last angle measured.

15.4.5 Measure Area
The Measure Area tool is used to measure area and perimeter.
To measure the area and perimeter of one element
1. Select the Measure Area tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Element.

The element's Surface Area, and Perimeter, are displayed in the tool settings window.
Tool Settings for Measure Area:


Sets the area that is measured.
• Element — Area of one closed element.
• Fence — (Fence present only) Area enclosed by the active fence, other than a
named fence, or a fence created from an element.
• Intersection — Area bounded by the intersection of two or more closed planar
elements.
Where more than two elements are involved, use <Ctrl-data point> to select the
extra elements.
• Union — Area bounded by the union of two or more closed planar elements.
Method
extra elements.
• Difference — Area bounded by the difference between two or more closed planar
elements.
extra elements.
• Flood — Area enclosed by elements that either touch one another or whose
endpoints fall within the Maximum Gap.
• Points — Planar area with its vertices defined by a series of data points. Where the
points are input in a figure 8 type shape, then the total area of the two loops is
calculated.
For curves, sets the maximum percentage of the distance between the true curve and the
Tolerance (%) approximation used to measure. A low Tolerance makes the measurement more accurate
but increases calculation time.
Mass Properties If on, the mass property analysis displays in the Mass Properties window.
If on, a graphic crosshair that represents the measured element's center of mass is
Display Centroid
displayed.
Sets how measurements for area are calculated.
• Global Z — Measures the true distances in 3D sheet and design models.
• View Z — Measures the projected area based on the view rotation. Not
recommended for use in 3D design models.
Mode
• ACS Z – Measures about the active Auxiliary Coordinate System (ACS) or in the ACS
XY plane. Results are projected about the ACS Z or on the ACS XY plane.
• AccuDraw Z — Measures about the AccuDraw compass XY or about AccuDraw Z.
Results are projected about the AccuDraw Z or on the AccuDraw XY plane.
Sets the units used to display the last area measured.
• square <master units>
Area Unit • square m — (Metric units only) Square meters.
• Acre (US) — (English units only)
• Hectare — (Metric units only)
Area Displays the result of the last area measured.
Perimeter Unit Sets the units used to display the perimeter length for the last area measured.
Perimeter Displays the perimeter length for the last area measured.
Locate Interior (Method set to Flood only) If on, the area enclosed by the bounding elements is calculated,
Shapes minus the area of any closed elements inside the bounding area.
(Method set to Flood only) If on, the area to be included displays dynamically as you move
Dynamic Area
the screen pointer over the view.

(Method set to Flood only) Sets the largest distance allowed between consecutive elements.
Maximum Gap
If zero, the elements must connect to bound an area.
15.5 Message Center

The Message Center window is used to display a running log of system messages. When you right-click the
Message Center field of the status bar, a pop-up displays that allows you to open the Message Center window,
save the messages or open the Message Center Properties dialog box.
The Message Center is used to review error, warning and information messages previously displayed in the Status
Bar. The default maximum number of messages saved for display in the Message Center is 50. To change this,
Right-Click on the Message Center in the Status Bar, choose Properties from the pop-up menu, and change the
number of messages to save in the messages field.
When using the Measuring tools and the user resets, the last distance disappears from the Status Bar. Click the
area to the left of where the distance is displayed in the Status Bar to open the Message Center. The last
measurement you did is kept in the Message Center.

Chapter 16 – References
Table of Contents:
16.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 3
16.2 WHAT IS A REFERENCE FILE?.......................................................................................... 3
16.2.1 ODOT’S COMMON USAGE FOR REFERENCES ....................................................................... 3
16.3 REFERENCE FILE DIALOG BOX ........................................................................................ 4
16.3.1 INTEGRATED TOOL BOX AND PULL-DOWN COMMANDS .......................................................... 5
16.3.2 REFERENCES LIST BOX.................................................................................................... 7
16.3.3 INFORMATION PANEL .................................................................................................... 7
16.4 ATTACHING REFERENCES ............................................................................................. 10
16.4.1 EDITING REFERENCE ATTACHMENT SETTINGS ..................................................................... 19
16.5 CLIPPING AND MASKING REFERENCES ......................................................................... 20
16.5.1 CLIP REFERENCE ......................................................................................................... 21
16.5.2 CLIP MASK ............................................................................................................... 22
16.5.3 DELETE CLIP .............................................................................................................. 23
16.6 MANIPULATING REFERENCE FILES ............................................................................... 24
16.6.1 RELOAD REFERENCE .................................................................................................... 24
16.6.2 MOVE REFERENCE ...................................................................................................... 25
16.6.3 COPY REFERENCE ....................................................................................................... 26
16.6.4 SCALE REFERENCE ....................................................................................................... 27
16.6.5 ROTATE REFERENCE .................................................................................................... 28
16.6.6 MIRROR REFERENCE.................................................................................................... 29
16.6.7 DETACH REFERENCE .................................................................................................... 30
16.6.8 MISC REFERENCE TOOLS ............................................................................................... 31
16.7 LOCATING LOST REFERENCE ATTACHMENTS ................................................................ 32
16.8 REFERENCE PRIORITY AND TRANSPARENCY: ................................................................ 33
16.9 REFERENCE PREFERENCE SETTINGS.............................................................................. 35
16.10 RASTER REFERENCES ................................................................................................. 36
16.10.1 ATTACH RASTER REFERENCE DIALOG BOX ....................................................................... 37
16.10.2 MODIFYING RASTER FILE ATTACHMENTS ........................................................................ 38
16.10.3 RASTER PREFERENCES ................................................................................................ 38


16.1 Introduction
In today’s engineering, individual members of a project team share electronic data files that include many different
disciplines of information such as Survey, drainage, right of way, etc. The Design files are utilized between all the
team members to fit the project together like a puzzle.
Assume you are responsible for the proposed roadway construction portion of the plan. Since the design must fit
within the right of way and meet the existing construction at the beginning of the project, you need to know where
these elements are located. In this case, you must be able to see the topographical plan in the background as a
reference while you design the roadway plan. MicroStation does this with references.
16.2 What is a Reference File?

A Reference File is a model that is attached to another model as a reference, like an overlay, to obtain a composite
picture without recopying elements over and over. References are used to display the contents of one or more
MicroStation design files within the active model.
A reference cannot be modified unless it has been activated. You can attach, as a reference, a model that resides
in either the open DGN file or in some other DGN file. MicroStation allows for an unlimited number of references
to be attached to a design file.
Elements in a Reference display as though they were in the active model, except that you cannot manipulate the
elements in a reference, however, you can snap to them and copy them into the active model.
Some advantages to using references are:

• File sizes are smaller because the same information is not needlessly copied over and over into several
design files.
• Information is updated in all design files when a change is made to the reference.
• Several users can access the reference at once without being locked out.
16.2.1 ODOT’s Common Usage for References
For ODOT the most common use of references is to display Basemap design file information in a Sheet model to
generate the various plan sheets used by a typical ODOT roadway project. References are also used to display the
contents of one basemap design file in another basemap design file to facilitate the design process (i.e. display the
existing survey data in the proposed right-of-way basemap).
When selecting a reference to attach, users must select the appropriate model, Design or Sheet, in a design file. A
Design or Sheet model can be attached as a reference to the currently active model in the open design file or in
other design files.
For Roadway projects including the Bridge site plan and Geotechnical Exploration sheets when attaching basemap
Design models to the Sheet models the user shall not scale, move, or rotate the base map reference attachment.

16.3 Reference File Dialog Box

The References dialog box is used to attach and detach reference files to a model. It is also home to several other
settings which are used to adjust reference settings and select reference tools.
There are several ways to access the References dialog box.
To open the Reference dialog box:
1. Select File > References from the Main Menu Bar.
Or
2. Select the References icon from the Primary Tools tool bar like shown below.
This opens the References dialog box like below:
There are 3 major areas of the dialog box:
1. Integrated Tool Box and Pull-down Commands

2. Reference List Box
3. Information Panel

16.3.1 Integrated Tool Box and Pull-down Commands
The Integrated tool box and Pull-Down Commands are where most of the tools are located. Either use the Tools
menu or select the icons to launch the commands.
Integrated Tool Box Icons
When enabled, displays a tree that shows the active file and the
references directly attached to it. References with other
references attached to them (nested references) are listed in black
text, and references with no attached references are listed in gray
text.
If a reference in the hierarchy has a nest depth value of 1 or more,

the user can:
Show Hierarchy • Click on the (+) sign to expand the hierarchy display.
• Select the references. When the user does this, the
References List updates to include only references
attached to the selected reference.
When the tree is not expanded, use the arrow button next to the
Show Hierarchy icon to list the active file and any references
directly attached to it. Like hierarchy tree, if the user chooses a
reference with attached references, the References List updates to
include only references attached to the selected reference.
Opens the Attach Reference dialog, which attaches a reference file

Attach Reference
or model to the active file.
Uses a boundary, such as an element or fence, to clip the

Clip Reference reference. The area of the reference outside the boundary is not
displayed.
Covers a portion of a reference that is inside a boundary. More

Mask Reference
than one clipping mask can be specified for a model.
Delete Clip Deletes an existing clipping mask.
Set Ref Back Clip Sets the back clipping plane, which is a boundary used to clip a
Z (3D Files Only) referenced 3D model.
Set Ref Front Clip Sets the front-clipping plane, which is a boundary used to clip a
Z (3D Files Only) referenced 3D model.
Reloads and redraws a reference, which lets the user view changes
Reload Reference
that have been made since it was last attached or reloaded.

Move Reference Moves the location of the reference file in the design file.
Copy Reference Copies the reference file.
Scale Reference Resizes the reference file.
Rotate Reference Rotates the reference file.
Mirror Reference Reflects a reference file about a horizontal or vertical axis.
Copies the selected reference file, and then attaches a view of the
Copy/Fold
reference file by folding it about an orthogonal axis or a defined
Reference
line.
This command sets options for displaying a reference file. These

options include Wireframe, Wiremesh, Hidden Line, Filled Hidden
Line and three types of shading. In a sheet model, the
Presentation menu has one additional option; True Hidden Line.
Unlike the other reference presentation options, True Hidden Line
Set Reference
generates a new vector model of the reference, with hidden lines
Presentation
removed. In the sheet model, a reference set to True Hidden Line
looks similar to a reference set to Hidden Line. However, when
the sheet model is printed, a reference set to True Hidden Line
prints as a true vector image. A reference set to any other
presentation option (such as Hidden Line) prints as a raster image.
Detach Reference Detaches the reference file from the active model.
Controls whether the selected references are highlighted and

surrounded by a border.
• None — Selected references are not highlighted in any

way.
• Boundaries — Places a dashed border around selected
references.
• Hilite — Highlights selected references.
• Both — Places a dashed border and highlights selected
references.

16.3.2 References List Box
The References List Box lists the references attached to the active model file, or to the nested reference selected
in the hierarchy.
To change the columns of reference information displayed, right-click on the row of column titles. Use the menu
to turn columns on or off.
To sort the list by a column, click on the column title. For example, click on Slot to sort the list by slot number.
When you right click on a reference in the references list box, you can directly access options that are available in
the Tools and Settings menus, as follows:
• Items from the Tools menu — Attach, Detach, Reload, Exchange, Open in New Session, Activate,
Deactivate, Move, Copy, Scale, Rotate, Merge Into Master, Make Direct Attachment, Clip Boundary, Clip
Mask, Delete Clip.
• Item from the Settings menu — Settings.
16.3.3 Information Panel
The Information panel displays and controls settings for a selected reference.
• Scale — Displays and sets the ratio of master units in the active model to the master units in the attached
model.
• Rotation — Displays and sets the rotation for the selected reference. For 2D files, you can enter the
rotation angle for the z-axis only. In 3D, you can enter the rotation angles for the x-, y- and z-axes.
• Offset — Displays and sets the distance between the global origin of the reference from the global origin
of the parent file, measured in units of the parent file. If the parent is 2D, Offset X and Y values are
displayed. If the parent is 3D, Offset X, Y, and Z values are displayed.
• Attachment settings icons — The information panel icons correspond to columns in the References list
box, as well as to icons on the Reference Attachment Settings dialog.
If an icon is pressed, the setting is on. Click the icons to toggle the settings on or off.
If you select multiple references that have different settings, the icons representing different settings are
shaded. For example, if one of the selected references has True Scale enabled while the other selected
reference has True Scale disabled, the True Scale icon is shaded.

• Nesting menu — Displays and sets how nested references (references attached to references) are
handled for the selected attachments.
o No Nesting - Nested references are ignored for this attachment.
o Live Nesting - The hierarchical structure of any nested references are maintained when
attaching the reference. The child references are displayed if:
 the nest Depth is set high enough.
 the child reference does not have its Ignore Attachment When Live Nesting
setting turned on.
All of the nested attachments display in the view window; however you see only the
parent reference in the References list box. To see the hierarchy of nested references,
use the Show Hierarchy icon on the References dialog box.
o Copy Attachments - Models that are attached to the attached model are copied
(referenced) directly into the active model, which flattens the hierarchical structure of the
nested references. This setting works as follows: File B is referenced to file A. File C is
referenced to file B. If file C is detached from file B, file C is still referenced to file A, unless
file C has been explicitly detached from file A.
• Overrides menu — Controls how override settings are saved for nested references. For a specific nested
reference, overrides let you control the settings for reference display, locate, snap, raster reference
display, and level display.
o Allow Overrides - The overrides are automatically created by MicroStation as required

when you modify the corresponding settings for nested references.
o Always Override - Saves the toggle and level display state for every nested attachment.
This option locks in the settings for all nested attachments. The settings change only if
you specifically change them.
o Never Override - Never creates overrides for any of the nested references. The nested
references are displayed the same as they are when the reference is opened as the
master file.
• Depth — Sets the number of levels of nested references that are displayed. Models can have their own
referenced models, which, in turn, can have more referenced models, and so on.
If Depth is set to 0, only the selected model is attached to the master model; models referenced to the
selected model are ignored.
• New Level Display — Specifies whether a reference displays new levels. The setting also applies to new
levels in nested references that are attached to the reference.
o Config Variable - New levels in the reference are displayed according to the setting for
the MS_REF_NEWLEVELDISPLAY configuration variable.
o Always - New levels in the reference are always displayed.
o Never - New levels in the reference are never displayed.

• Georeferenced — Sets the georeference mode. When a reference is attached in Reprojected mode, the
current Reference Reprojection Settings are copied into the reference attachment and stored so every
user who opens the master file uses the same reprojection settings and thus, gets the same results.
Attachment settings icons — The information panel icons correspond to columns in the References list box, as
well as to icons on the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box.
If an icon is pressed, the setting is on. Click the icons to toggle the settings on or off.
The Reference Toggles affect reference file settings and are described in the following table:
Display Icon Toggles the display of a reference on and off.
Snap Icon If toggled on, elements in a reference can be snapped to.
Locate Icon Controls whether elements in a reference can be identified.
Treat Attachment as
If on, the reference can be manipulated with the standard
Element for
manipulation tools.
Manipulation
True Scale Icon Attaches a reference in the true scale.
Scale Line Styles If toggled on, custom line style components (for example dashes)
Icon are scaled by the Scale factors.
Clip Back Icon Sets the back-clipping plane for a referenced 3D model.
Clip Front Icon Sets the front-clipping plane for a referenced 3D model.
Display Raster
Toggles the display of a Raster reference on and off.
References Icon
Ignore Attachment
If on, this ensures that if the current attachment becomes a nested
When Live Nesting
reference, it will be ignored
Icon
If toggled on, during the rendering processing source lighting cells

Use Lights Icon
located in references are used.
(PDF printer driver only) When on and the PDF printer driver is
Plot As 3D (PDF)
used, the reference is plotted as 3D data in Universal 3D (U3D)
(icon)
format.
Use Active To make a reference's annotations use the active model's
Annotation Scale annotation scale, you must turn on this option.

16.4 Attaching References

The References dialog box is used to attach reference files to a model. You can reference models from the open
DGN file, or from other DGN's that may or may not currently be opened by other users. Similarly, other users can
reference the model that you are working on.
To Attach a Reference select Tools > Attach from the

References dialog box as shown right:
Selecting the Attach Reference File command will bring up the Attach Reference dialog box like shown below. The
Attach Reference dialog box allows the user to navigate to the folder where the reference is located to attach a
model to the active model.

Attachment Method - Sets the view of the reference being attached. The list may also include saved views and
named fences. The user can select more than one orientation to attach. The options are:
• Interactive – Method brings up the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box, as shown below, to allow
the user to select the required Orientation.
• Coincident – Method automatically attaches the Reference and Aligns the reference with regard to
design plane coordinates only. This method does not bring up the Reference Attachment Setting dialog
box as shown below.
• Coincident World – Method automatically attaches the Reference and Aligns the references with the
active model with regard to both Global Origin and design plane coordinates. This method does not bring
up the Reference Attachment Setting dialog box as shown below.
Once the user selects the reference file to be attached using the Attachment Method Interactive, the Reference
Attachment Settings dialog box appears, like
shown right, so now you can select the
Orientation Attachment Method required.
 ODOT recommends using the

Coincident-World option when
attaching a reference.

Save Relative Path – If on, the relative path for the reference is saved with the file name. In order to ensure that
reference file attachments are maintained when moving project files from the original project directory to another
location, such as a CD for submission or to an archive directory, references shall be attached using relative paths.
The configuration variable MS_DISALLOWFULLREFPATH in ODOT’s project configuration variable is set to 1, so

that MicroStation does not save the full path to references. By default, MicroStation stores both an abbreviated
(portable) path and the full path to references. The full path will be wrong if the directory structure for a project is
changed or moved to the archive directory or if a different file server drive letter is used, so it can cause
inconsistent reference file location in those situations. Therefore, ODOT prefers that the full path not be saved
and that the Save Relative Path be toggled on.
A reference attachment that specifies the DGN file containing the attached model by its full (absolute) path is not
portable across directories, projects, and networked systems. Administrators can prevent the storage of full paths
in attachment data by setting the configuration variable MS_DISALLOWFULLREFPATH.

 To bring up the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box if the other attachment methods were
used, select the Reference in the References dialog box, select Settings > Attachment. The Reference
Attachment Settings dialog box is similar but a little smaller since the methods Coincident or
Coincident - World were pre-selected.
The Attachment Settings dialog box contains many settings and options, which are described as follows.
File Name Shows the reference's name.

Full Path Shows the complete file path for the reference.
Lists the models contained in the reference. This is used to select the model to be
Model
attached to the master model.
Logical Name User specified name for the reference.
Sets the optional description for the reference. The maximum valid description is 40
Description
characters.

Sets the view of the reference being attached. The list may also include saved views and
named fences. The user can select more than one orientation to attach. The options are:
• Coincident - Aligns the references with regard to design plane coordinates only.
• Coincident World - Aligns the references with the active model with regard to
both Global Origin and design plane coordinates.
Orientation
Note: ODOT recommends using the Coincident-World option when attaching a
reference.
• Standard Views - Identifies the views that can be used to display the reference:
Top, Front, Right, Isometric, Bottom, Back, Left, or Right Isometric. If the file
being attached is 2D, you can choose only the Top view.
• Saved Views — Identifies the saved views that are available in the reference.
• Named Fences — Identifies the named fences that are available in the
reference.
Represents the Master:Ref scale in terms of the sheet scale. For example, if your sheet
scale (annotation scale) is 1/8” = 1´ and you want to place a detail reference of scale 1/4”
Detail Scale
= 1´, select the new scale from the Detail Scale drop-down list. It automatically computes
the Master:Ref scale as 2:1.
Sets the ratio of the master units in the active model to the master units in the attached
Scale (Master:Ref)
reference.
Named Group Identifies a named group used to limit the elements displayed in the reference.
If Design History is on in the referenced model, lets you choose the revision to the
Revision
reference.
Level (DWG workmode only)

Determines if references attached to references are recognized when a model is attached

to the active model. The options are:
• No Nesting - References attached to the attached reference are not recognized

in the active model.
• Live Nesting - The hierarchical structure of any nested references are maintained
when attaching the parent reference to a model. When the user attaches a
reference with one or more attachments and the Nest Depth is set high enough,
all of the nested references display in the view window; however only the parent
reference is seen in the References dialog list. To see the hierarchy of any
nested references, use the Show Hierarchy icon on the References dialog.
• Copy Attachments - References attached to the attached reference are copied
directly into the active model, disregarding the hierarchical structure of the
nested references. When the user attaches a reference with one or more
attachments and the Nest Depth is high enough, all of the attachments are
displayed in the view window, and all of the attachments (parent and nested
references) are listed in the References dialog list as individual References.
Nested Attachments
Notes:
• When working in a DWG or DXF file, live nesting is always on, and there is no
limit to nest depth. Therefore, the Nested Attachments and Depth items are
disabled. To control the display of nested attachments, toggle on the Ignore
Attachment When Live Nesting option on the Attachment Settings dialog.
• The Live Nesting option merely allows nested references to be attached

hierarchically when the parent reference is attached to the model. In
MicroStation, a nested attachment is displayed only if the child reference does
not have the Ignore Attachment When Live Nesting setting toggled on, and the
parent reference has Live Nesting enabled. Once a nested reference is
attached, the user can “flatten” it to a direct attachment. To do this, right-click
the nested reference in the References dialog and choosing Make Direct
Attachment.
• The No Nesting, Live Nesting or Copy Attachments options can be set as the
default nesting preference in the Reference Category of the Preferences dialog.

Sets the number of levels of nested references that are displayed. Child references can
have their own referenced models, which, in turn, can have more referenced models, and
so on.
If Depth is set to 0, only the model is attached to the master model; referenced models in
the referenced model are ignored.
Depth
Controls how overrides are saved for nested references. For each nested reference,
overrides allow you to control the settings for reference display, locate, snap, raster
reference display, and level display. The options are:
• Allow — The overrides are automatically created by MicroStation as required
when you modify the corresponding settings for nested references.
Display Overrides • Always — Saves the toggle and level display state for every nested attachment.
This option locks in the settings for all nested attachments. The settings change
only if you specifically change them.
• Never — Never creates overrides for any of the nested references. The nested
references are displayed the same as they are when the reference is opened as
the master file.
Specifies whether a reference displays newly created levels. The setting also applies to
new levels in nested references that are attached to the reference.
Use MS_REF_NEWLEVELDISPLAY Configuration Variable - New levels in the reference are

New Level Display
displayed according to the setting for the MS_REF_NEWLEVELDISPLAY configuration
variable.
• Always — New levels in the reference are always displayed.
• Never — New levels in the reference are never displayed.

Controls the scaling of cosmetic custom line styles. Every model can have a global line
style scale factor that is applied to every line style within the model.
The scale of line styles within a reference can be affected by the global line style scale of
either the active model, the referenced model, both, or neither.
• None — Neither the active model's nor the reference model's global line style
Global Line Style
scale is used to scale the cosmetic custom line styles.
Scale
• Master — The active model's global line style scale is used to scale the cosmetic
custom line styles.
• Reference — The referenced model'sglobal line style scale is used to scale the
cosmetic custom line styles.
• Master * Reference — The active global line style scale is multiplied by the
referenced models' global line style scale to scale the cosmetic custom line
styles.
When you attach a saved view, turn on this check box to synchronize with the original
saved view.
Synchronize with
Saved View In order to change the appearance of a reference, you have to modify the saved view that
it is synchronized with. This is to ensure fidelity of display properties such as view
attributes, level masks, clip volume, display styles and others.
Defines settings for the reference. The icons correspond to columns in the References list
Toggles
box and information panel.
When attaching a reference on a sheet, you can optionally create a drawing title. A
drawing title describes a drawing on a sheet.
Drawing Title
• Create — Creates a drawing title.
• Name — Enter a name for the drawing title.
OK Attaches the model and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without attaching a model.

To attach a single reference file
1. Select the Attach References tool in the Reference files dialog box.
The Attach Reference dialog box appears.
2. Select the DGN file that contains the model to attach as a Reference.
3. From the Attachment Method option menu, choose Interactive.
4. Click Open.
The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box opens.
5. Choose the Model to attach.
6. Optional, Enter a logical name for the file.
7. Select Coincident-World from the Orientation list box.
8. Optional, Adjust the settings as necessary.
9. Click OK to accept the settings.
10. Select the Fit View tool to see the attached reference file.
 For Roadway projects including the Bridge site plan and Geotechnical Exploration sheets when
attaching basemap design models to the sheet files the user shall not scale, move, or rotate the
basemap reference attachment. Basemap design models shall be attached using the MicroStation
Coincident-World setting. If a Rotated Plot View is required, the user shall rotate the View for proper
plot orientation. The sheet border cells shall be placed in the rotated view. All reference file clipping
shall be done in the rotated view.
To Rotate a View:
In the Key in Window:
Type RV= (Angle to Rotate) and press Enter,
The RV= key-in is a short cut key-in for Rotate View,
Enter a Data point in the View Window,

The Reference file now has rotated with the view,
 Rotating the view allows the reference file to keep its coordinate points. DO NOT use the Reference
tool Rotate from the Tools pull-down menu.

16.4.1 Editing Reference Attachment Settings
Reference Attachment settings may be edited at any time. These settings control the display, nesting depth, name
and description of the chosen file. The Attachment Settings are similar to those in the Reference Attachment
Setting Dialog box.
The Attachment Settings may be invoked by double-clicking on the file to edit or select the reference to edit and
select Settings > Attachment from the pull-down menu on the References Dialog Box.

16.5 Clipping and Masking References

When using reference files, it may be preferable to only work with a portion of the file, or to hide a portion of the
file from view. Reference files have a specific set of tools available for this. These tools are found in the integrated
tool box in the Reference Files dialog box.
Clip Reference or Clip Clips a reference to a boundary defined by a fence or an

Boundary (from the Tools element. Everything outside of the fence boundary becomes
pull-down menu) invisible.
Mask Reference or Clip

Mask part of a reference defined by a fence that is inside the
Mask (from the Tools pull-
clipping boundary.
down menu)
Delete Clip Deletes the boundary for a clip mask or clip boundary.
Set Ref Back Clip Z or Clip

Back (from the Tools pull- 3D only tool. Not covered in this class.
down menu)
Set Ref Front Clip Z or Clip

Front (from the Tools pull- 3D only tool. Not covered in this class.
down menu)
 No matter what mode is used when creating the fence (Inside, Outside, Clip, etc.) the result is always a
clip of the reference file.
 Clipping does not affect the original file.

 If the original file does change, it may need to be refreshed. To refresh a file, right-click on it and
choose Refresh

16.5.1 Clip Reference
The Clip Reference tool is used to define a reference clipping boundary.
To define a reference clipping boundary using a fence
1. To define the reference clipping boundary's position, place a fence over the desired clip area.
2. In the References dialog box's list box, select the models to include in the clip boundary set.
3. Click the Clip Reference icon.

The Set Reference Clip Boundary tool settings box opens.
4. From the Method option menu, choose Fence.
5. Turn on Use References Dialog List.
6. Enter a data point to accept the clip boundary.
To define a reference clipping boundary using an element
1. To define the reference clipping boundary's position, place an element (or a cell) over the desired clip
area.
2. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references that the clip boundary will affect.
3. Click the Clip Reference tool.

The Set Reference Clip Boundary tool settings window opens.
4. From the Method option menu, choose Element.
6. Identify the element as the clipping element.
7. Accept the element as the clipping element.

Tool Settings for Clip Reference:

Determines the method by which the reference clip boundary is set.
Method • Active Fence — Uses the active fence as the clip boundary.
• Element — Uses an element or cell to set the clip boundary.
• Named Fence — Uses a named fence to set the clip boundary.
Discard Existing
If on, deletes existing clip masks before applying a new clipping boundary.
Clip Masks
Use Reference If on, the clip boundary applies to the references selected in the References dialog. If off,
Dialog List you are prompted to select the references to be clipped.
16.5.2 Clip Mask
The Clip Mask tool is used to place a reference clipping mask defined by an active fence. For more information.
To mask a reference
1. To define the reference clipping mask's position, place a fence over the desired clip area.
2. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references to be masked.
3. Click the Mask Reference icon.
The Set Reference Clip Mask settings window opens.
5. Enter a data point to accept the clip mask.
Tool Settings for Clip Mask:

Use Reference If on, the clip mask applies to the models selected on the References dialog. If off, you are
Dialog List prompted to select the models to be clipped.

16.5.3 Delete Clip
The Delete Clip is used to selectively delete clipping masks or clip boundaries.
To selectively delete reference clipping
1. In the References dialog box, select the references that have clipping to delete.
2. Click the Delete Clip icon.

The Delete Reference Clip tool settings window opens.

The clip boundary and any clip masks within the boundary highlight.
4. Identify the clipping mask to be deleted.

A clipping mask is highlighted for deletion.
Tool Settings for Delete Clip:
Use Reference
If on, clipping is deleted in the models selected on the References dialog.
Dialog List
If on, the fence contents are deleted from the reference clipping. The option menu sets the
Use Fence
Fence (Selection) Mode.

16.6 Manipulating Reference Files

Because Reference Files are not actually elements in the current drawing, MicroStation has a specific set of tools
for manipulating reference files. These tools are found in the integrated tool box in the Reference Files dialog box.
Manipulating Reference Files:
Used to reread and redraw a model to see recent changes

Reload Reference
made to it.
Move Reference Used to move a referenced model.
Used to copy attached references. This creates another

Copy Reference
reference which is a copy of the reference selected.
Scale Reference Used to scale a reference file.
Rotate Reference Used to rotate a reference file.
Mirror Reference Used to mirror a reference file.
Detach Reference Used to unload a reference file.
16.6.1 Reload Reference
To reload a reference
1. In the list box in the References dialog box, select the reference.
2. Click the Reload Reference icon.

The reference is redrawn.
To reload all attached references
1. From the Tools menu, choose Reload All.

The references are redrawn.

16.6.2 Move Reference
To move a reference selected from the References dialog box list
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references that you want to move in the active model.
2. Turn on Display, Snap, and Locate.
3. Click the Move References icon.
4. In the tool settings window, turn on Use References Dialog List.
5. Enter a data point to begin the move, and drag the reference to the desired location.
Tool Settings for Move Reference:

If on, any clipping boundary and/or clipping mask(s) is moved with the reference.
Move Boundary
with Reference If off, the reference is moved, with any clipping boundary and/or clipping mask(s) remaining
as is. In effect, the reference “slides” through the boundaries/masks.
Use Reference
If on, the models selected on the References dialog are moved.
Dialog List
Use Fence If on, the fence contents are moved. The option menu sets the Fence (Selection) Mode.

16.6.3 Copy Reference
To copy references selected from the References dialog box list
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references that you want to copy in the active model.
3. Click the Copy References icon.
4. In the tool settings window, turn on Use References Dialog List.
5. (Optional) To make multiple copies, turn on Copies and in the adjacent field, key in the number of copies.
6. Enter a data point to begin the copy.
7. Drag the reference to the desired location, and enter a data point to place the copied model.
Tool Settings for Copy Reference:
Copies Set the number of copies to make.
If on, any clipping boundary and/or clipping mask(s) is copied along with the reference.
Move Boundary
with Reference If off, only the reference is copied, while any clipping boundary and/or clipping mask(s) is
ignored.
Use Reference
If on, the models selected on the References dialog are copied.
Dialog List
Use Fence If on, the fence's contents are copied. The option menu sets the Fence (Selection) Mode.

16.6.4 Scale Reference
To scale references selected from the References dialog box list
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references that you want to scale in the active model.
3. Click the Scale References icon.
4. In the tool settings window, choose the scaling Method (and key in the scale factor or ratio, if applicable).
6. Enter a data point about which the reference is scaled.
Tool Settings for Scale Reference:

Method by which the referenced model is scaled.
• Scale Factor — Reference is scaled by a specified factor. For example, a scale factor
of 2.00000 doubles the size of the reference.
• Absolute Ratio — Reference is scaled by a specified ratio of Master file units to
Method
Reference file units. For example, to set five active model master units for each
referenced model master unit, key in 5 in the left-hand field and 1 in the right-hand
field.
• By Points — Model is scaled by points entered.
If on, any clipping boundary and/or clipping mask(s) is scaled along with the reference.
Move Boundary
with Reference If off, only the reference is scaled, while any clipping boundary and/or clipping mask(s)
remain as is.
Use Reference
If on, the reference(s) selected in the References dialog is scaled.
Dialog List
(Fence present only) If on, the fence contents are scaled. The option menu sets the Fence
Use Fence
(Selection) Mode.

16.6.5 Rotate Reference
To rotate references selected from the References dialog box list
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references that you want to rotate in the active model.
3. Click the Rotate References icon.
4. In the tool settings window, choose the rotate Method (and key in X, Y, Z coordinates if method is By
Angles).
6. Enter a data point about which the references are rotated.
Tool Settings for Rotate Reference:

Sets the method by which the reference is rotated.
• By Angles — Sets the rotation angle(s). In 2D, sets the rotation angle(s) on the z-
Method
axis only. In 3D, sets the rotation angle(s) on the x-, y-, and z axes.
• By Points — Sets the point about which the reference is rotated.
X Angle to rotate the reference about the x axis for 3D files.
Y Angle to rotate the reference about the y axis for 3D files.
Z Angle to rotate the reference about the z axis for both 2D and 3D files.
If on, any clipping boundary and/or clipping mask(s) is rotated with the reference.
Move Boundary
with Reference If off, only the reference is rotated, with any clipping boundary and/or clipping mask(s)
remaining as is.
Use Reference
If on, the model(s) selected in the References dialog is rotated.
Dialog List
Use Fence If on, the fence contents are rotated. The option menu sets the Fence (Selection) Mode.

16.6.6 Mirror Reference
To mirror references selected from the References dialog box list
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references you want to mirror in the active model.
3. Click the Mirror Reference icon.
4. In the tool settings window, choose the Method: About Vertical Line or About Horizontal Line.
6. Enter a data point about which the reference is to be mirrored.
Tool Settings for Mirror Reference:

Sets the method by which the reference is mirrored.
Method
• About Horizontal Line — The references is mirrored about a horizontal axis.
• About Vertical Line — The reference is mirrored about a vertical axis.
If on, any clipping boundary and/or clipping mask(s) are mirrored with the reference.
Move Boundary
with Reference If off, only the reference is mirrored, with any clipping boundary and/or clipping mask(s)
remaining as is.
Use Reference
If on, the reference(s) selected in the References dialog is mirrored.
Dialog List
Use Fence If on, the fence contents are mirrored. The option menu sets the Fence (Selection) Mode.

16.6.7 Detach Reference
To detach a reference file
1. In the References dialog box's list box, select the references you want detach from the active design.
2. Click the Detach Reference icon.
3. In the Alert box, choose OK.
Tool Settings for Detach Reference:

Use Reference
If on, the reference(s) selected in the References dialog is detached from the master file.
Dialog List
If on, the references contained by the fence are detached from the active model. The option
Use Fence
menu sets the Fence (Selection) Mode.

16.6.8 Misc Reference tools
Exchange - Opens the selected reference, retaining the same view configuration.
Open in New Session - Opens the selected reference — file and model — in a new session.
Activate - Activates the selected reference for in-place editing. A black dot indicates it is activated. Only
references that are not open for editing in another session can be activated.
• When a reference is activated only operations on the activated reference are permitted.
• If you activate another reference, the currently activated reference is automatically deactivated.
• The reference is locked so that it cannot be edited in another session.
• DGN library data, such as levels and level filters, is not available in an activated reference file.
• By default, all elements in references above the activated reference in the file hierarchy, as well as
the active model, are displayed with an override color. You can control whether or not an override
color is used, and what the color is, with the Active Reference Override Color preference (Workspace
> Preferences > Reference > Active Reference Override Color).
• To return to editing the active model, you have to deactivate the reference.
Deactivate - Deactivates the selected reference so that you can return to editing the active model. A gray check
mark indicates it is deactivated.
Merge into Master - Merges referenced models into the master DGN file.
 The Fit View tool settings may be changed to only fit elements in a reference file.

16.7 Locating Lost Reference Attachments

If MicroStation cannot locate one or more references, upon opening a DGN file or model, a warning appears in the
message center. Details for that message list the references that were not found. When the reference dialog box
is opened, references that are not found are displayed in red.
To update a reference when MicroStation cannot locate the file
1. In References dialog box's list box, double-click the reference.

or
In the References dialog box's list box, select the reference. Then, from the Settings menu, choose
Attachment.
The Attachment Settings dialog box opens.
2. In the File Name field, key in the new file specification.

or
Click the Browse button, select the reference in the Reattach Reference dialog box, and then click OK to
return to the Attachment Settings dialog box.
3. Click OK.

16.8 Reference Priority and Transparency:

You can set the Transparency and Priority settings for reference attachments by using the References dialog.
Right-click on the column heading, to reveal a check list of options, as shown below. Toggle on the Transparency
and Priority options.
Priority can also be assigned to reference files. By default, where a reference is attached it is assigned a value of 0
as shown below.
Values for priority assigned to a reference file can range from -5 to 5.

The hierarchy for display priority is reference : level : element. Therefore, when an element is drawn over
referenced graphics, the reference file will take priority over elements placed in the master design file on a level
that has the same priority value.
 In most cases, users will want to assign reference attachments a value of -1 to ensure that the
referenced graphics display beneath the master design file.
Transparency can be assigned to Reference files. Transparency may vary from 0% to 100%. An example of how to
edit the Transparency is shown below.

16.9 Reference Preference Settings

The Reference category in the Preferences dialog box has a set of attachment options (from the Reference
Attachment dialog box).

16.10 Raster References

A Raster Reference file is a bitmapped picture/image that can be used as a backdrop. MicroStation has the ability
to attach raster image files, such as aerial photos, scanned drawings and maps, as references to your active design
file. A wide variety of raster file formats are supported, including PDF, BMP, JPG, SID and TIFF Files and many
others.
Raster attachments are treated as any standard element. They can be placed on a level.
Raster Manager lets you control the display of one or more image files within a DGN file view.
The Raster Manager dialog box allows you to control and manipulate raster images within MicroStation. To access
the Raster Manager dialog box it can be accessed several ways.
To open the Raster Manager dialog box:
a. Select File > Raster Manager from the Main Menu Bar
Or
b. Select the Raster Manager icon from the Primary Tools tool bar like shown below.
This opens the Raster Manager dialog box like below:
The Raster Manager dialog box shows the Hierarchy pane and the Image List box, as well as a set of toolbar icons
to manage file priorities, to access raster tools and to manage the display of Rasters.

16.10.1 Attach Raster Reference Dialog Box
The Raster Manager dialog box is used to attach raster references to the active design file. Opens when File >
Attach is selected in the Raster Manager dialog box, or when the Attach tool is selected in the Raster Control tool
box. Raster attachments can be attached in a Raster Reference.
• Place Interactively - (Disabled if more than one file selected) If ON, lets you place the image interactively,
with two data points. The number of rows and columns, and the aspect ratio of the image, are preserved.
The image's pixel size is modified to fit the rectangle.
• Open Settings Dialog - Opens the Attachment Options dialog which lets you set the options for the
attachment. This is used to review or change the attributes of the newly attached raster.

16.10.2 Modifying Raster File Attachments
The display of raster image files that have been attached to a design file may be modified in various ways.
Included in Raster Manager are the tools that let you:
• Clip, or crop an image's display.
• Mask off an area within an image.
• Modify or remove a clipping polygon.
• Move, and/or resize an image.
• Warp an image to fit an area in the design.
When a raster attachment is modified with Raster Manager, no changes are made to the original file, just to its
attachment information in the design file. To keep warping, mirroring and resizing modifications, a new file must
be created using the Save As menu with the Option > Resample toggle on. Clipping and transparency settings are
not exported when an image is resampled. By default, these settings are kept in the design file attachment and
are lost if the image is detached.
16.10.3 Raster Preferences
The Preferences dialog box Raster Manager Category contains controls that are used to set preferences related to
raster references.
When attached, Rasters inherit the current symbology (Level, Line Weight, and Line Style). You can override these
default values by defining Default Raster Attributes in the Raster Manager section of the Preferences dialog box.

Table of Contents:
17.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 3
17.2 PROJECT EXPLORER DIALOG BOX................................................................................... 3
17.3 MANAGING LINK SETS .................................................................................................... 4


17.1 Introduction
Using the Project Explorer (File > Project Explorer) can help you manage project data within
MicroStation. Project data refers primarily to design and sheet models, and the files in which models are
stored (DGN and DWG), but can also include:
 saved views
 references
 supporting documentation stored in Microsoft Office files as well as other data file formats
To group project data, you create link sets. A link set can contain links to DGN and DWG files, design
and sheet models, references, saved views, and supporting documentation created in other file formats.
Each link set is an independent object, stored as non-graphical data, in a DGN file or in a DGN library
(.dgnlib).
17.2 Project Explorer Dialog Box

Links are added to link sets in the Project Explorer dialog box. Within a link set, you can organize links
into a hierarchy of folders. You can also move links within a folder or to a different folder. Folders and
their links are organized in the Project Explorer dialog box. An example is shown below.
When you are working in a DGN file, you can go to the Project Explorer to see the linked files. To follow
a link, you simply right-click the link and choose Open.

17.3 Managing Link Sets

The Project Explorer dialog is used to select and manage Link Sets. To open or create a new Link Set,
select the magnifying glass icon on the Project Explorer dialog as shown below.
The Link Sets dialog is opened.
This dialog is used to create and manage link sets. The four icons are available:
New Link Set
Copy link Set
Import Link Set
Delete Link Set

A drop down menu is available to select the source file for link sets as shown below.
When a Link Set is selected, it is displayed in the Project Explorer dialog as shown below.
The selected Link Set can be edited using the four icons on the Project Explorer dialog.
New Link
New URL
New Folder
Delete Folder or Link

Chapter 18 – Plotting
Table of Contents:
18.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 3
18.2 IPLOT ............................................................................................................................ 3
18.3 PROJECTWISE INTERPLOT ORGANIZER ........................................................................... 4
18.4 PDF FILES ...................................................................................................................... 4
18.5 TIFF FILES ...................................................................................................................... 5
18.6 PEN TABLES................................................................................................................... 5
18.7 ELEMENT PRIORITY AND TRANSPARENCY ...................................................................... 6
18.8 GRAY SHADING FOR PLOTTING...................................................................................... 7
18.8.1 GRAY SHADE REFERENCES .............................................................................................. 7


18.1 Introduction
MicroStation gives you some flexible options for plotting your drawings to a variety of printers and plotters and
allowing you to create PDFs and TIFFs.
Plotting and Printing are interchangeable terms meant to describe the conversion of a MicroStation design file,
whether DGN, DWG or DXF into either a hardcopy printout or another type of file, such as Adobe’s PDF format.
Usually, the terms “plot” or “print” refer to a hardcopy of a MicroStation design file. If someone desires a
particular file format other than MicroStation’s native DGN format, they can ask specifically for that format. The
most requested formats for printing are the PDF and TIFF formats.
Before printing there is some preparation and settings that must be considered:
• What part of the design to print
• What levels and/or references to print
• What drawing scale to print
To print/plot or create PDF and TIFF files go to the following web site for the user guides under the Plotting Shared
Documents section:
http://portal.dot.state.oh.us/Divisions/Engineering/Production/CADD/Pages/PlottingResource.aspx
 It will be necessary for IT staff to establish print queues prior to creating the plot, PDF or TIFF for your
Office or District since printers vary in each Office. Print Queue is another name for the system printer that
will create the print/plot, or PDF and TIFF.
If you do not have a print queue(s) established, please contact your IT staff or CADD Administrator for
assistance.
18.2 IPLOT
IPLOT is a Plotting solution that can be purchased from Bentley as an addition to MicroStation. IPLOT is an
interface that is activated from within the MicroStation environment that provides you with a simple way to
specify the plot area, the size, scale, origin, rotation, and the printer for generating a Plot and a PDF or TIFF image.
 Before you can access the IPLOT - Main dialog box, you must have MicroStation activated and a file
displayed.
To use IPLOT select one of the Plotting Shared Documents below at the following link:
• Printing MS Files using IPLOT

• Creating MS Files as PDFs using IPLOT
• Creating MS Files as TIFFs using IPLOT

18.3 ProjectWise InterPlot Organizer

ProjectWise InterPlot Organizer is a Plotting solution that can be purchased from Bentley as an addition to
MicroStation. InterPlot Organizer is an interface that is activated outside the MicroStation environment that
provides a simple way to specify the plot area, the size, scale, origin, rotation, and the printer for generating a Plot
and PDF or TIFF image from a single or multiple design (.dgn) file(s). You can add, delete, reorder, view and modify
the properties of individual or multiple design files.
 You do not need to have MicroStation activated, Organizer allows you to operate outside the CAD
environment.
Using Organizer, you can print or create images without saving or reusing the plot sets. Or, you can create a plot
set for a particular set of files to be plotted periodically (for example, at various milestone dates for a project).
To use InterPLOT Organizer select one of the Plotting Shared Documents below at the following link:
• Printing MS Files using InterPlot Org

• Creating MS Files as PDFs using InterPlot Org
• Creating MS Files as TIFFs using InterPlot Org
18.4 PDF Files

PDF is a universal file format that preserves all of the fonts, formatting, colors, and graphics of any source
document, regardless of the application and platform used to create it. PDF files are compact and can be shared,
viewed, navigated, and printed exactly as intended by anyone with the free Adobe Acrobat reader. Because of its
features, PDF is the standard for electronic document distribution on the internet.
To create PDFs select one of the Plotting Shared Documents below at the following link:
• Creating MS Files as PDFs using IPLOT

• Creating MS Files as PDFs using InterPlot Org

18.5 TIFF Files

TIFF is one of the most commonly used and versatile graphics formats in desktop publishing. TIFF (Tagged Image
File Format) is a bitmap graphics format that is ideal for high resolution printing to PostScript printers.
To create TIFFs select one of the Plotting Shared Documents below at the following link:
• Creating MS Files as TIFFs using IPLOT

• Creating MS Files as TIFFs using InterPlot Org
18.6 Pen Tables

ODOT uses pen tables that are applied to the graphical elements when the design file is plotted. The pen tables
translate various elements in the design file to the final output version which will be used to map MicroStation line
weights to specific pen sizes, or thicknesses. An example would be mapping all WT=0 lines to 0.006-inch and WT=1
to a 0.014-inch line thickness in order to differentiate the design file elements’ weights on the plotted sheet. Line
thickness should be plotted as shown in the following table:
Thickness
Element Weight
(approximate inches)
WT= 0 0.006”
WT=1 0.014”
WT=2 0.026”
WT=3 0.036”
WT=4 0.046”
WT=5 0.056”
WT=6 0.066”
WT=7 0.076”
WT=8 0.086”
WT=9 0.096”
WT>=10 0.106”
All elements should be plotted black, except for the major and minor grid lines on cross-section or profile sheets.
Major and minor grid lines on cross-section and profile sheets should be prioritized so that the details will be
plotted on top of the grids. Cross-section and profile grids should be plotted as shown in the Location and Design
Manual, Volume 3, Figure 1202-1.
The IPLOT pen tables are located in the i:\ODOTstd\V8istd\iplot\ directory for ODOT users.
Standard MicroStation and IPLOT pen tables are available on ODOT’s Pen Tables web page. Files available for
download include user documentation for defining pen table functions. These Pen tables and plot drivers were
created to match ODOT’s current plotting standards.

The following are the standard ODOT pen tables used:
• half.pen - for 8-1/2”x11” or 11”x17” prints, PDFs & TIFFs

• full.pen - for 22”X34” prints, PDFs & TIFFs
• halfc.pen - for Color 8-1/2”x11” or 11”x17” prints, PDFs & TIFFs
• fullc.pen - for Color 22”X34” prints, PDFs & TIFFs
Due to the variation in plotting accuracy of various printers, the thicknesses shown in the previous table may vary
with the various printers/plotters.
18.7 Element Priority and Transparency

Priority
Display priority is a technique for specifying the relative front-to-back order in which 2D elements appear in a 2D
model (only), when they are displayed in a view. Elements with the highest priority values are displayed in front of
elements with a lower value. Elements, levels, and references can be assigned a Priority value. Since all elements
in 3D models have their own explicit 3D coordinate space, display priority is only useful or necessary for 2D
models.
Transparency
Transparent elements allow you to see other graphic elements which are “underneath” them. A transparency
value can be set with dialog boxes, as well as elements, levels, and references.
Display transparency is not supported in editions prior to XM. Files created using display transparency, therefore,
will appear opaque when displayed in previous editions of MicroStation V8, or when saved to DGN V7 or DWG.
At this time, the Priority and Transparency settings have been incorporated into ODOT CADD Standards to
facilitate the on-screen viewing of plan features.
 The use of Transparency for plotting is currently under development and will be implemented at a future
date when it is working correctly.

18.8 Gray Shading for Plotting

What is gray shading? Gray shading allows anything that is underneath to show through when plotted or it allows
elements to appear faded in the background.
ODOT has created levels for gray shading to assist users when they need the ability to shade different areas on the
same plan sheet using different colors instead of patterning.
The Shading levels assists the user in helping them from remembering which gray color number to use when they
want to gray shade an area of their plan sheet. Just select the level and the color is already preselected
automatically to use with the use of ByLevel symbology.
The following are the Shading levels and the gray colors assigned to the level:
Level Name: Color Number:

SC_Shading1 41
SC_Shading2 43
SC_Shading3 45
 When using ODOT’s pen tables to gray shade - Remember that the pen table recognizes the Level and
Color not just the color to gray shade an area.
18.8.1 Gray Shade References
Using ODOT’s pen tables the user has the ability to gray shade References that are attached. When using this
feature the Reference attached fades into the background.
In the Logical Name field for the Reference selected type in anything that begins with gray, for example gray1,
gray2, etc.

Chapter 19 – ODOT Application
Table of Contents:
19.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 3
19.2 AVAILABLE APPLICATIONS ............................................................................................. 3
19.2.1 MDL - DEFINED ........................................................................................................... 4
19.2.2 MICROSTATION VBA – DEFINED...................................................................................... 4
19.2.3 VB – DEFINED ............................................................................................................. 4


Chapter 19 – ODOT Application
19.1 Introduction
This chapter introduces you to the various custom applications ODOT maintains for use in ODOT plan
development.
The applications referenced in this section are intended to provide uniform CADD standards for organizations that
perform CADD related services for ODOT using MicroStation and GEOPAK. Please review all documentation prior
to installation/use. The professional shall have final responsibility for the accuracy of all input and output of
computer-based applications.
19.2 Available Applications

ODOT has developed as series of custom applications to be used by designers to supplement MicroStation,
GEOPAK, and other CADD processes. The applications available include MDL, VBA for MicroStation, and stand
alone VB programs. The CADD Section develops, maintains, and provides updates to the applications on a
quarterly basis (if required). Updates or changes to the applications are published on the web page listed below,
or available to anyone currently signed up for the CADD Standards Email distribution list.
The applications can be accessed from the following locations:
• Web:
http://www.dot.state.oh.us/Divisions/Engineering/CADDMapping/CADD/Pages/MicroStationApps.aspx
• Directory: \\(server)\ODOTstd\V8istd\vba
\\(server)\ODOTstd\V8istd\mdlapps
 The directory structure listed above is based on ODOT CADD Standards. If you have any questions
regarding file and/or directory location, see your CADD Manager.
• Inside MicroStaton: Each application can be accessed from the Main Menu bar under the ODOT pull-
down menu as shown below.
The ODOT pull-down menu has been configured to group the applications logically.

ODOT’s pull-down menu for applications is defined in a MicroStation DGN Library, ODOT_Menu.dgnlib, which can
be obtained from the ODOT CADD Standards website. The DGN library is attached by use of the MicroStation
configuration variable MS_DGNLIBLIST.
The applications are categorized based on application type, i.e. MDL, MicroStation Visual Basic for Applications
(VBA), and Visual Basic (VB) Applications (.exe). Documentation can be found on the web site or in the
ODOTstd/V8istd/vba/doc directory and ODOTstd/V8istd/mdlapps/doc directory. The following sections will
provide a definition of the application types.
19.2.1 MDL - Defined
The following excerpt is from the Bentley Help:
MDL stands for MicroStation Development Language — essentially the C language executed by MicroStation. Many
parts of standard MicroStation are actually MDL applications.
An MDL application can only be used in MicroStation. MicroStation can be (and almost always is) operated with
more than one MDL application loaded at a time. MicroStation can manage multiple MDL applications
simultaneously. In fact, there are no practical limitations placed on the number of MDL applications that can be
loaded.
19.2.2 MicroStation VBA – Defined
The following excerpt is from Wikipedia and Bentley Help:
VBA is an event-driven implementation of Microsoft's Visual Basic, a procedural programming language, and
associated integrated development environment (IDE), which is built into most Microsoft Office applications. By
embedding the VBA IDE into their applications, developers can build custom solutions using Microsoft Visual
Basic.VBA can be used to control almost all aspects of the host application, including manipulating user interface
features, such as menus and toolbars, and working with custom user forms or dialog boxes.
MicroStation implements Microsoft's Visual Basic for Applications (VBA). MicroStation VBA has extensions to VBA
that allow interaction to the MicroStation design file elements and settings.
19.2.3 VB – Defined
The following excerpt is from Wikipedia:
Visual Basic (VB) is a third-generation event-driven programming language and associated development
environment (IDE) from Microsoft for its COM programming model.
Visual Basic was derived from BASIC and enables the rapid application development (RAD) of graphical user
interface (GUI) applications, access to databases using Data Access Objects DAO, Remote Data Objects RDO, or
ActiveX Data Objects ADO, and creation of ActiveX controls and objects. Scripting languages such as VBA and
VBScript are syntactically similar to Visual Basic, but perform differently.
A programmer can put together an application using the components provided with Visual Basic itself.

Odot Microstation Training

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Odot Microstation Training

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

ODOT MicroStation V8i

Ohio Department of Transportation

Chapter 1 – MicroStation Basics

1.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 1-3

ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual 1

Chapter 2 – MicroStation Design Environment

2.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 2-3

2 ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual

2.7 FUNCTION KEYS ......................................................................................................... 2-41

Chapter 3 – Viewing Tools

3.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 3-3

ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual 3

4.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 4-3

5.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 5-3

4 ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual

Chapter 6 – Basic Drawing Tools

6.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 6-4

ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual 5

Chapter 7 – Drawing with Precision

7.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 7-3

7.3 ACCUSNAP ................................................................................................................. 7-10

6 ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual

Chapter 8 – Modification Tools

8.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 8-3

ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual 7

8.5 CHANGE ATTRIBUTES ................................................................................................. 8-34

Chapter 9 – Selecting and Grouping Elements

9.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 9-3

8 ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual

10.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 10-3

ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual 9

11.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 11-3

10 ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual

Chapter 12 – Hatching and Patterning

12.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 12-3

ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual 11

13.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 13-3

13.3 OTHER DIMENSION TOOLS ..................................................................................... 13-24

13.4 DIMENSION STYLES ................................................................................................ 13-26

13.5 EDITING DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................ 13-30

13.6 CONTROLLING THE DISPLAY OF DIMENSIONS ......................................................... 13-32

12 ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual

Chapter 14 – Custom Line Styles

14.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 14-3

Chapter 15 – Information and Measuring Tools

15.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 15-3

ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual 13

16.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 16-3

16.7 LOCATING LOST REFERENCE ATTACHMENTS ........................................................... 16-32

14 ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual

Chapter 17 – Project Explorer

17.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 17-3

18.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 18-3

Chapter 19 – ODOT Applications

19.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 19-3

ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual 15

ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual 1-1

This page intentionally left blank.

1-2 ODOT MicroStation V8i Training Manual

1.2 ODOT CADD Standards

1.2.1 CADD Standards Manual

1.2.2 MicroStation Standard CADD File Locations